Home

FmX Integrated Display User Guide

1. F Left Pump 130 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Autopilot Steering Pump Knees Calibration screen This calibration procedure determines the compensation required for dead band in the steering pumps Autopilot Steering Pump Knees Calibration A N CAUTION The vehicle needs to move during the Hydraulic Tracked Pump Knees calibration procedure To avoid injury be prepared for vehicle movement The instructions for this calibration test span several pages on screen Follow the instructions on each page FmX Integrated Display User Guide 131 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Tracked vehicle steering wheel calibration 1 Turn off the engine but keep the ignition key in the run position 2 From the Autopilot Calibration screen select Steering Interface Calibration JD Steering Interface Calibration 3 Keeping to the suggested time interval follow the on screen instructions to turn the steering wheel right and left full lock 4 Follow the on screen instructions until Calibration Complete appears on screen Saving a vehicle profile Note From firmware version 3 0 on the FmX integrated display the Vehicle Profile Location defaults to From Database Once you configure and calibrate the Autopilot system for your vehicle you can save that information for later use This can be useful if you want to adjust the settings or if you move the display from one vehicle
2. 000 00000 176 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 9 Contents 10 Enabling NMEA message output 44n45508204405 8 ood Gee OSES Eee Gea eeeS 176 Pnaplino apace charo 615 0 a a a a a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ere re ee a 177 Configuring radar OUUOUNta 4 6 04 2 yo oo bee amp e Scag ee ge ee 4 Ep eee Gee 178 Implement Configuration 1 2 ee sasn sssssnns 181 ISU GOUCION 6 cue ws oe oe teen eee sd a ee eee OE Ree Oe eA 182 Creating an MM PlCMCUl ossis enrere sg tuie eeek bee eeee seers Rete lt 182 Selecting an existing implement 24o 0644 4 eRe hee eee hese e8G4 He so o d os Ooo 183 Importing an implement from the FieldManager display 00004 183 Adjusting the implement settings 244 cct4504 eee bee e ee tee eee eee ES oe S 184 Maplement Ipe 2 4 4 back eae eee eee eee one eee Seek ee eee ee ee Se 184 Measte menl Se gn 6 oh ee oe eo ep ee oie oh a oe ee A ee 185 GCOMCING wees ae Bao ee S RE ROO SECO EA A EROS ee ee ee 186 OVO eee tasa ge ease ete eas hati wae rae ese eat et eee ete teeess 187 PWNCHCS Guage ene asec eeuwe st Pane ene a he eeeee hae ee 6 ee eee ee 187 Deleting an TOpIEmiENt s ss nese ead ea cae iene e ee bean iba Gus senate 188 Overview of Plugins 1 20 eee ee 189 intr OCUCHIOUTO DIUCING se eass es aaa ae oa eee eae eee ete es eae 190 Viewing the currently installed plugins 24 28 ee eo eA ee ee eo eh Re ee 191 Adding OF removing DUC ereua saoe Bee eee oh eee eae eee Bee eS 19
3. Jump detect This will filter out some jumps in the height readings When selected the following values must be entered Threshold the change in height value that will trigger the filter Decay Time once the filter is triggered this will be the amount of time it takes to 216 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Step 3 Calibrating the FieldLevel Il valve module Note Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode Refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type 1 From the Configuration screen select the FieldLevel II plugin and then tap Calibrate FieldLevel II Calibration 2 Set the vehicle throttle to 100 3 Tap Start The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers This process takes approximately 8 10 minutes To manually calibrate the valve enter values in the three Manual Calibration fields and then tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 217 9 Water Management Step 4 Configuring the FieldLevel Il GPS receiver The FieldLevel II system uses its own GPS receiver to record the exact position of the leveling blade To configure this receiver 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option that is associated with the FieldLevel II plugin and then tap Setup FieldLevel Il GPS Receiver Settings 2 From the Rece
4. 60 Series Combines Make sure Moisture Sensor has version 1 20C loaded 60 Series Combines Check if Crop Type will change on the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FmX has been changed 70 Series Combines Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FmX Raise head up or down to see if the display shows a change for header height 432 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus system diagnostics serial port Port A B is there another value other than zero for CAN messages State 3 During boot up Will show which controller is not visible armrest header unit moisture sensor FmX integrated display has lost communication from the CAN bus 60 Series Combines Make sure Moisture Sensor has version 1 20C loaded 60 Series Combines Check if Crop Type will change on the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FmX has been changed 70 Series Combines Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FmxX Raise head up or down to see if the display shows a change for header height Check cabling Recycle Power shut down the display and the combine and wait 20 seconds before powering the FmX and the combine back up Make sure other logging devices are not connected to the CAN bus disconnect Mobile Processor or GS2 display Other reasons yiel
5. Adding record keeping information To add the following categories tap Event Attributes The name of the vehicle operator Operator EPA The vehicle operator s EPA license number for spreading restricted use or state restricted pesticides or herbicides The year that the crop is going to be harvested The country or region where the farm is located 42 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Rem Beseripion ooOO The vehicle used in the operation Implement The implement connected to the vehicle Application Method The application method used for example spraying seeding or harvesting Wind speed The average wind speed Wind gust speed The maximum speed of any wind gusts Wind direction The average wind direction Sky conditions The amount of cloud cover The humidity percentage The crop grown in this field If spraying the pest that the spray targets Custom 1 Additional information of your choosing Additional information of your choosing FmX Integrated Display User Guide 43 3 Getting Started Closing a field Once you finish using a field tap KA to close it The following dialog appears a gt ina OW cl WOOL ke LO oO Lance a returns to the CL Return to the currently open field Close the current field and return to the Home screen Open another Close the current field and open a new field Saving an event summary When a field is closed the system saves an HTML s
6. Note If you want to create a headland based on the A line pattern select the straight line pattern and then set the A heading for the internal line Then complete the following steps 1 From the Swath Management screen select the Headlands field pattern from the drop down list 2 Inthe Headlands window enter the width of the headland boundary in swaths For example if you enter 2 the headland will be 2 swaths wide 3 Tap New Headland The Run screen appears with the headland definition buttons on the Mapping tab 4 Drive to the start point of the headland and then tap Record A red line appears behind the vehicle to show that the headland is being recorded Note You must define the inner pattern before you complete the headland 5 To define the inner pattern tap Infill The Mapping tab changes to show the inner pattern buttons Note Once infill lines have been created they cannot be moved 6 When you reach where you want the A point tap Set A 7 Doone of the following To create an internal AB Line drive to where you want the B point at least 50 m 164 ft and then tap Set B Tocreate an internal A line tap Use A 8 Tap Back to HL The buttons on the Mapping tab change a Oo back to their original appearance cae HL When you complete the headland circuit the system will draw a straight line from the vehicle back to the start point so drive the vehicle to a position
7. Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate Valve calibration 1 Tap Valve Calibration The following screen appears Rate and Section Controller Valve Calibration 314 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 2 Select the Valve tab and then select the appropriate value for each field For this field Select one of the following options Valve Type Pump Servo The Pump Servo setting controls an electric motor which actuates a hydraulic valve As the valve actuates it adjusts the hydraulic flow to the pump This valve adjusts the application rate indirectly PWM The PWM pump setting controls an electric solenoid valve which adjusts the hydraulic flow to the pump This valve adjusts the application rate indirectly Fast Servo A 4 wire electric motor turns a ball or butterfly valve to increase or decrease flow for example a DICKEY john servo Mid Tech servo or Raven Fast Valve Servo A 2 wire electric motor turns a ball or butterfly valve to increase or decrease flow for example a Raven standard servo Hardi bypass scenario Most commonly used on Hardi sprayers equipped with 3 way section valves that return flow to tank when the boom section is off Plumbing Inline Valve is in the solution line going to the boom The valve opens to increase application rate Bypass Valve is in the Return to Tank line The valve closes to increase the application rate Valve Behavior Clos
8. 1 2 ee 121 Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction 124 Calibrating the line acquisition aggressiveness 0000s 128 Calibrating a tracked tractor seces ass ore ee da ee he ee a eee 129 Tracked vehicle steering wheel calibration 2 2 20 0 0 00 132 PAVING a vehicle prolll s 444 eeuheeeet ees e ep hee es 45 4e4R 5s chan au 132 Coniguring the GPs TeCceVer 42 452004 045s6 465 2 44a be ede s oa Gee He 134 Adjusting the Aggressiveness setting 0 eee ee ee 134 Di play ony WIOUCsaneunaeeeand ene toe Gee eaee eis eeeee ea eh e 134 Connecting the FmX integrated display for display onlymode 135 ROW Gd IC e ta Geen ete hak Ee S Eee ea ee SE Oe ae RES ES 137 Configuring the Row Guidance plugin on the FmX display 138 Row Guidance Diagnostics screen 2 2 ee ee 139 Operating the Row Guidance plugin 0 0 eee eee 140 Connecting the system o44 n8baeeeneeuneheetd tae heedgeae nae tea 142 EZ Pilot assisted steering system guidance 000 2 eee eee ee 143 Installing the EZ Pilot system lt u 5 6424526 e863 6 Pee ae Oe Ae SS Ree he He 143 Connecting the EZ Pilot Syst ni ss ses pease eaire taeraa sae ea a 144 PO cas aee r eae ts Gog neu aes od G54 145 Calibrating and configuring the EZ Pilot system 000004 148 EZ Pilot plugin diagnostics 2 4 5 42 on ee ee i ae Rh ak ee ee be geet 154 Operating the
9. 2 Select Yield Monitor Calibrate Yield l Press agis FmX Integrated Display User Guide 437 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin 2 Select Yield Monitor 3 View page 2 4 Verify that the combines grain tank and the truck wagon are both empty and tap Start Yield Calibration Start is Stopped j Ib 516 3 438 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 5 Harvest about 500 bushels and hit Stop Yield Calibration is Running Weight Ib Stop 6 Unload the grain harvested during calibration onto truck wagon 7 Select button next change to enter the weight of the truck wagon in wet pounds Yield Calibration Start is Stopped Weight hans b zi Command Center 70 Series Combines Calibrate Moisture 1 Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center 2 Select g 3 Press hs j on the Command Center 4 Continue to press until page 2 appears page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab 5 Inthe Calibrations list select Moisture 6 Follow the steps to perform the calibration 7 Highlight the arrow and then press the Confirm switch on the armrest FmX Integrated Display User Guide 439 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin 440 Calibrate Yield l 2i 6 ie Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center Continue to press ks Wrench tab In the Calibrations list select Yield Calibrations Follow the
10. From the Run screen do the following 1 Tap Q Without closing the field the Configuration screen appears ee Implement panier Field Open J Lock Config OK 2 Select the TrueGuide plugin and then tap Calibrate 3 Inthe TrueGuide Calibration screen tap Next and then follow the on screen instructions TrueGuide Calibration Chive at 7 18 mph Run the test at beast four times WARNING When you press the test buttons the tractor wil steer sharply to one side o Spid 001 mph Count Oins Cet Tor Tractor Response Tractor is not engaged Please press the engage button sex Ee FmX Integrated Display User Guide 367 12 The TrueGuide Plugin 368 4 Complete the test at least four times and then tap OK TrueGuide Calibration Drive at 7 16 mph Run the test at least four times WARNING When you press the test buttons the tractor will steer sharply to onc aide 5 Inthe Calibration screen tap OK to return to the open field Engaging and disengaging the TrueGuide system To engage the Autopilot and the TrueGuide systems using the FmX integrated display you must have a guidance line defined and the vehicle must be within the engage limits of the system To manually engage the systems do one of the following e Tap the Engage button on the main guidance screen e Press the optional remote engage foot pedal or rocker switch To disengage the systems do one of the following e T
11. Power Management Setup 2 From the Turn Off Backlight drop down list select the required period of inactivity until the backlight dims 3 From the Turn Off System drop down list select the required period of inactivity until the display shuts down 4 Tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Time zone Note Configuring the time zone can cause multiple warning messages to appear Do not be concerned by this To synchronize the system time to the GPS signals 1 From the Display Setup screen select Timezone and then tap Setup 2 Ifthe time is not correct tap the or button to change the time by 1 hour increments Signal input module for an OEM switch interface The signal input module SIM can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on screen buttons and features A SIM must be connected to assign features to the buttons Signal Input Assignment To assign the buttons highlight the action in the right column and then tap lt Set to set the action to the specified input FmX Integrated Display User Guide 101 4 Display Setup 102 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Vehicle Guidance Options In this chapter Manual guidance m Autopilot automated steering system guidance Row Guidance EZ Pilot assisted steering system guidance m EZ Steer assisted steering system guidance You must configure the vehicle guidance settings before using the F
12. Forcing the system to turn off A N CAUTION Do not do this unless absolutely necessary If the display is writing to the USB memory stick this method of shutting down the system could corrupt the data on the card If possible use one of the other shutdown methods See Turning off the display page 28 If the display stops responding hold down the Power button for 10 seconds to force the system to turn off FmX Integrated Display User Guide 501 24 Troubleshooting 502 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide
13. 10 The Field IQ Plugin Note If a Rawson module was configured the correct calibration is selected automatically Gear Ratio Description Specifies the actual ratio from the applicaiton rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters To start out leave the value at 1 000 After the calibration test the system may adjust this number 4 Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration A N CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 320 5 Lap Test d The system asks if you would like to prime the system Tap Yes To to ensure that the seed disk is full the system turns the seed disks one revolution Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on screen turn off the master switch In the Number of Seed Meter Revolutions enter a value and then tap Start The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration Five to 10 revolutions is recommended Follow the on screen prompts of operating the master switch After the system turns the
14. 2WD tractor For an EZ Pilot system installed on tractors that have SuperSteer for example New Holland TG If the tractor has a SuperSteer front axle for best performance Reduce the Online Aggressiveness value Line up close to the swath and make certain that the front wheels are straight before engaging the EZ Pilot system To get smoother performance when the vehicle is pulling an implement over tilled ground enable the Diff Lock This prevents the machine from pulling sharply to the left or right If you are calibrating on a hard surface turn off Diff Lock AWD tractor The EZ Pilot system can be installed on Case IH STX tractors with Accusteer For optimal performance disable Accusteer using the switch in the cab if possible Sprayer It is common for these vehicles to have slow steering To compensate for this use high aggressiveness If you experience large slow oscillations increase the aggressiveness When you configure the system on a sprayer the Sprayer steering delay setting is available on the Vehicle Setup screen Some sprayers have steering that is slow to react after you turn the steering wheel The system uses the steering delay setting to compensate for this slowness and ensure that steering corrections occur at the correct point Swather When you configure the system on a swather the Swather steering delay setting is available on the Vehicle Setup screen Some swathers have steering that is slow to react after the st
15. 9 Water Management 2 From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup The System Setup screen appears 3 From the list of system settings on the left select Data Files and then tap Manage The Data Files management screen appears 4 From the list on the right directories that already exist in the display select the Designs directory and then tap Copy The directory is copied to the USB memory stick 5 When the Copy completed message appears tap OK The copied directory appears in the list of directories on the left side of the Data Files screen Working with MultiPlane designs When the leveling model is set to Multiplane Design and the FmX integrated display opens a field it scans the AgGPS Designs folder and any MultiPlane gps control files that are close to your current position are displayed Select the appropriate control file and then tap OK The control file will be loaded displaying a color cut fill map of the field red cut blue fill 224 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 When you use a MultiPlane design control file the FieldLevel II system remains in Auto mode if you drive off the design but maintains the design height it had when you left the design If you disengage Auto mode when you are off the design the display will not allow you to re engage the FieldLevel II system until your position is back over the color cut fill map ay Be 4bo000000000Rm0000000
16. Aggressiveness Freeplay offset 4 Confirm the calibration settings Note You may have to perform the EZ Steer calibration more than once to achieve optimal results Entering vehicle settings 1 Install the EZ Steer system plugin for more information see the FX integrated display Plug ins guide 2 From the Configuration screen select the EZ Steer plugin and then tap Setup FmX Integrated Display User Guide 159 5 Vehicle Guidance Options The EZ Steer Settings screen appears EZ Steer Settings 3 From the Vehicle Type drop down list select the vehicle type 4 Inthe Axle To Antenna Offset field enter the horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna Ifthe antenna is in front of the axle enter a Forward distance Ifthe antenna is behind the axle enter a Back distance Note Measure the offset distance as accurately as possible within 3 an incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance 5 Inthe Antenna Height field enter the height of the antenna measured from the ground to the base of the antenna 6 Inthe Wheelbase field enter the wheelbase measurement horizontal distance between the front and rear axles Note The Engage Steering and Advanced tabs on this screen are populated automatically with starting values based on the vehicle type selected 7 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears 160 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 C
17. Autopilot Line Acquisition Adjust the line acquisition aggressiveness slider The slider controls how aggressively the implement approaches the guidance line using a scale from 50 to 150 The optimal value for each profile is not necessarily 100 it varies for different implement profiles FmX Integrated Display User Guide 393 13 The TrueTracker Plugin Using the TrueTracker system When you have configured the TrueTracker plugin you can begin driving in the field with implement steering Main guidance screen The FmX integrated displays main guidance screen changes when implement steering is enabled 000000000000909 l oo ava 220000000000 a a a a Xe Description See page operate o mo o C E Implement lightbar When implement steering is enabled a second smaller lightbar appears below the main lightbar QQVVOO000000000 08000000 0000000000 Secondary lightbar 394 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 This lightbar shows the implement guidance relative to the guidance line Each LED on the second lightbar represents 1 inch Implement GPS information button Tap the implement GPS information button to view extra implement receiver status information Tap OK to return to the Run screen implement status text items A number of status text items provide information about the implement For more information see Status items page 77 You can set these sta
18. Autopilot Manual Override Calibration berructions makes the manual override less sensitive to steenng wheel movement Waming This calibration adjustment should only be made by qualified personnel 2 Test the current manual override setting a Turn the steering wheel The Override Inactive button changes color when the Override becomes active With the system active assess whether the manual override feature is at an acceptable level of sensitivity for e Speed of steering wheel turn e Distance of steering wheel turn b To adjust the manual override sensitivity setting select the slider bar Move the slider bar as follows Slider bar direction Result Triggers manual override The value to the right of the slider shows the current setting The total range is 0 5 to 2 5 where 0 5 is the most sensitive setting and 2 5 is the least sensitive c To try the new setting tap OK The Vehicle Calibration screen appears d Select Manual Override again The Autopilot Manual Override Calibration screen appears again e Repeat Steps b c and d to test each new setting X Tip You can also evaluate the performance of the manual override feature under conditions of loading and or activities which may affect the pressure of the hydraulic system For example you can turn on the auxiliary hydraulics while you evaluate the manual override sensitivity f Tap OK to accept the
19. Error conditions include sensors disconnected from the CAN bus or a sensor transmitting invalid data Invalid data could occur if the sensor malfunctions or more commonly if it is seeing a target other than plants and soil For example when setting up the system the sensors may be pointed into the air or against wet asphalt either of these will likely generate an error code from a sensor Description Red gt NIR Red reflectance higher than NIR BOTH lt 01 Both reflectances are below 0 01 RED lt 01 Red reflectance below 0 01 4 NIR lt 01 NIR reflectance below 0 01 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 359 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin Ere code Description BOTH gt 98 Either reflectance above 0 98 ee NIR lt 015 NIR net reflectance below 0 15 To access the GreenSeeker diagnostics do the following 1 From the Home screen tap A 2 Inthe Current Configurations screen tap Configure 3 From the Configuration screen select the GreenSeeker plugin and then tap Diagnostics Application information Delivery System and Liquid Control As with any variable rate system the minimum and maximum rates obtainable are dependent upon the delivery system The RT200 interface module is capable of requesting any rate but the actual rates delivered are dependent upon the rate controller and its components Most liquid rate control systems control or throttle the pressure of the system to affect flow and applicat
20. Most of the plugins have features that appear on a tab on the Run screen To select a tab tap the icon in the tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 GPS receiver information The button in the top right of the Run screen provides information about GPS Description o Satellite Information button Current number of satellites Type and age of correction If the GPS signal is lost completely the No GPS message appears Tap the satellite information button to view the information on it There can be more than one row depending on the plugin that is gin verse prre installed If the plugin requires a second GPS receiver for example Altitude 434 2 8 the second GPS receiver mounted on the implement for the Satellites 42 TrueTracker system then the upper information row relates to the vehicle GPS receiver and the lower information row relates to Correction Type RTK the second GPS receiver Status Fixed Age 1 0 secs Engage button When you create a guidance line you can use the Engage button to engage or disengage the Autopilot automated steering system The button has three states Engage status Button color Vehicle icon color O Eee Cannot engage To engage the vehicle tap Engage The system engages and the button turns green FmX Integrated Display User Guide 47 3 Getting Started To disengage the vehicle do one of the following e Turn the steering wheel to t
21. P East The distance that the primary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin point FmX Integrated Display User Guide 81 4 Display Setup Description P GPS Status P H Error The GPS correction type that the primary blade GPS receiver is currently using Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the primary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions The Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the primary blade receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near P HDOP each other in the sky the HDOP is higher lower is better P Heading P Latitude The current heading of the primary blade in degrees from direct north The primary blade s current latitude P Longitude P Network ID P North The primary blade s current longitude The RTK network ID of the primary blade receiver s corrections The distance that the primary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point P Offset A separate plane that is parallel to the design plane The offset if defined by a single measurement which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane P Offset X The Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark P Offset Y P Satellites The Relative Position Y
22. Select the Engage tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Configuring the Engage tab l 3 4 In the Engage tab adjust the Operator Alert Timeout value The alert appears if the operator does not respond within the defined period of time If the operator still fails to respond the vehicle begins to drive in a tight loop Set the Two Stage Engage status KE R The Engage button requires multiple taps to engage e The first tap engages implement steering e The second tap engages the vehicle steering e The third tap disengages both implement and vehicle steering The Engage button engages with one tap e The first tap engages implement and vehicle steering e The second tap disengages both implement and vehicle steering In the Coverage Log list select either Manual or When Engaged Select the Steering tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide 377 13 The TrueTracker Plugin 378 Configuring the Steering tab Implement Controller Setup j Horm l In the Steering tab enter a value in the Nudge Increment field Use this increment to set the amount by which the Nudge buttons move the line back to the correct path or by which the Trim buttons move the vehicle position The guidance line can move off target requiring Nudge as a result of GPS position drift when you return to the field for guidance for example after you pause or turn off the system GBPS satellit
23. The guidance system will now function as a traditional Autopilot system Note Row sensors override the set Autopilot guidance line When turning around in headlands with the sensor turned on random strikes on stubble cause the system to veer off the set Autopilot guidance line It is recommended to travel through the headlands with Autopilot only to guide to the proper row Once the unharvested crop is entered turn on the row sensors Tip When operating in crop that was planted manually or using WAAS guidance and that is being harvested using WAAS guidance satellite drift and or operator guidance can lead to misalignment of the guidance line with the crop Depending on conditions it may be necessary to shift or skip the guidance line to coordinate with the crop and guidance line This will be evident when the sensors guide down the proper row with offline distance is shown to be 0 but the selected guidance line is not centered on the current swath on the display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 141 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Connecting the system Once the Row Guidance plugin has been installed add the FmX integrated display as shown Item Description Trimble part number 1 Display 93000 xx 2 Display power cable 66694 Power relay 67259 4 Basic power cable 67258 5 Display to NavController II 75741 QO NavController II power adapter 67095 7 NavController II 52200 02 O Antenna cable 142 FmX Integrated D
24. Yield Monitoring plugin icon Loads and Calibration Tap to view loads and edit load names o New Load End Load Tap to start new load or end current load Engage button Green Auto guidance engaged Gray Auto guidance can be engaged Red Auto guidance cannot be engaged Logging button Green Logging enabled Red Logging Enable and disable Tap the left arrow on the right hand side to disable logging on the rows from right to left Tap the right arrow on the left hands side to disable logging on the rows from left to right FmX Integrated Display User Guide 425 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin feme pepon OOOO Row Status Indicator Shows the logging status of each section of the combine heaser Green Harvesting and logging are working as normal tab Red Logging has been manually disabled The swath area has been reduced by up to one sixteenth per red line Grey Active rows have overlapped a previously harvested area Tap a section to view more details Page 1 of the plugin tab Page 2 of the plugin tab Description Description o The name of the field and material you are harvesting 426 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 O pesma OOOO Current information being displayed Tap Loads and Calibration to access the Loads and Calibration tab Toggle button e Tap New Load to start recording a new load e Tap End Load to stop recording the current load Tap Edit
25. display to receive data FmX Integrated Display User Guide 415 16 The Serial Data Input Plugin Connecting serial data input To connect a device to the FmX integrated display connect the Variable Rate Control cable P N 67091 to the port D connector on the display The other end of the Variable Rate Control cable connects to a serial connector Note An additional adaptor may be required depending on the pin out for the serial device Configuring serial data input 1 Install the Serial Data Input plugin See Adding or removing a plugin page 192 2 On the Configuration screen select the Serial Data Input plugin and then tap Setup Serial Data Input 3 Inthe Port list select the port that the device is connected to It is usually P5 Serial I O Configuration settings for that port appear on the right of the screen 4 Set the following to the values at which the sensor outputs data Baud rate Parity Data bits Stop bits 5 The Prefix and Suffix fields are the start and end points of the data you want to collect To log data from the start of the line leave the Prefix field empty To drop introductory characters enter them in the Prefix field For example if you receive data that begins GPGGA enter 24GP in the Prefix field The logged data will begin GGA 416 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Data Input Plugin 16 Note 24 is the ASCII code for T
26. e Rawson Installation Instructions For the latest versions of these documents go to www trimble com agriculture Note When using Rawson drives and when using more than one material you must have a separate Section Control Module SCM for materials using Rawson drives FmX Integrated Display User Guide 255 10 The Field IQ Plugin Field IQ master switch box functions Increment decrement switch Increases the applied amount by a set amount the amount is set in the Setup screen Rate tab Rate switch Choose to use preset Rate 1 preset Rate 2 or Manual rate LED indicator Red Unit is powered but not communicating with the FmX integrated display Green Unit is powered and communicating with the FmX integrated display Yellow Unit is initializing communications with the FmX integrated display Automatic Manual section switch Automatic mode The FmX integrated display automatically opens and closes sections when entering areas of overlap non apply zones or crossing boundaries Manual mode The sections are controlled by the user using the Field IQ system X Tip You can switch from Automatic to Manual mode while traveling Master switch 5a Jump start position The same functions as in Master On are active plus the system is overridden to use a preset control speed the speed is set in the Setup screen Override tab 5b On position The sections and rate are ready to be commanded by the FmX integrated display
27. e the GPS receiver must have a clear view of the sky Note Vehicle movement will result in unsatisfactory performance including longer convergence times and positional offsets To enable the Autoseed technology 1 On the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen appears 2 Inthe Corrections drop down list select either OmniSTAR HP XP or OmniSTAR HP XP VBS The Autoseed button becomes available 3 Select Autoseed and then tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 175 6 The GPS Receiver Configuring a GPS receiver with the AgRemote software The FmX integrated display has a virtual AgRemote interface for manually adjusting GPS receiver settings This is recommended for advanced users only To access the virtual AgRemote interface 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Diagnostics The GPS Status screen appears 2 Tap AgRemote The virtual AgRemote interface appears For more information on the correct use of the AgRemote interface refer to the AgRemote Software Guide for AgGPS Receivers on www trimble com Enabling NMEA message output 176 The NMEA message formats are a standard format through which GPS receivers can communicate If you have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller you can enable NMEA message output from the controller so that the device receives NMEA GPS positions The me
28. insufficient movement was sensed for the Response Detected calibration to complete If the problem persists the hydraulic installation could be faulty 120 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Message Error Unable To Determine A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone Retry and if DZ Try Again the problem persists contact Technical Support Error Software Problem The software was unable to complete the calibration due to insufficient Detected movement of the vehicle If the problem persists contact Technical Support Calibrating the proportional steering gain Note Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration Perform the proportional steering gain calibration only when the Autopilot system performance is less than satisfactory The proportional steering gain PGain setting enables you to reach a compromise between rapid steering response and stability Modifications to the PGain setting affect two steering characteristics Slew Time The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far right position and vice versa e Overshoot The percentage by which the front wheels exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value To correct slight variations caused by valve current response friction and hydraulic fluid viscosity alter these settings High PGain values Low PGain v
29. plant coverage should be at least 50 The RT200 system with RT Commander can use the sensor mounted booms to read the NRS or the GreenSeeker Hand Held sensor can be used to determine field conditions To collect sensor readings for the NRS the boom mounted sensor or handheld sensor should be passed over the crop at 32 48 above the canopy A large area of the NRS and Non Reference portion of the field should be sensed to accurately determine their respective NDVI values Once the NDVI values have been measured they can be entered into the GreenSeeker plugin on the FmX integrated display This can be done automatically with the boom mounted sensors or manually entered if the GreenSeeker hand held is used If the response is variable across the field select an area where the difference between the Reference and the Non Reference areas are most apparent This assures that the algorithm will determine a rate that utilizes the highest yield potential prediction and maximum response to N for that year In order to estimate yield potential most algorithms utilize an environmental factor Growing Degree Days or Days From Planting which takes into account the weather and length of time that has passed since planting Be aware that different GDD variations are used for different crops and to obtain the GDD value the planting date and sensing date must be known Regional values for GDD may be found on the internet For more information re
30. set the COM port to COM B Drive A does not have a configuration for this and will always use COM A e Set Bit 7 mode to off Bit 7 mode sends two prescriptions and is not supported by the FmX integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 403 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin 404 Hardi 5500 and 6500 To use the Hardi 5500 or 6500 you need a special adapter cable Trimble P N DCA6219 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 that is connected to Port A or B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable Notes Connect the cable to serial port 1 on the Hardi controller On the Hardi 6500 you must use the terminal version 1 55 or later and Jobcom version 1 55 or later The Hardi 6500 must be set to metric units Configuring the controller To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX display do the following 1 Turn on the controller 2 Hold the ESC button while turning on the Hardi contoller 3 In the extended menu use the arrow keys to select the 4 Data Exchange menu 4 Enter the COM 1 setup and the set the following Equipment type VRA remote Protocol Hardi VRA Baud Rate 9600 5 Turn of the controller and then turn it on 6 Goto Menu 2 3 and select VRA Remote Control Enable Flex Air The FmX integrated display can send rates to the Tyler Flex Air variable rate controller The controller can have four channels main liquid co applicator and
31. 0 0 000000 00004 319 Calibrating the Rawson modules for spreading 0000 eee 319 Calpratine tie PWM TANE S e 22 esaa a a a a 323 Operating in the field lt 4c ueaep ees cessie kitea ae ee eee ees a Kaap 328 Setting up the Field IQ system for Anhydrous anaana 329 Marna oa a a a re ee ee ee ee 329 PAyOUbIA0 6 6224e58 56R07 994 Fo 2 oR 66h aes ee eee es Bee 331 SECON CON O IA 14 ages nee ee ee eee ey tee ee ee ee eee 332 Rale CONWOMIAY ss e527 tad eee eee nieee E per a 334 PO A0s ee e ees a e ee eee eae 337 Operation tab aoaaa aa eh ee Eee ee he hee ee eee ee ee eee ee 338 Material Setup Complete screen kau td eee eda bee eee S Oe be Pea eee es 338 Calibrating the implement lift switch 66 e044n0 bee Ate DEES ee Bee 339 Caliiramme tie moduleS 2 442s656862e86en sehen eee deeeeetagedes 339 Operatie m Need 644422265 hea oes oes e oh eee eee ees eae ees 341 Using the Diagnostics tabu ss euecw ek heute ne ee ae kakera te aes he eo erae 342 The GreenSeeker Plugin 2 anaana 345 MitTOCUCHOM se 220n ee ee easeeeeragreyeaeseeuee eee sere ee ees eae ans 346 DEUNOS 6awe cere eee een epee e eee te behead a ee eee eae oe 346 Greenseeker primary COMpPONENS j 43 5 25665806065 80244848545 28a GH ees 347 ai ete Anao eLO anda gge cme te oust aenee aeee eo eee eae eae eees 348 Greenoceker dengo Ss 2454 a athe eee ens ees bee eee oe ee eee ee eee 348 Senor MOURNS Dracket 644 sse ts eee eee Reet sae thee ee eA eee 348
32. 100 TOCO en a a eee eet ee ee a tae a ra 101 Signal input module for an OEM switch interface 0 101 Vehicle Guidance Options anasa aana aaan 103 M O e ee e ee e eee Se hee ee eee EEA 104 Conneurine the GPS receiver 64 462 09h tee eGteseue dae Soege ra AG ees 105 Run screen for manual guidance 2 aaaea eee 105 Autopilot automated steering system guidance 2 0 eee eee 106 Configuring the Vehicle tab ee ooo e o4 Ghee re ee oe ee a oe ee ee 106 Configuring the Engage tab te 6 eee ea eoees pee ba aod chbe eeowe ch aes 107 Configuring the Steering tab cake ge ee ce eee Oa Ue ou C4446 oh aed OE week 107 Configuring the Advanced ab eo 2h as he 44 0 oe Oe Ra oe ESS GEO ET ES EHH 109 DElCCHIIS INC VENICE sore e eee Gashheeden yee behead ae eee a eeaaen 109 Autopilot calibration s4 lt 4h 5 44 06 8 he eRe Soe PRR EMER ET Eee eR EES 111 Common calibrationitems 2 2 0 ee 111 Calibrating the Autopilot option 4 o 5 244 aaaea 112 Configuring the controller orientation aasan aaa 113 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Contents Configuring the manual override sensitivity 0 000002 eee eee 114 Calibrating the AutoSense device 22464054 eeb e ere eee SE wee eee eee ee 116 Calibrating the steering angle sensor 1 2 2 2 0 eee eee eee 116 Calibrating the automated steering deadzone 0 0 eee eee 119 Calibrating the proportional steering gain
33. 300 and Ag3000 Modems 19 Connecting the DCM 300 modem P3 GPS connector A N CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController II harness O will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty FmX integrated display 93100 01 FmX power cable 66694 FmX power cable with relay and switch power bus 67259 Basic power cable 67258 e FmX to NavController II cable with port replicator 75741 2 pin DTM to 2 pin DT power adaptor 67095 7 NavController Il 55563 00 O 8m GPS TNC TNC RT angle cable 76442 m eee FmX Integrated Display User Guide 445 19 446 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems Unlocking the DCM 300 modem with passcodes The DCM 300 modem is available at different prices for Asset Tracking and VRS File Transfer The VRS File Transfer functionality in the DCM 300 modem must be unlocked to use VRS or data transfer To unlock the DCM 300 with a passcode you must connect the modem to the FmX display and then turn it on The Unlock screen shows the DCM 300 when connected enter the passcode in the FmX display and then tap OK to send it to the modem When the modem is successfully unlocked a message appears on the FmX display reboot
34. 399 3 Select the port for the variable rate controller See page 399 4 Configure the spray boom in the FmX integrated display See page page 399 5 Enable and configure the variable rate controller in the FmX integrated display See page page 399 oY Configure the variable rate controller See page page 401 7 Set any other features of the variable rate controller See page page 406 Installing a non Trimble variable rate controller Use the hardware provided with your variable rate controller to mount it in the vehicle cab To use a variable rate controller you must connect it to port A or B of the FmX integrated display using the connection cable P N 67091 and the associated cable for the supported controller Your controller may need a special adaptor cable to work correctly If so contact your local Trimble reseller Most controllers also need to be configured to accept input data from the FmX integrated display For additional instructions see the following section for your controller Note Always make sure that the serial port connector is in place with screws firmly tightened if available FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 Enabling the Serial Rate Control plugin For instructions on installing the Serial Rate Control plugin see Entering the password to activate a plugin page 193 Configuring the spray boom in the FmX integrated display Configure the spray boom as
35. 6 cm 3 in as an incorrect distance may result in poor steering performance Take the measurement from the antenna to the correct point of your vehicle as follows Rear axle e MFWD e Sprayer e Floater e Truck Front axle e AWD tractor e Combine Track center e Tracked tractor If the antenna is e in front of the axle enter a Forward distance e behind the axle enter a Behind distance Antenna Height The distance between the ground and the top of the GPS antenna Engage tab vehicie Engage Steering Advant sea The Engage tab enables you to control the systems engage and disengage behavior if you need to change the automatically populated settings Seon Desetpton OO Operator timeout If the steering system is engaged and there has been no operator input to the display for longer than the operator timeout period a message appears on the screen If you acknowledge the message within 30 seconds the system does not disengage 146 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Description Minimum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit the system disengages Maximum speed Maximum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit the system disengages Maximum angle Maximum angle at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at an angle grea
36. Application information Best practice FmX Integrated Display User Guide 345 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin Introduction The GreenSeeker RT200 Variable Rate Application and Mapping System is a tool for variably applying agricultural chemicals based on real time measurements of the crop The sensors measure normalized difference vegetation index NDVI of the plants while traversing the field The applicator provides the ability to variably apply agricultural chemicals in real time as the applicator passes over the crop The NDVI based variable rate algorithm and parameters may be selected in the field and all rate changes are then made on the go so there are no lengthy delays between evaluating the crop and application When applying fertilizer or other material the NDVI the target rate and the applied rate are logged Some rate controllers connected via serial cable to the FmX do not respond with an As Applied value The RT200 GreenSeeker sensors emits light at two specific wavelengths and measures the reflected light The microprocessor in the sensor analyzes the reflected light and calculates the resulting Index value The data from each sensor is collected by the Interface Module which is processed and then transmitted to the FmX integrated display in the cab The FmX integrated display displays the NDVI in real time and sends the appropriate rates to the applicator s rate controller The rate controller may be an internal
37. BO FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management To access the entries in the dictionary E 2 3 4 In the Field Setup screen tap New To view the available items tap the down arrow Select the appropriate item from the list Tap OK You can still enter new information as before but these entries are not added to the data dictionary To add items to the data dictionary edit the txt file on an office computer FmX Integrated Display User Guide 23 489 23 Data Management 490 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting In this chapter Advanced diagnostics Viewing raw serial data Restoring default settings Viewing FmX integrated display diagnostic information GPS Status screen Screen snaps Forcing the system to turn off CHAPTER This chapter describes how to analyze problems that may occur with the FmX integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 491 24 Troubleshooting Advanced diagnostics the System options Diagnostics mode enables you to configure advanced guidance settings Most users will not need to adjust these settings 1 From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Diagnostics Serial Port System information Advanced Sertinge Power Levels r Conector A ConmectorC Smal Sent i serial Sent fare Received __ Received 6029 CAN Devices Connector B Sent Recenred CAN D
38. Configure each tab in the Implement Setup screen For more information see Adjusting the implement settings page 184 Note For a multiplane survey set the Swath Width field to the width that you will use for collecting interior points When you are not using FieldLevel GPS set the front back offset F B Offset to 0 In the Rows field enter 1 Operating the WM Survey plugin Run screen When the WM Survey plugin is installed the following tab appears on the main guidance screen the Run screen Create Delete Benchmark Benchmark AutoPlane Creating a survey Benchmarks Before you can create a survey you must set a benchmark a point at a known location When you are leveling you can use benchmarks to do two things e Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re calibrate your exact position This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling e Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point The first benchmark you create on a field is called the master benchmark Field coordinates are calculated from this point Subsequent benchmarks are called benchmarks In either plan or perspective view e A master benchmark appears as an orange flag labeled MB FB 202 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 e Benchmarks appear as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number B am
39. Copy The data is copied to the other column To copy data from the current USB memory stick the source to another USB memory stick the destination 1 Copy all of the data from the source to the internal memory 2 When copying is complete remove the source from the USB slot and then insert the destination 3 Copy all of the data from the internal memory to the destination Deleting data If you need to create more space you can use the FmX integrated display to e Delete any unused clients farms fields events or all of the data in the internal memory e Delete any unused clients farms fields events or all of the data on the USB memory stick Deleting selected data from the internal memory CAUTION Deleting data is permanent You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data 1 From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup If necessary enter the administration password and then tap OK Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears Tap Delete Data The Delete Data Storage screen appears os S In the Delete Data storage tabs select Internal Memory and then select Field Data from the list of available data types 6 Inthe Client Farm Field or Event drop down lists select the item to delete and then tap Delete 7 When prompted tap Yes The data in the internal memory is deleted FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Deleting all o
40. EZ Pilot performance If you are not an advanced user follow the tabs in the given order to adjust the steering parameters See Calibrating and setting the EZ Pilot parameters page 151 Span 0 0 raph Average Offline Apressiness Free Play Ceerride Senditnv y navonces While stil on the AB line nudge left or right then engage EZ Pilot Minimize offline distance by adjusting the setting on this tab Status Connected Current Warning Disngaged Too show 3 In the Advanced tab make the required changes and then tap OK The Configuration screen appears Operating the EZ Pilot system with the FmX integrated display Note When operating the vehicle in transport or on a public roadway the red EZ Pilot override switch must be in the off down position Engaging the system To engage the EZ Pilot system you must have an open field in the Run screen and have an A B line defined The vehicle must be within the engage limits configured in the Engage tab To manually engage the EZ Pilot system tap the engage button on the main guidance screen or press the engage button on the optional remote control Disengaging the system Turning the steering wheel manually disengages the EZ Pilot system It is recommended that you check this setting before you start using the system in a new installation by engaging on a line and then turning the wheel until EZ Pilot disengages To adjust the amount of force required to disengage th
41. EZ Pilot system with the FmX integrated display 155 BZ PiOL DUG SCICCNs 24 a c6555 Pes bG A PEG eae ee ena eae eee bee EAP Es 156 Vehicle specific performance 2 0 ee 157 After using the EZ Pilot system sh6 626444 oh08e 52 dae e Gado ee oe eee oes 157 EZ Steer assisted steering system guidance 2 2 0 eee ee 158 Installing the EZ Steer controller 2 0 2 ee ee 158 Connecting the EZ Steer system 2 2 0 eee ees 158 Calibrating and configuring the EZ Steer system 0 000 ee ee 159 Operating the EZ Steer system with the FmX integrated display 166 BN CACCOCUOUS tan kane tense ee te oer eed bebe Gee eee eee do os 166 Pngasine ING syste a eeacepeaeee eset ee ene epee aeeanee eve a E 167 Disengaging the system dw eee ad oS AGE ee ERE E Eee Oe EONS OE eee RE SY 167 EZ oteer PINSISCICC er scrapers aes kee pee eee eee ea eee eee 168 Vehicle specific performance 4 44 deen cena nee de aheewren gS 468 sae as 168 ATLer ising the EZ Steer Syste i sod eeedes oe ened ht Sosa ee Gee bee ees 169 The GPS Receive ccc eK RK ee ee ii 171 Configuring the Gro IeCcWel 4ia4eere need Fd aoe eee soe ee eae whe ee ears 172 Entering 450 NMEZWeQuencles 4 22 ence ae edimi Gade et edes kote ated 173 Enabling SecureR IK 2aeangea esere kG os 405 82S Ko ot Baa SOS ee a Oo 174 Autoseed fast restart technology 2 0 eee 175 Configuring a GPS receiver with the AgRemote software
42. Enter End of Row Warning Distance screen enter the distance for the end of row warning Note Longer vehicles that may take longer to turn require an earlier warning which dictates a greater distance 5 In the Autosense list select either On or Off Most recent Autopilot systems use an AutoSense device that require this setting be set to On Older Autopilot system installations that use the electrical system to measure the vehicle status select the appropriate connections under Step 7 Legacy Sensors 6 Inthe Valve On speed list select either Normal Low or Ultra Low Under normal operating speeds this should be set to Normal For vehicles operating at very slow speeds this should be set to Low or Ultra Low Display speed thresholds Speed threshold gt 0 4 m s 1 3 ft s Low gt 0 1 m s 0 3 ft s gt 0 02 m s 0 07 ft s Note The Autopilot NavController II must have firmware version 5 10 or later to support the Low and Ultra Low settings 7 Inthe Legacy Sensors list select either None Wheel Speed Only Gear Lever Only or Wheel and Gear Note The Legacy Sensors list is only available when the Autosense setting is set to Off 108 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Configuring the Advanced tab Vehicle Controller Setup Vehick Cngege Steering Advanced Simulation Mode Note For more information on how to utilize the features in the Advanced tab conta
43. Field IQ Plugin Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Material Liayanut Section Control Material Name ora Material Type Select your Field IQ application type Note If spraying chemicals use the liquid fertilizer setting Row Crop Seed Liquid Granular Seed Granular Fertilizer Anhydrous Application Rate Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 1 Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 2 Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings e Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material e Target Rate Units Choose what units your target rate will apply e Bushel Weight Enter the bu
44. Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 1 Select the Steering Angle procedure from the calibration list See Autopilot calibration page 111 Autopilot Steering Sensor Calibration e instructions wtetnng Angle Senior Calibration Press Next to proceed 2 Move the tractor forward slowly 3 Center the steering wheel and then tap Next 4 Turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then tap Next If the steering wheel is not turned completely to the left or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement an error message appears The value in the Volts field is updated as you turn the steering wheel Autopilot Steering Sensor Calibration p instruc tons Steer Full Right and Press Next FmX Integrated Display User Guide 117 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Turn the steering wheel completely to the right and then tap Next If the steering wheel is not turned to the full right position or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement an error message appears The following screen appears P Ingtroctons weer Straight and Press Next 6 Center the steering wheel While the wheel is at the center position tap Next The value in the Volts field is updated as you turn the steering wheel Autopilot Steering Sensor Calibration P Instructions Press Restart to Repeat the Test 7 Tap OK to accept the calibration 118 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guid
45. Logging varieties page 65 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 263 10 The Field IQ Plugin St EEE EEE EEE Application Rate Rate Alarms 264 Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 1 Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 2 Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material Target Rate Units Choose what units your target rate will apply Bushel Weight Enter the bushel weight of the current material Tap Setup to set alarm thresholds and adjust the way seed statistics are calculated High Alarm Triggers when the rate reaches the selected percentage above t
46. Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the Contact Point implement rotates about For planters this is typically the seeding units or the midpoint of several rows of tools Note For modeled implements shortening this setting causes the implement to come online more quickly while lengthening the setting causes the implement to come online more slowly 186 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Implement Configuration 7 Overlap Use this tab to set the nfill Boundary When you map a headland you create an inner boundary and an outer boundary Select nner to shut off sections when the implement reaches the inner boundary Select Outer to shut off sections when the implement reaches the outer boundary Switches Implement Setup FmX Integrated Display User Guide 187 7 Implement Configuration In the Switches tab tap Setup Add Edit Implement Lift Sensor Set the following in the Add Edit Implement Lift Sensor dialog Status Select ON if you have one or more implement switches tied into your implements control system Select OFF if you have no implement switches tied into your implements control system Number of Select the number of implement switches that you have tied into your implement Switches control system Minimum Enter the number of implement switches the system should recognize to Changed determine if the implement is lifted Switches Deleting an implement To del
47. New Leader controllers use a nominal flow rate Yield and a step size to describe rates Set the Default rate in the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen to match the Yield value or nominal flow rate in the Rawson controller Any non zero rate will be adjusted to the nearest value that the controller can select A rate of zero turns off the hydraulic drive Note For best result when creating prescriptions use rates in 2 4 or 6 7 increments of the default rate Select the percentage used on FmX integrated display If you have a dual channel Rawson Accu Rate controller see page 403 Configuring the controller To allow the display to change the rates on the controller the controller must first be put into GPS mode Otherwise the display will log only the rates being used 1 Turn on the controller 2 Tap the MODE button twice FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 3 Tap the SET button to switch the controller between GPS and non GP S Communications Connect the FmX integrated display to the controller with Rawson cable P N 69730 and Trimble cable P N 67091 and set the controller baud rate to 9600 Using the controller When in GPS mode the hydraulic drive operates only when both the switch and the display allow the drive to be on Set the hydraulic drive switch on the controller to the ON position If you need to quickly turn off the hydraulic drive use the switch
48. Overview to access the Choose Status Items tab where you can edit the information that appears on this page Tap to return to the previous plugin screen Edit or delete Load Details Tap to enter the Test Weight Select Auto or Manual Moisture Override If you select Manual use the virtual keypad to enter the moisture value This value is used until you select Auto Tap the blue arrow buttons to change the status items that you want to appear on Page 2 and then tap OK General setup information Before setting up the Yield Monitoring plugin on the FmX integrated display ensure that e All components are installed on the vehicle e The Yield Monitoring plugin has been added to the FmX integrated display configuration See Adding or removing a plugin page 192 e The implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation See Chapter 7 Implement Configuration Setting up the Yield Monitoring plugin In the Configuration screen select the Yield Monitoring plugin and then tap Setup e Setup see page 428 e Operation see page 429 e Crop see page 430 e Map Legend see page 431 e Serial see page 431 The following yield monitoring systems are supported e Claas 670 and 700 series North America only e John Deere 60 and 70 series e Serial data input FmX Integrated Display User Guide 427 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Note The Serial tab is not available when you are setting up a Claas or Jo
49. Rawson Control Modules that need calibration Hydraulic test The purpose of this test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system 1 From the Field IQ Calibration screen tap Hydraulic Test A N CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 2 Tap Next 3 Enter the initial motor RPM The default setting is 300 Trimble also recommends that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds 4 Tap Start 276 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 5 The next screen provides the status of each motor Field IQ Hydraulic Test No Error The test was successful Motor Stalled The motors did not have sufficient oil flow ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor For more information refer to the Rawson System Installation Instructions Disconnected The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the motor 6 Tap Stop to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 277 10 The Field IQ Plugin Calibrating the PWM valves Drive Calibration From the Field IQ Calibration screen select Drive Calibration The Field IQ Drive Calibration screen has four tabs Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Field IQ Drive Calibration 278 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 A
50. Select from Air pressure vacuum Liquid pressure NH3 pressure Bin level RPM Gate Height Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify which wire is controlling the sensor FmX Integrated Display User Guide 317 10 The Field IQ Plugin Operation tab Field IQ Setup Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting controls when to shut the system down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override This setting maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops Speed below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds When Outside Field Switch off The system will not apply outside the boundary area Boundary Operate The system will apply outside the boundary area Material Controlled Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled By individually Disabled The Material is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Rate Snapping Enabled Shows the ap
51. Servo Servo valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump Linear Actuator A valve that creates a linear motion as opposed to a rotary motion Electric over Hydraulic A valve that uses electric current to control the hydraulic valve output The Field IQ Plugin 10 Feedback Setup tab Shaft Encoder Constant Pulses per revolution Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratiion Constant Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio FmX Integrated Display User Guide 289 10 The Field IQ Plugin Row Monitoring tab Field IQ Setup CF aay sus iter EEE Row Monitoring Disabled Turn row monitoring off Blockage Select this option for air seeding or when applying granular material Setup Row Sensor Enable Turn individual row sensors on or off Row Sensor Wiring Select which wire each row sensor is wired to 290 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup itn SECON Loner wae heft l When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information poa Sensor Type Select from Air pressure vacuum Liquid pressure NH3 pressure Bin level RPM Gate Height e Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Senso
52. Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the Rawson modules Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate 1 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate 2 From the Field Q Calibration screen select the module that you want to calibrate Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first See above Field IQ Calibration 274 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 3 Select the first module to calibrate The Planter Calibration screen appears Planter Calibration Re Rete Controller 4937801425 Calibrate Limas Note Ifa Rawson module was configured the correct calibration is selected automatically Description Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the applicaiton rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters
53. User Guide 255 9 Water Management 256 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Field IQ Plugin In this chapter This chapter describes how to calibrate configure and operate the Field IQ crop input Introduction control system with the FmX integrated display m Installing the Field lIQ hardware m Field lIQ master switch box functions m Field IQ 12 section switch box optional m General setup information m Linking materials m Setting up the Field IQ system for Planting m Setting up the Field IQ system for Air Seeding m Setting up the Field IQ system for Spraying m Setting up the Field IQ system for Spreading m Setting up the Field IQ system for Anhydrous m Using the Diagnostics tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide 253 10 The Field IQ Plugin Introduction When the Field IQ plugin is installed the FmX integrated display can control planters sprayers air seeders liquid strip till tool bars and spinner spreaders It can perform automatic section control using Tru Count air clutches boom valves LiquiBlock and various section control devices while also controlling rates using a prescription with Rawson drives servo valves PWM valves and various flow control devices This chapter explains how to configure and use the Field IQ plugin Different functions of the plugin can be configured and controlled by Field IQ as follows Planter Seed Section Control of up to 48 individual ro
54. We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in nonfree programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified versio
55. and the implement configuration saves each implement including plugins and physical attributes 464 I From the Configuration screen select the Autopilot option and then tap Setup The Vehicle Controller Setup screen appears Edit the vehicle settings and tap OK Tap Save Config To overwrite a previous configuration file tap Switch Config and then select the previous file from the Vehicle Configuration list FmX Integrated Display User Guide Advanced Configuration 22 4 To save the file tap OK 5 Tap Save Config Before the configuration file is saved the following message appears You are about to overwrite the existing Vehicle Configuration Do you want to Save or create a New Configuration Tap either Save to overwrite or New to create a new configuration file Saving a PDF version of the current field When you close a field the system automatically creates a PDF summary file The PDF is saved to the AgGPS Summaries lt client_farm_field_event gt folder gt m omith_Ranch FaN T hi Farma gt e Ok rim Po a Event Summary Operator O Event Created Summary Created Latitude Longitude Field Area Total Boundaries Area Total Time Operator EPA License ae Hanest Year a Farm Location a eee material a Target Application Method SS Layer 1 UNKNOWN B amp S a oE the 24m 40 o poffset 0 0 application width s P Rows s 6 MOTE Totals are approximate values and may not be acceptable
56. articulated and front wheel steered vehicles three additional calibration options appear FmX Integrated Display User Guide 111 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Note The steering sensor and automated steering dead zone procedures are required The steering sensor calibration must be performed first Description Steering Sensor legacy Converts the sensor output into commands for steering full left full potentiometer right and any position in between Steering Sensor Orients autosense AutoSense Automated Steering Required to learn the vehicle s steering dead zones Deadzone Steering Gain Required only if system steering performance is unsatisfactory proportional steering gain The steering deadzone is the amount of pressure that the system must apply to the hydraulics before the wheels begin to turn Hydraulically steered tracked tractors Page 129 Tracked tractor Page 129 Calibrating the Autopilot option 1 From the Home screen tap p 2 Inthe Current Configurations screen tap Configure 3 Select the Autopilot option and then tap Calibrate Vehicle Controller Setup 4 Select an item to configure and then tap OK 112 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 5 Configure the selected item Te contare OS Configuring the controller orientation 1 Select the Controller Orientation option from the list Rotate the image to match the ordentati
57. at all times Relative X If relative heights are enabled this is the X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark Relative Y If relative heights are enabled this is the Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark Height Offset If relative heights are enabled this is the height value that will be applied to the master benchmark 244 Fmx Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 5 Select the Valve Setup tab and then set the following WM Drain Setup ped istics eee Valve Type Select the type of valve that is connected CAN Bus Select the port on the FmX integrated display that the valve module is connected to Valve Inverted Leave this field as Not Inverted unless the tank and pressure hoses have been installed incorrectly on the valve If this is the case select Inverted to eliminate the need to reverse the hoses FmX Integrated Display User Guide 245 9 Water Management 6 Select the Operation tab and then set the following mpaement steps Relwtree Heights Valve Setup Operation Force Re bench VOOR Lew Pca nceaten Ee Force Rebench If Force Rebench is set to Yes and the field has been closed and then reopened the system will not let you start work until you have re benched Use this setting if you are using a different base station setup between work sessions If you have a permanent base station setup that is never moved then you do not need to for
58. can copy implements prescriptions data dictionaries field data or delete unwanted data For more information see Copying or deleting data files page 485 Map Settings including night mode The Mapping screen has two tabs that enable you to configure various settings for the FmX integrated display The Main tab The Main tab includes the following options mem eserption OOS Map orientation Controls the direction that the screen follows the position of the vehicle Color scheme Selects either the default or night mode color scheme The night mode color theme uses darker color themes to cause less eye strain in low light conditions Save summaries On Create a save file for your work Off Do not create a save file for your work To configure the settings in the Main tab do the following 74 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 1 Inthe Display Setup screen select Map Settings X Tip For a new toolbar orientation to take effect restart the FmX integrated display 2 Select your preferred map orientation in the Map Orientation drop down list North Up When you perform a turn the field remains stationary and the vehicle turns Vehicle Up When you perform a turn the field rotates but the vehicle remains pointing up X Tip To change the map orientation from the Run screen tap the north arrow 3 Select the color scheme from the Color Scheme drop down list ee e e e e e 6
59. communicate with the motor 6 Tap Stop to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen 322 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Calibrating the PWM valves Drive Calibration From the Field IQ Calibration screen select Drive Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate The Field IQ Calibration screen has four tabs Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Field IQ Drive Calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 323 10 The Field IQ Plugin Auto Tuning WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system Field IQ Drive Calibration Note Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Field IQ Drive Calibration Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration 324 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Flow calibration The Field IQ Calibration option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rate and Section control module installed 1 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate 2 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Rate and Section Control
60. computer CAUTION If you place the files in a series of folders the combined filename and folder path may become too long and the operating system may not allow you to open the files To avoid this it is recommended that you place data in your computer s C folder 3 Copy the appropriate folder to the office computer using an application such as Windows Explorer This copies all the sub folders and files in the folder Note When you copy or move files using Windows Explorer you must keep all the shape files dbf shp and shx together so that office software can open the theme file To ensure that the files stay together always copy the entire folder rather than just the individual files If you create a new event in a field and you already have the Field folder containing any previous events on the office computer you should still copy the Field folder so that the new EventHistory information is copied across CAUTION If you use the same farm field or event names on more than one display you could accidentally overwrite existing files when you copy data to the office computer To prevent this create a separate folder for each unit For example C AgGPSFMD_SN123456 C AgGPSFMD_SN12345 C AgGPSFMD_SN123458 Data formats 470 The FmX integrated display uses the Environmental Systems Research Institute ESRI 3D shape file format for storing the layers of graphical information collected in the field for
61. considered the forward direction FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Configuring the roll offset correction Use one of the following methods to calculate the roll offset and then enter the roll offset correction to compensate for it Coulter wheel track offset method e Flag offset method Choose the method that best matches the conditions Calculating the roll offset Coulter wheel track offset method 1 Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m 1320 ft in length Reset the roll offset value to 0 zero Start a new field Create a straight AB Line Cc Ee w y Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field To do this start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created When the system is stable engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot and TrueTracker systems to complete the pass 6 At the end of the pass turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction 7 Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass 8 Inthe middle of the return pass stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is directly on the AB Line This ensures there is no cross track error 9 Park the tractor and exit the cab Evaluate the coulter wheel track pattern between the first and return paths 10 Measure the difference between t
62. control module e Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn on in advance Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off after the set number of seconds Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area Coverage Switching Overlap Enter
63. controls when to shut the system down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override This setting maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops Speed below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds When Outside Field Switch off The system will not apply outside the boundary area Boundary Operate The system will take into account latency settings when entering the boundary or exclusion zones Material Controlled Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled By individually Disabled The Material is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Rate Snapping Enabled Shows the applied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value Material Setup Complete screen When you have completed setting up a new material the Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select e Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field IQ Setup Wizard e Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 273 10 The Field IQ Plugin Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 From the Field JQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4
64. correct prescription rate column CAUTION When you select a shapefile prescription if you choose the wrong column when using a variable rate controller the applied rate will be incorrect If you select an AgInfo GDX prescription the Rate Column box does not appear 5 Set the prescription scale factor Selecting Prescription Scale Factor will give a list of scale factors for certain units Select the scale factor for whatever units are used in the prescription file 6 Set the lead time See below 7 Inthe When off prescription use list select the target rate for when you are outside the area that is covered by the prescription file See Last default or zero rate page 70 8 Tap OK to load the prescription file A prescription works only when the Field IQ rate selection switch is in the Rate 1 position If the switch is in the Rate 1 position the Increment Decrement switch is disabled If the Rate switch is in the Rate 2 position the prescription is disabled but the Increment Decrement switch does work FmX Integrated Display User Guide 69 3 Getting Started Controller lead time Lead time is the average time required by the controller before it can react to a requested rate change This value can be defined in the Select Prescription screen For example a value of 5 0 means that on average it takes the controller around five seconds to change from one rate to a new rate The lead time value is used by the FmX int
65. data from a port tap the appropriate View button The port diagnostics screen for that port appears Connector C Port Diagnostics The screen shows either ASCII text or Hex code depending on which button you select Tap ASCII to view incoming data from the NMEA data string The Hex code is for engineering use only The data appears only when tap Capture A virtual LED on the Capture button flashes to show that data is being sent or received on that serial port To view the data tap ASCII or Hex and then tap Capture Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured and then appears on the screen You can review the data or capture another snapshot Note Data shown in green is incoming data data shown in red is outgoing data Restoring default settings You can reset the display to its default values This can be useful if e you made changes to the display settings the results are poor but you cannot determine which setting was the cause e you move the display from one vehicle to another Note If you restore the defaults the Autopilot vehicle setup information is not reset To restore the default settings 1 From the Configuration screen select the System option and then tap Setup The Display Setup screen appears 2 Tap Default A confirmation screen appears 494 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24 3 Tap Yes The default settings are restored Viewing FmX integrated display diag
66. define and then tap either New or Edit 3 Define the custom entry by manually entering or updating the name and then tap OK The new or edited entry appears in the data list on the Data Dictionary Setup screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 95 4 Display Setup For more information on accessing and editing data dictionary entries see Data dictionaries page 488 Lightbar The display has two lightbar options e The virtual lightbar that appears at the top of the displays Run screen e One or more external lightbars See Chapter 21 The LB25 External Lightbar Configuring the virtual lightbar The FmX integrated display has default settings for the virtual lightbar that should suit most drivers If the settings are not appropriate configure the lightbar as follows 1 From the Display Setup screen select Lightbar and then tap Setup In the Light Bars Configuration screen the virtual lightbar from the FmX integrated display is shown along with any detected external lightbars Light Bars Configuration Pe ay i sia a F at ee at DoT nomoan S nar il 2 Select the Virtual Lightbar and then tap Setup Configure the following settings Default This setting determines setting Look ahead EZ Guide Plus 0 seconds The distance ahead of the vehicle that the time lightbar will use for LED guidance and offline distance 96 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Default This setting determin
67. delay and the system will turn on in advance Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off after the set number of seconds Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area Coverage Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area Fence Nozzles Many setups require a left fence nozzle to be configured even when there is no left fence nozzle For more information refer to your sprayer installation instructions Right Nozzle Wiring In you are using an EZ Boom replacement harness select the EZ Boom setting Otherwise select the Field IQ setting 298 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Rate
68. display so you that can see the back of it 2 Insert the USB memory stick into the USB socket FmX Integrated Display User Guide 37 2 Display Overview To remove the USB memory stick 1 Rotate the display so that you can see the back of it 2 Pull the USB memory stick out of the USB socket The display automatically detects when a memory stick is inserted or removed External lightbar s 38 The FmX integrated display also supports one or more LB25 external lightbars Purchased separately from the display the LB25 lightbar can be mounted directly on the display horizontally or vertically using the hardware that is supplied with the lightbar or mounted separately from the display in another part of the vehicles cab using the supplied suction cup mount The lights on the external lightbar replicate the operation of the lights on the display s virtual lightbar For more information on installing and configuring the LB25 external lightbar see Chapter 21 The LB25 External Lightbar FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Getting Started Introduction to field features This chapter explains the basic usage and Starting a field concepts of the FmX integrated display Closing a field The Run screen layout Introduction to coverage logging Prescriptions FmX Integrated Display User Guide 39 3 Getting Started Introduction to field features You can place field features in the field to define
69. do one of the following Tap OK to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory Tap Cancel to restart the calibration procedure FmX Integrated Display User Guide 389 13 The TrueTracker Plugin 390 Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction 1 Select Roll Antenna Compensation from the calibration list popes Aight of the line 2 Before changing these settings complete the procedures described below Notes on configuring the antenna position e Before configuring the antenna compensation make sure that the TrueTracker system is completely set up the Autopilot software is properly configured the correct GPS corrections are enabled Read this section carefully before you attempt the configuration Setting the antenna height above the ground 1 Place the tractor and implement on a flat level surface 2 Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the GPS receiver or antenna 3 Enter this value in the Antenna Height Above Ground field Setting the antenna distance from the center line 1 Place the tractor and implement on a flat level surface 2 Measure the distance from the centerline of the implement to the center of the GPS receiver or antenna 3 Enter this value into the Antenna Distance from centerline field and indicate whether it is left or right of the centerline Values to the left of the centerline are displayed as negative numbers The nose of the vehicle is
70. e 5c Off position Sections are closed and rate is set to zero Note When you use Lock in Last Postion the valve is locked and the rate is controlled by an auxiliary master valve or section Tip Use the jump start function if you lose a GPS signal or you want to start applying before your implement is up to speed a Note All systems must have a Field IQ master switch box 256 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Field IQ 12 section switch box optional Only one section switch box can be used on each system Each section switch is automatically assigned to the corresponding section The sections are read from left to right For example switch 1 assigns to the section furthest on the left when standing behind the implement For more information see the Hardware tab in Setup screen of the Field IQ plugin The section switches have different functions depending upon the status of the master Automatic Manual section control switch on the master switch box When the Automatic Manual section control switch is in the Automatic position e Ifthe section switch is in the on up position the section s assigned to it are commanded automatically by the FmX integrated display e Ifthe section switch is in the off down position the section s assigned to it are commanded to be off When the Automatic Manual section control switch is in the Manual position e Ifthe section switch is in the
71. each job to determine the appropriate nozzle selections and or application equipment settings FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 17 Select the Output Tab GreenSeeker Calibration 18 Inthe Material Type list select either Granular or Liquid 19 Tap OK Defining a Custom Table For growers or crop consultants having crop historical knowledge allows them to determine different crop input requirements based upon biomass size of the crop plant An example of this type of use would be variable rate application of defoliant in cotton or desiccant in potatoes For these cases the field is scouted or field calibrated to determine areas of the field that require different rates of defoliant The RT200 system or a GreenSeeker hand held can be used to obtain the NDVI values in representative areas of the field and then a table can be created with NDVI values corresponding to application rates To create a custom table do the following 1 From the GreenSeeker Calibration screen select the Algorithm tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide 357 11 358 The GreenSeeker Plugin 2 O o A p p ll In the Formula list select Custom Table or Auto Calibration GreenSeeker Calibration Liar Ifyou select Custom Table you must enter NDVI calibration values manually See Step 3 Ifyou select Auto Calibration the system automatically enters NDVI calibration values from
72. example spray coverage track logging points and features The three files in a shapefile set are e The lt filename gt dbf file which contains the feature attributes e The lt filename gt shp file which contains position information e The lt ilename gt shx file which is an index file that links the position information with its attributes In this manual the term shapefile is used to refer to the three files collectively The FmX integrated display records all latitude longitude and height data in decimal degrees FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Note The FmX integrated display reads and writes ESRI ArcView version 2 0 or 3 1 3D polylines polygons and points The M and Z entity types introduced in ArcView 3 1 can be generated in the track logging files but cannot be read by the FmX integrated display For more information go to the ESRI website www esri com Editing files ESRI shape shp and attribute dbf files can be used in many other software packages that can import or use shp and dbf formats The Farm Works software is recommended For more information go to www farmworks com Data collected by the FmX integrated display can be opened directly into the Farm Works software You can make changes to the files and save them on an office computer Do not save changes back to the USB memory stick as this could mean that you cannot select the field with the FmX integrat
73. far offset it is Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When prompted to close the field tap Yes FmX Integrated Display User Guide 181 7 Implement Configuration Introduction To obtain an implement do one of the following e Create anew implement see below e Select an existing implement see page 183 e Import an implement that was created for the AgGPS 170 Field Computer see page 183 Once you select an implement adjust its settings See page 184 Creating an implement 1 From the Home screen tap eft 2 Inthe Configuration Selection screen tap the implement Switch 3 Ifnecessary enter the Administration password see Password access page 73 4 In the Implement Configuration screen tap New Implement Configuration Mew Implement Curent 5 The New Configuration Name screen with a virtual keyboard appears 6 Enter a name for the new implement and then tap OK For more information on configuring the implement see Adjusting the implement settings page 184 7 The Select Active Plugins screen appears Select the plugins that will be used with this implement and then tap OK 8 The Implement Setup wizard appears Enter the appropriate information in each tab see Adjusting the implement settings page 184 Note The required information in the Implement Setup wizard var
74. feature Tap Load The list shows the types and numbers of line features in the current field FreeForm select the appropriate FreeForm curve and then tap Load The Run screen appears The next time that you engage automated steering you are guided along the swath line feature or FreeForm curve Using Skip to fine tune navigation The software uses the original swath that you drove to automatically generate the position of the other swaths Occasionally these new on screen swaths do not perfectly reflect where your swaths are For example you may need to skip to the other side of a road To correct the spacing of the automatically generated swaths in a field use the Skip function After the swaths are generated l 2 From the Run screen tap l Enter the Skip distance and then tap OK The guidance line moves the required amount The default distance displayed in the edit box reflects your current position The shift occurs based on the direction of the vehicle not on the A to B orientation of the line For example if you select Left the line shifts left of the operator s perspective Note The Skip position is temporary it is not saved to the line permanently To save a line adjustment use the Shift feature See Shifting a swath page 61 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Placing field features on screen For a description of field features and how to configure the field feature buttons see
75. for customer invoice Consult local laws and regulations for customer invoicing procedures some regions require official weighing FmX Integrated Display User Guide 465 22 Advanced Configuration The Event Summary file may include the following images of the field Thisimage Showa Overlap coverage and any overlaps vertical height of the GPS position Applied rate volume at which the spray boom applied solution GPS quality quality of the GPS signal Average XTE coverage layer degree of implement drift The file also shows information about The event e The vehicle setup Tap the appropriate buttons to show or hide coverage area and or area features If any Prescriptions are available a prescriptions button is also available To view a summary report on an office computer 1 Remove the CompactFlash card from the display and then insert it into an office computer 2 Select the folder AgGPS Summaries and then open the file Index html 3 Select the appropriate field from the list Note Ifyou use the Microsoft Internet Explorer internet browser you may need to allow Activex technology to see all of the summary file Upgrading the FmX integrated display firmware 1 Transfer the new firmware file from www trimble com to your office computer 2 Connect the FmX integrated display USB memory stick to your office computer 3 Unzip the firmware file and then save it to the root folder of the USB memory sti
76. grade the up arrow is red indicator thin is close thick is a long way off When the blade is above grade and cut is required the down arrow is red When on grade the center is green See Blade position indicators page 220 Cut fill map Shows the difference between the design plane and the survey Green areas are on grade blue areas require fill and the red areas require cut O Secondary cut fill For use with tandem and dual scrapers For dual scrapers it is the right side indicator For tandems it is the rear scraper See Blade position indicators page 220 Cut fill status panel This scale bar displays the number value assigned to each color You can choose to display either cut fill or height FmX Integrated Display User Guide 219 9 Water Management Rem Description Description oo Primary Auto This button engages the automatics to the hydraulic valve controlling the y g blade When using dual scrapers this is the left side of the blade When using tandem scrapers this is the front scraper Secondary Auto This button engages the automatics to the hydraulic valve when using dual or tandem scrapers When using dual scrapers this is the right side of the blade When using tandem scrapers this will control the rear scraper Create Benchmark You must create benchmarks that FieldLevel Il operations use as a point of horizontal and vertical reference FieldLevel II dual Used for either a dual or tandem scraper configurat
77. is a survey a Cut Fill map appears on the new design plane FmX Integrated Display User Guide 229 9 Water Management Defining a plane using multiple benchmarks You can use multiple benchmarks to define a plane based on your specific requirements If multiple benchmarks are created you can design a plane of best fit through those points If you use three benchmarks to design the plane then the cut and fill values will be 0 0 through those points as the plugin can create a perfect plane If you use more than three benchmarks to design the plane the cut fill values will be the residual difference between the plane of best fit and the benchmark elevations To define a plane using multiple points do the following L From the Run screen select the Survey Design plugin and then create two or more benchmarks to help define the plane If a primary heading definition is required you only need two benchmarks If all the slopes of a field are to be defined then you need at least three benchmarks Select the FieldLevel II plugin and tap the Design button The Plane Editor screen appears Tap New Plane Benchmark From the Benchmarks list select the benchmark to be used as the primary pivot and then tap Add The benchmark is be copied to the Design Benchmarks list Repeat Step 4 until all the required benchmarks are copied to the Design Benchmarks list The Design Benchmarks list contains the benchmarks for the multi point pl
78. not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied e Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field FmX Integrated Display User Guide 331 10 The Field IQ Plugin Cee Row Offset Setup Row Offset Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that is entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance betwe
79. offset from the master benchmark The number of satellites the system is currently being received by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver P Section Line Number P Speed P Target Height The line number of the primary blade The speed of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS receiver The height the primary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green P Up The height of the primary blade receiver relative to the field origin point a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point The Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the VDOP is higher lower is better P VDOP P Vertical Error Estimate The current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver Pressure The current pressure as reported by the primary pressure sensor Productive Area The area of Area Features that are designated as productive Radio Signal Strength The DCM 300 wireless signal strength S Altitude S Blade Height S CMR Percent The current height of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade GPS receiver The current height of the secondary blade The percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the secondary blade GPS recei
80. on up position the section s assigned to it are commanded to be on This overrides the FmX integrated display and coverage logging is ignored e Ifthe section switch is in the off down position the section s assigned to it are commanded to be off This overrides the FmX integrated display and coverage logging is ignored The LED has the following status indicators e Green The unit is powered and is communicating with the FmX integrated display e Yellow The unit is initializing communications with the FmX integrated display e Red The unit is powered but not communicating with the FmX integrated display Field 1Q Run screen The Field IQ Run screen has three pages e Page 1 shows current information about an event and allows you to manipulate the materials and sections e Page 2 shows additional information on the current event e Page 3 shows row details Click the arrow key to move between the pages FmX Integrated Display User Guide 257 10 The Field IQ Plugin The following shows the Field IQ run screen with the main plugin screen Up to 6 materials are listed The current Target and Actual rates are shown for each material Tap a material to show details of that material see following page There are various shades of green yellow and red These shades reflect how far off target the rows are applying Green Rows are applying on target Red Rows are applying off target Black Rows have been manual
81. operate correctly with the FmX display do the following 1l Press Return Return Fertil Distrib Select Type Bogballe E EX Accept Vaderstad Control Station To use the Vaderstad Control Station you need a special adapter cable Trimble P N DCA6219 with a crossover serial cable null modem that connects to the Vaderstad program cable Vaderstad P N 428017 Plug the Vaderstad cable into the GPS port on the back of the Control Station controller Configuring the controller To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX display do the following 1 Press the button and hold it down while turning on the controller 2 Inthe Setup screen scroll to GPS and then select No Note Pressing and selecting Info will not work if the unit is communicating with the FmX integrated display Amazone Amatron To use the Amazone Amatron you need a special adapter cable Trimble P N DCA6219 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 that is connected to Port A or B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable Note Connect the cable to the pinned connector on the lower left side of the Amatron controller Configuring the controller To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX display do the following l Press Shift Page Setup Page 2 2 Set RS232 to 57600 baud FmX Integrated Display User Guide 405 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin 406 LH50
82. operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death WARNING When the implement is down and the master switch is in the On position the machine is fully operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so could result in injury or death WARNING The display contains a single use Lithium sulfide LiSO battery Do not expose the battery to temperatures greater than 71 C 160 F as the battery may explode FmX Integrated Display User Guide 5 Safety A N WARNING NH is an irritant and corrosive to the skin eyes respiratory tract and mucous membranes and is dangerous if not handled properly It may cause severe burns to the eyes lungs and skin Skin and respiratory related diseases could be aggravated by exposure It is recommended that protective gloves boots slicker and or pants and jacket and chemical splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times A N WARNING The anhydrous valve calibration requires the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground the implement lift switch must be down Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death 6 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Contents SE a ee ee ere ee ee eee ee ee 5 WVU NINOS io 3c aa ot edie amp ow Gece Gm Gow Bek wy eo We ee E ee a oe ee a m
83. parameters page 163 E Steer Steering Performance 9990000000000 0 0 mph 56 17 4115 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Advanced Can t engage E2 Steer not calibrated 3 In the Advanced tab make the required changes and then tap OK The Configuration screen appears Operating the EZ Steer system with the FmX integrated display Engage options The Engage Options tab enables you to control the systems engage and disengage behavior if you need to change the automatically populated settings 1 From the Configuration screen select the EZ Steer plugin and then tap Setup The EZ Steer Settings screen appears 2 Select the Engage Options tab The following options appear Description Minimum speed Minimum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit the system disengages Maximum speed Maximum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit the system disengages Maximum angle Maximum angle at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at an angle greater than this limit it cannot be engaged 166 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Engage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance greater than this limit it cannot be engaged Disengage offline Maximum distance from the swath at w
84. performance e Reduce the Online Aggressiveness value e Line up close to the swath and make certain that the front wheels are straight before engaging the EZ Steer system To get smoother performance when the vehicle is pulling an implement over tilled ground enable the Diff Lock This prevents the machine from pulling sharply to the left or right If you are calibrating on a hard surface turn off Diff Lock AWD tractor The EZ Steer system can be installed on Case IH STX tractors with Accusteer For optimal performance disable Accusteer using the switch in the cab if possible Sprayer It is common for these vehicles to have slow steering To compensate for this use high aggressiveness If you experience large slow oscillations increase the aggressiveness When you configure the system on a sprayer the Sprayer steering delay setting is available on the Vehicle Setup screen Some sprayers have steering that is slow to react after you turn the steering wheel The system uses the steering delay setting to compensate for this slowness and ensure that steering corrections occur at the correct point 168 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Vehicle type Performance hint Swather When you configure the system on a swather the Swather steering delay setting is available on the Vehicle Setup screen Some swathers have steering that is slow to react after the steering wheel is turned The system uses the stee
85. prescriptions loading the prescriptions can take some time The FmX integrated display shows progress bars while it loads and converts prescriptions You can configure the status sliders on the main navigation screen the Run screen to show the target rate specified in the prescription file and the applied rates returned from the controller for the active channel FmX Integrated Display User Guide 67 3 Getting Started When a field is open a prescription is loaded and a controller is connected the target rates read from the prescription and applied rates received from the controller can be shown in the status text items An example with as applied rates displayed is shown below For more information see Status items page 77 To load a prescription file 1 Map anew field or select an existing field The FmX integrated display searches the card for prescription files within the specified limits If there are many prescriptions on the card this can take several seconds and a progress bar appears 68 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 2 Ifany prescription files are within the specified limits the Select Prescription screen appears 330634 Shp 3 From the Available Prescriptions list select a prescription file Note If an Aglnfo GDX prescription has an incorrect format it does not appear in the Available Prescriptions list 4 Ifyou select a shapefile prescription you must select the
86. prompted to close the field tap Yes 30 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Run screen The Run screen shows the steering navigation If you select the Run screen and you have a field open the display shows that field If you select the Run screen when there is no field open the Field Selection screen appears Run screen view modes The FmX integrated display screen has two views for representing vehicle guidance on the Run screen e Overhead view Shows a bird s eye view of the field with the vehicle in it FmX Integrated Display User Guide 31 2 Display Overview e Trailing view Shows a three dimensional representation of the field from the driver s perspective Main view in this example overhead view Auxiliary view trailing view To change the view mode tap the icons in the upper left of the run screen Zoom and Pan functions The FmX integrated display has five levels of zoom A close up view of the vehicle enables you to navigate more accurately while a long view enables you to see more of the field New in version 3 0 of the FmX integrated display is a pan function on the Run screen that gives you the ability to view the field outside of the normal viewing area 32 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Accessing the zoom and pan functions 1 To access the zoom and pan functions from the Run screen press 2 To pan around the field press one of th
87. receiver on the implement that is used to measure the position of the implement so that the Autopilot system can adjust the position of the tractor to pull the implement on line The TrueGuide system supports towed implements for front steered tracked and articulated tractors To achieve the highest performance from TrueGuide implement guidance the Autopilot system on the tractor must have a good calibration An Autopilot system that is calibrated very aggressively may need to be set up with a more neutral calibration when used with TrueGuide implement guidance FmX Integrated Display User Guide 363 12 The TrueGuide Plugin Connecting the TrueGuide implement guidance system Once the TrueGuide implement guidance system has been professionally installed add the FmX integrated display as shown ox l 44O D A N CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController II harness will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty Rem Description le part number o posme O xenon eee eas FmX power cable 66694 Basic power cable 67258 9 ver are ies Co p o 364 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueGuide Plugin 12 Configuring the TrueGuide implement guidance system TrueGuide implement guidance must have e The Autopilot automated steerin
88. replicator 75741 Oo 2 pin DTM to 2 pin DT power adaptor 67095 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 177 6 The GPS Receiver 178 Q NavController II 55563 00 O 8m GPS TNC TNC RT angle cable 50449 AG25 GNSS antenna 68040 00S D Main NavController Il cable 54601 ool FmX universal radar adaptor 68461 Radar speed output cable 64274 Configuring radar output 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS receiver for any plugin using an internal GPS receiver and then tap Setup E Steer GPS Receiver Settings 2 Select the Radar Output tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GPS Receiver 6 3 From the Connector drop down list select Connector D to enable radar output 4 Select the Radar Frequency Rate field 5 Enter the required rate and then tap OK The GPS Receiver Settings screen appears 6 Tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 179 6 The GPS Receiver 180 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Implement Configuration In this chapter Introduction Creating an implement Selecting an existing implement Importing an implement from the FieldManager display Adjusting the implement settings Deleting an implement This chapter describes how to configure a vehicle implement For more information see Chapter 22 Advanced Configuration You must configure your implement so that the system can tell e Which type of implement is attached How much area it covers How
89. screen The status text items appropriate for your current plugins appear in the Info Items list 1 Set the upper left status text item a In the Info Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the left Set Item button The information appears in the upper left field 2 Set the upper right status text item FmX Integrated Display User Guide 85 4 Display Setup a Inthe Info Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the right Set Item button The information appears in the upper right field 3 Inthe Timeout list select a time This is how long the tab remains on screen before retracting To have the tab extended until you close it manually select Never 4 To add status items to the slide out tab a Tap the position on the tab that you want to fill For example to add an item to the first position on the list tap at the location shown b In the Jnfo Items list tap the item you want to use c Tap lt Set Item d To save the configuration tap OK 86 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 The Info Screen tab The nfo Screen tab lets you allocate which items will be displayed on the Info screen The status text items appropriate for your current plugins appear in the Info Items list Select Status Items a 1 Lorit 1 Set the left Info text items a In the nfo Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the left Set Item button c Repeat Step a and Step b
90. se iE aeee oe eee eh Ee oe eae PERE ea ee T T 228 Driving in Conto r M0dG s sesse sets ma eRe 8G tacta p eRe eR Ee See SEE He 233 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 10 Contents Tandem Ova OGIO 4264 eeneee aa teeth hee pee eee aeae one ears 234 Configuring the Tandem Dual plugin 0 0 0 0 cee eee ee eee 235 Operating the Tandem Dual plugin 0 0 eee ee ee 239 WM Drain phibia 2i44 heh dee eee ea eae oe thee we Pee eee ees Eee Se 241 Configuring the WM Drain plugin 2 2 uaaa 241 Surveying a section line 45 ck enue ee ee bead ORGo ho eaeReRESe GO He eee es 247 lystaling ARCCUOM le ska cece riae be eee on bee eee soe de ee eo 251 The Field IQ Plugin nananana nunana 253 Modic e eee r E e E 254 D a o 46 eh yee ae one ee eee he roe pee ee E eee Geen E EE EE 254 Wits O WiessUle 4 a4 goo ad seege AROS eh eee ee ee See eee oho ee ae eee 255 Installing the Field IQ hardware 0 0 0 2 e eee eee 255 Field IQ master switch box functions 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee ee eee eee 256 Field IQ 12 section switch box optional 6 eee 257 Field IQ Run screen onana ee ee 257 General setup information 0 cece eee ee ee eee eens 260 The Fedo Setup Wizard on eae eae Reto ee eee he ba eke eee ee ee 260 Coa a WAAC e e oe baie r eee Gk eee ee ee ee ee eee 261 Setting up the Field IQ system for Planting 0 00 263 MapCG alia oo a2 24s abt eee Fees hee PG ee dee ante eG ee a ee hae e
91. second best fit plane See Operating the FieldLevel II plugin page 219 Surveying the field Use the WM Survey tab to survey the topography of the field You can then choose to create a design plane of best fit to balance the cut and fill values to the preferred ratio 1 Inthe WM Survey tab select Boundary from the drop down list and then tap Record FmX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 2 Drive the vehicle around the boundary of the field the boundary is recorded with a line back to the start point The boundary must be a complete loop FmX Integrated Display User Guide 207 9 Water Management 4 Change the Boundary setting to Interior and drive around the interior of the field gaining enough coverage to produce a height map You can change the data logging intensity in the FieldLevel II Survey Design settings Coarse 25 ft Medium 10 ft Fine 5 ft Field design Once you have completed the survey the AutoPlane button becomes available To create a design for the field tap the AutoPlane button The field points are processed and then the AutoPlane screen appears Cut Fill Ratio 120 Compose Slope 5 5550 Me Shope Heady 169 03 4 Soulh gt North Shape Weadt gt bact Slope This screen shows field information and enables you to create the design for your field The AutoPlane functionality uses the topographic survey of your field to estimate the field surface elevat
92. single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the rear row Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Field IQ Setup Material Layout Section Canbral aoe Section Control Module z Location setup Set Sy i er Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 261 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 285 10 The Field IQ Plugin een a Section Control Module Setup Tap Setup to configure the section control module s their location on the implement and the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control modules you will use Module Select the module number that corresponds to each section Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control Section Grouping Assign the rows that are
93. slow speeds When Outside Field Switch off The system will not apply outside the boundary area Boundary Operate The system will apply outside the boundary area Material Controlled Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled By individually Disabled The Material is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Rate Snapping Enabled Shows the applied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value Material Setup Complete screen When you have completed setting up a new material the Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select e Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field IQ Setup Wizard e Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 303 10 The Field IQ Plugin 304 Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 2 F 4 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option Raise the implement and then tap Next Lower the implement and then tap Next Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the spraying modules Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rate and Section cont
94. specified number of revolutions enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap Continue The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified Tap OK and then either press Test to repeat the calibration or tap OK to continue FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 6 Select the Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set Planter Calibration 7 Tap OK 8 Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration Hydraulic test The purpose of this test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system 1 From the Field IQ Calibration screen tap Hydraulic Test A N CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 2 Tap Next 3 Enter the initial motor RPM The default setting is 300 Trimble also recommends that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds 4 Tap Start FmX Integrated Display User Guide 321 10 The Field IQ Plugin 5 The next screen provides the status of each motor Field IQ Hydraulic Test No Error The test was successful Motor Stalled The motors did not have sufficient oil flow ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor For more information refer to the Rawson System Installation Instructions Disconnected The Rawson Control Module cannot
95. supplemental Rates from all channels are recorded in the variable rate logging dbf file but the FmX integrated display can send rates to only one channel at a time the active channel The Tyler Flex Air controller uses the GPS speed sent by the FmX integrated display Using the Tyler Flex Air controller The Total_Qty field in the variable rate logging dbf file and the Avg_Rate field in the EventHistory dbf file record statistics for the active channel If you want to use these statistics start a new event before you change the active channel Application width You can individually configure the widths of the boom sections on the controller The Fmx integrated display draws coverage logging at the width of the sum of all the boom sections If you turn boom sections off the FmX integrated display varies the width of the coverage polygons according to which boom sections are on FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 Bogballe Calibrator To use the Bogballe Calibrator you need a special adapter cable Trimble P N DCA6219 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 that is connected to Port A or B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable Note The standoff nuts on the Bogballe rate controller may prevent the pins in the cable connector from making a connection In this case remove the standoff nuts Configuring the controller To set up the controller to
96. t De erered a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 431 DONA t0 aoe hee eee ekoeea ae en eee eect ase enaneeeaseonsaweaee 431 PITOPMESSASCS 2 0o405 Cena doses he Oe ee aw Eh ee eee Oe ee ee oH 432 Third party display instructions 4 lt 0 sessed he eetGkeae Hae eee eee See oe eeageee 434 Setting up the Claas Cebis Quantimeter 0 000 eee eee ee eee 434 Calibrating the Claas Cebis Quantimeter 20 00000 e eee 435 Calibrating the Claas Cebis Auto Pilot 2 2 2 0 000 000 436 Configuring the Stop Head Height on the Greenstar Monitor 436 Configuring the Stop Head Height on the Command Center 436 CAUDO teeth etae eae Rade eeepe eee dha ae thee ed eke eee eae 437 Updating the Moisture Sensor 60 Series combines only 0 005 440 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 19 20 21 22 23 Contents Yield Monitoring Diagnosticg lt o4 ee ne oo os bee ne ben oe bee ee orari eee 441 hag ite eu es eee eee ee ee eae ee ee T Yield Monitor tab442 Inputs TAO coo a ooo eG RAE eee e ee eS Gee 4 ew oe ae ee 442 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 443 BOM SOO MOAN s e me aare a aA oss a E a e a a 444 Introduction to the DCM 300 modem 2 0 0 2 eee eee eee 444 Benefits of using a DCM 300 modem 0 eee 444 Connecting the DCM 300 modem sasaaa aaa 445 Unlocking the DCM 300 modem with passcodes 000 0000 446 Activating the DCM
97. the display When you next open that field you will be guided back to your former position When you return to your former position tap Resume Adjusting the status text size You can control the size of the status text items that are shown at the top of the Run screen You can show one of the status text items in a large size or both status text items in a smaller SIZe pasee E One large status text item Two smaller status text items To cycle through the status text item display modes tap the items at the top of the screen 64 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Introduction to coverage logging Coverage logging records the area that you have covered when you carry out an operation for example applying fertilizer to a field The covered area appears on the Run screen as a translucent yellow area that shows skips as well as single double and triple coverage Single coverage Double coverage Triple coverage To activate coverage logging tap the Logging button on the Run screen so that it changes from gray to green Tap the button again to stop coverage logging Logging varieties By default coverage logging appears yellow see above However you can set up varieties that make it easy to see the difference between different types of coverage This enables you to e Change product part way through a field so that you can later identify which parts of the field are co
98. the master line Enter a value in the ABs place in the first group left to right field This setting enables you to specify where the master line appears in the first group from left to right Select whether the guidance will be based on swaths or access paths from the Provide Guidance to drop down list and then tap OK Swath management Several options are available on the Swath Management screen You can delete swaths rename swaths or shift them to the left or right To access these features select the Swaths tab You cannot delete rename or shift line features or FreeForm curves 60 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Deleting a swath To be able to delete swaths you must have entered the Administration password 1 From the Run screen tap the Swath button The Swath Management screen appears 2 From the list on the left select the swath to delete 3 Tap Delete If prompted enter the password The swath is marked as deleted The next time that you close the field the swath is removed from the list Note You cannot delete a swath that is currently active Renaming a swath To be able to rename swaths you must have entered the Administration password 1 From the Run screen tap the Swath button The Swath Management screen appears 2 From the list on the left select the swath to rename 3 Tap Rename If prompted enter the password The Enter new swath name screen appears 4 En
99. the phase and turn the steering wheel to disengage the system Reposition the vehicle and continue from the current test phase Automated Deadzone error messages If a calibration cycle is unable to complete successfully one of the following error messages appears Message Error Manual Override Manual override was detected before the calibration cycle could be Detected completed Retry Error Vehicle Moving Too The vehicle was moving too slowly for the calibration cycle to Slow successfully finish Make sure the vehicle is moving at least 0 8 kph 0 5 mph during each calibration cycle Error Steering Close To Before the calibration cycle could be completed the measured steering End Stops angle approached the end stops Retry and if the problem persists instead of centering the steering at the start of each cycle try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over Error Valve Connectors The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite Could Be Swapped direction to what was expected Retry and if the problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly Error No GPS A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure Error No Steering During the calibration cycle
100. to another 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Inthe Current Configurations screen tap Configure 132 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 3 Select the Autopilot option and then tap Setup Vehicle Engage Steering advanced Connector cme GPS1 OF Current Sector JOSx70STS AT RY 4 Inthe Vehicle Controller Settings group tap Edit Welch Profile Location Made 5 Tap Save Vehicle 6 Inthe Save Vehicle Configuration screen select the Filename field 7 Inthe Enter Save Filename screen enter a name for the current vehicle profile and tap OK 8 Inthe Edit Vehicle screen tap OK Your current vehicle profile is saved FmX Integrated Display User Guide 133 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Configuring the GPS receiver When you install the Autopilot option the GPS Receiver option is also installed For instructions on configuring the GPS receiver see The GPS Receiver page 171 Adjusting the Aggressiveness setting Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes e Ahigher Aggressiveness setting brings the vehicle back online faster but may cause tight oscillations about the line e A lower Aggressiveness setting is slower to bring the vehicle back online but can avoid overshoot 1 From the Run screen select the Autopilot tab 2 Use the or button to adjust the setting Note The default Aggressiveness setting is 10
101. to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field 284 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Ce a Row Offset Setup Row Offset Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that is entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a
102. turn off the system To close a field see Closing a field page 44 There are several ways to turn off the display e Return to the Home screen and then tap Shutdown e Hold down the power button on the reverse of the display for approximately half a second Note There is sometimes a short delay between the time when you tap the power button and when the display turns off This is because the display is saving settings FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Home screen Integrated Display The Home screen lists the following information about the display e The display build date firmware and hardware version e The Autopilot controller version date and serial number e The GPS receiver version correction source and subscription information e The selected vehicle make and model Note If you connect two Autopilot NavController II controllers the Home screen shows a summary of both controllers FmX Integrated Display User Guide 29 2 Display Overview Configuration screen The Configuration screen enables you to create edit and save various editable system settings and add or remove system options For more information on using the Configuration screen see Accessing the system configuration settings page 72 Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When
103. want to use and then tap Load A warning message appears 9 Tap OK The imported field or AB Line is ready to use 10 For best results close the field and then reopen it FmX Integrated Display User Guide 483 23 Data Management The Prescriptions folder For each prescription that you generate the AgGPS Prescriptions folder stores three prescription files in ESRI shapefile format or a single gdx file The shapefiles required are the dbf shp and shx files Some GIS software packages generate other files and include different contents in the files if they are on the USB memory stick they are ignored The names and types of files that are used to supply input information to the FmX integrated display and the folder where these files must be located on the card are as follows Description Prescription files Polygons lt prescriptionname gt shp AgGP S Prescriptions ESRI shapefiles lt prescriptionname gt dbf For more information see lt prescriptionname gt shx _ Prescriptions page 67 Aglnfo GDX lt prescriptionname gt gdx The following figure shows the contents of a Prescriptions folder E BE AgGPS Prescriptions Ble Edt Wew Favorites Tools Heb Qaa O F Psa lip rosers 2 amp Fe Address C E aoGPS Prescriptions amp my Computer Se Local Cesk C Jb DRAW Drive D2 S Lime Prese Westfield 19 dbf Lime Prese Westheld 19 sho T Lime Presi Westfield 19 shx E G Smit
104. when the Rate switch is in position 2 Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings e Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material e Target Rate Units Choose what units your target rate will apply e Bushel Weight Enter the bushel weight of the current material 330 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Layout tab Enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material Material Layout Section Control Rate Control Row Monitor 4 Bin Tank Setup Row Offset Setup Description Bin Tank Setup Allows the system to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for e Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will
105. will use Module Select the module number that corresponds to each section Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control Section Grouping Assign the rows that are in each section Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each section control module Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn on in advance Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to
106. you selected 8 Tap OK For more information on applying field features during navigation see Placing field features on screen page 63 Activating field boundaries The FmX integrated display includes the field boundary feature that enables you to map multiple bounded areas within a field Field boundaries create a separate boundary file that can be used to calculate area and control automatic section switching at the edge of the field 1 From the Feature Mapping screen tap one of the Selected Features buttons The Select Feature screen appears 2 From the feature drop down list select Area and then tap New 92 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 3 From the list of features select Boundary and then tap Edit 4 Set one or more of the following the attributes for the boundary features fAtibute Description OO Trigger Warning sets a visual and audible warning when entering or leaving the boundary edge Remote Output when enabled this feature restricts remote output pulses from being triggered while outside the boundary Expand By Sets how the boundary is actually recorded See the following Nothing Maps the boundary exactly at the recorded position image Y2 Swath Width Expands the recorded boundary location by 2 the swath width after the boundary is closed 1 Swath Width Expands the recorded boundary location by 1 additional swath width after the boundary is closed FmX Integra
107. 0 For a description of the Autopilot Engage button see Engage button page 47 Display only mode The FmX integrated display can be used as a standalone display for a NavController II that is connected to an external GPS receiver When used in this mode the FmX integrated displays two internal GNSS receivers are not used by the NavController II but they are still available for other applications In this mode you must use the special adaptor cable P N 76442 with the standard FmX FM 1000 to NavController II cable P N 75741 or P N 65522 to connect the display to the P4 display port on the NavController II 134 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Note You must install the Autopilot option to use the display only functionality of the FmX integrated display Connecting the FmX integrated display for display only mode a TN a W P3 GPS connector ox A N CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController II harness O will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty em Description rile part number peer o oo Basic power cable 67258 eO FmX to NavController Il cable with port replicator 75741 2 pin DTM to 2 pin DT power adaptor 67095 Q NavController II 55563 00 Cable assembly 8 pin to 12 pin adaptor 76442 Oo Cable AgG
108. 00 To use the LH 5000 controller you need a special adapter cable LH Agro P N 198 701 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 that is connected to Port A or B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable Configuring the controller To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX display do the following 1 Press Return Return Fertil Distrib Select Type LH500 Accept Setting any other features of the variable rate controller Coverage mapping The FmX integrated display receives the applied rate and can also receive the number of active boom sections from a variable rate controller It does not receive any information about the swath or application width To accurately record coverage maps if your controller does not send the number of active boom sections make sure that you set the application width to match the agricultural equipment that you are using for example the width of the spray boom Target and applied rates The FmX integrated display can control only a single channel at any one time This active channel is specified in the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen The target and applied rates shown on the Run screen are specific to this active channel Units Most controllers can be configured to use either US Imperial or metric units of measurement Each channel can be configured to use different types of units for example lb ac oz ac or ga
109. 0000 Leveling model specific information You have different leveling options depending on the leveling mode that you selected see Step 2 Configuring the leveling model page 213 For information specific to the leveling model e For Point and Slope mode see below e For Flat Plane Laser mode see page 227 e For Flat Plane GPS mode see page 227 e For Contour mode see page 233 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 225 9 Water Management Driving in Point and Slope mode When you drive in Point and Slope mode the FieldLevel II tab appears as follows Edit Bench or Rebench Create a benchmark see Benchmarks page 202 Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height Delete Benchmark Delete any benchmark on the field Note You do not have to drive over a benchmark to delete it Raise the blade by the Blade Step amount Lower the blade by the Blade Step amount Auto Engage automatic blade height control e starts the slope calculation e resets the height e resets the cut fill Coarse Use the Up and Down arrows to change the blade height by the Coarse Blade Step amount This enables you to move the blade by a large amount instead of small increments Logging Log the coverage so that you can see on the map where you have been dependent on your Implement Width A shape file is created with cut fill and height information 226 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 The slope is defi
110. 2 Configuring a plugin ay eee eee uae amend a ceeen bee oe hee eee heee 4 see he 193 Entering the password to activateaplugin 2 2 ee ee 193 Water Management 2 eee nn unnnnnnnn 197 WM S ryey DUSI e og erd Ge E a Te nerd ae Bee ee ea eho eee ese Bea 198 WCSCMONIONS 6 2 644 6 BAR Eee ee OEE ed ARE EE ee eh eS 198 TOMO O EEEE EE E eee nee beer eee es eae ee an eee ees 198 Benefits of the Water Management system 0000s 199 hes a ae ae ee E a ee ee 199 COMMCCRAMOM ys c4 4546266554 es eae oe Oy eee oe Ree oes 200 Operating the WM Survey plugin 2e2 20 6544555944 e een 545 eed ahdega 202 ETEN A GUIVCVe o bu ead oes See gee tee bbeae hee ab ad tbo ho eee oe oes 202 PEESO gnc seep ea pee eneen se oo5G eh ete eee te 6eeG eee ees fae 208 Ficldevel pU ie ae aeeeraaeee hese eee eee te ener tesa ae eee teas aes 211 evens Wi0GEIS Aue eas bee pew ea ae hee ee ee Be Rew Rae 211 TOMO Ve ae ioe eet Gees Eee hea ee eee eh ee eee SA Be hee ees 212 Configuring the FieldLevel II plugin on nnaanaaaa a 212 Operating the FieldLevel II plugin naonana 0 2 ee eee 219 Importing control files from the Multiplane software 223 Working with MultiPlane designs 220 se60 S sedeNadeews gusset cand es 224 Leveling model specific information 1 0 0 eee eee 225 Driving in Point and Slope mode 2 e ee eee 226 Driving in Flat Plane Laser and Flat Plane GPS modes 227 Demmin
111. 2 From the Section drop down list select the section line that you want to design Note The section lines are labeled from S1 in the order that they surveyed in 250 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 3 The design screen works from the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed If your survey profile is displayed the wrong way around change the setting in the Direction drop down list from Outlet at Survey Start to Outlet at Survey End or from Outlet as Survey End to Outlet at Survey Start 4 Edit the constraint fields to your requirements OE Section Auto the nearest section line is automatically selected Selection Manual manually select a section from the drop down list Section The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed If you want your Direction profile displayed in the other direction switch between Outlet at Survey Start and Outlet at Survey End Min Depth The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design profile to be any shallower than the minimum depth The minimum depth is shown on the profile as a red line ptimal Depth The depth to install the tile or ditch The design will keep to this depth where it can It will move off the optimal depth to be within the other constraints where it needs to Max Dep
112. 300 modem a e424 24 8 peda ee dG GER eee EES ew 446 Configuring the DCM 300 modem 2 2 00000 eee eee 447 Ao DOO MOUE gt 652 eeteeeee Gest sere eae eRe eee eae eee eee Sees ae 449 Introduction to the Ag3000 modem 2 2 ee 449 Connecting the Ag3000 modem 2 ee eee 449 Activating the Ag3000 modem 2 454 484 e6s8be bees beee thu weed ou ee 450 Configuring the Ag3000 modem 2 2 eee es 450 The EZ Remote Joystick 1 ee annann 453 MCGUITOMIENG 366664 e eee e ee Ok be ee ensues Greene ee ohne ee ee ae et eee 454 TiS Ee CIO c g aa sere oe Goa was E EE GL wae Ge ook a eG ere E 454 Enabling the EZ Remote Joystick 2 2 2 2 0 0 eee eee 454 The LB25 External Lightbar 1 2 a annn 457 Connourne he Neh bal staat aacaee Speak ae eters ears ateugoes sehareuse 458 Advanced Configuration 2 0 0 0 ee eee ee es 461 Configuring remote coverage logging 2 ee 462 Installing the logging option sasaaa eaeed SeR SSeS PERSE EERE EOE ES 462 Enable the external switch e2755 4 bao 4 465 OSES AGOGO EEE DH ERS EEE 463 Changing the pas5sWOrd se aetag wees ee ke one eee eee eee ee eR ee ia 464 Locking the display to re enable the password 0 0000 e eee eee 464 Saving the vehicle configuration 0 0 cee ee 464 Saving a PDF version of the current field 5 46455 6 4 48 e2eee 6 ISS EH Oa DET T EEO EwO 465 Upgrading the FmX integrated display firmware 00 466 Upg
113. AB ABLine Cover area Number of the primary AB Line Area covered Cover distance Distance covered Cover time Engage time Time engaged Features files When features are recorded in the field each type of feature is saved in three feature shapefiles in the Field folder as follows These features Are saved in these files One row of data is stored in the lt type gt dbf file for each feature of that feature type recorded in the field The following information is stored in the lt type gt dbf file for each feature Column Field description Date the feature was created Time the feature was recorded Features attribute file version Oe Field area Area only Field perimeter distance Area only Length of the AB Line ee PrefWeight Only recorded in point features Ground mean sea level height at antenna position If you are mapping on a slope the height may be wrong WarningRad Warning radius Status_Txt GPS status FmX Integrated Display User Guide 481 23 Data Management Program Log message file The FmX integrated display performs checks e when the display is turned on or off e periodically while running This information is saved to the ProgramLog txt file which is in the AgGPS Diagnostics folder When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB it is backed up to a file called ProgramLog old The ProgramLog txt file may be useful for troubleshooting The file can be read with a
114. Aggressiveness value 152 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 5 Tap the Free Play tab Add a Freeplay Offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line 6 Engage the system on the A B line Vehicle is offline Do the following To the left Increase the freeplay offset to the right To the right Increase the freeplay offset to the left Note If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to Auto Low Note The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available To access these options select the EZ Pilot plugin Diagnostics from the main Configuration screen 7 Enter the parameters and then tap OK The EZ Pilot Steering Calibration screen appears 8 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears FmX Integrated Display User Guide 153 5 Vehicle Guidance Options EZ Pilot plugin diagnostics The EZ Pilot Diagnostics screen displays the statistics for the IMD 600 and SAM 200 and inertial information 1 From the Configuration screen select the EZ Pilot plugin and then tap Diagnostics The EZ Pilot Diagnostics screen appears 154 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 2 Tap Steering Performance The Z Pilot Steering Performance screen appears The Advanced tab is for advanced users who understand how to adjust
115. Algorithm tab ker Calibration _ i i L Eri TETTI et Select either an existing algorithm or Custom Table to create a new algorithm from the Formula list For more information see Defining a Custom Table page 357 Note The formula selected for your last job will still be current so you are often just verifying that the correct formula is being used gJ Input the various fields as required The fields displayed will change based upon the formula selected some fields such as Nitrogen Use Efficiency have default values that are formula specific but all are able to be changed by selecting the field and using the screen keypad Note You may need to reference the specific algorithms instruction for more detailed explanation of the CumGDD E or similar fields For example the CumGDD F for the corn v1 3 GrtPins GDD OKState is Cumulative Growing Degree Days Base 50F For specific algorithm instructions go to www GreenSeeeker com FmX Integrated Display User Guide 355 11 356 The GreenSeeker Plugin 10 Select the Chart tab GreenSeeker Calibration _ Gisabled 11 Inthe Limit list select Enabled or Disabled 12 Ifnecessary enter a Max Limit value based on rate controller or application equipment limitations 13 Tap OK 14 Enter a Min Limit value 15 Tap OK Note Maximum and minimum settings will limit the rate commands given to the rate controller 16 Review the application chart for
116. Blade position indicators page 220 Auto buttons With a tandem dual configuration the Autopilot Engage button is replaced with two FieldLevel Auto buttons e With a tandem configuration the P Auto button controls the automatics of the primary front implement and the S Auto peel eee button controls the automatics of the secondary rear implement e With a dual configuration the P Auto button controls the automatics on the primary left side of the implement and the S Auto button controls the automatics on the secondary right side of the implement Note To control both sides of the implement simultaneously when using a dual configuration you must tap both buttons Note With the addition of an external GPS receiver you can use the Autopilot system with tandem and dual systems An Engage button appears next to the P Auto and Auto buttons FmX Integrated Display User Guide 239 9 Water Management The FieldLevel Il tab dual mode The standard FieldLevel II tab in dual mode has a single set of up and down buttons These buttons control the height of the whole implement Use them to raise or lower both sides of the implement simultaneously For example if the blade is on an angle and you raise it with the up arrow on the standard FieldLevel II plugin the blade remains at the original angle The Tandem Dual tab For both tandem and dual mode the Jandem Dual tab includes a double set o
117. Care and MAINTENANCE 44 sheen Gah Ghee ee eee Phe ewe ee SES ee ee eG 349 Field preparations for Nitrogen application 2 0 0 ee 349 Pekinon eesse paee E Gee eae eae be Re ee oe kee ee aS A 349 Koe 6 shen ese ee Shee eee eee eas eG Se hee eee eee et eee se awe ees 350 Field preparations for user defined rate 2 0 cee ee 351 Operating the GreenSeeker Plugin coo ebb SES SSE EERE O ERE EG POSE EG ee S 352 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Contents GreenSeeker plugin screen ae ee Od eee ee Rees oe heehee eee kee eee 353 GreenSeeker diagnostics 4 2 header aes ARES oe ey ROSES ee ee Ree KE 359 Application information 242454464466 6645 644664 oae3 SH 6 oh Se eb ES es OE 360 Delivery System and Liquid Control 2 00 0 eee eee ees 360 DelCChNG CNOWIC a sake nee eoes aa ee eee E eee S 361 DCSE PIGCUCe seme eat ek hh Ree ae Oe ee Ae eee ee Ae eh ee ee 361 12 The TrueGuide Plugin 1 ce anann 363 Connecting the TrueGuide implement guidance system 0 00000 364 Configuring the TrueGuide implement guidance system 0 000200000 365 TrucGuide implement setup 4 ceed hee v D1 o be Odo oe RES Oe OAH oe ES oe 365 Setting up the TrueGuide system 2 ee 366 Calibrating the TrueGuide implement guidance system 0 000 000s 367 Engaging and disengaging the TrueGuide system 20 0 0040 368 Operating the TrueGuide system 4 oe4e4 Gece weeks oe a one ee o
118. Configuration Changing the password Note To change the Administration password you require the Master password If you do not know it contact your local Trimble reseller See also Password access page 73 l D Do one of the following Ifyou have not entered the password during the current session tap Setup or Calibrate from the Configuration screen Ifyou have already entered the password during this session tap the Home button and then tap Lock Configuration On the Configuration screen tap Setup or Calibrate The Enter Administration Password screen appears Enter an incorrect password The Wrong Password screen appears Tap Enter Master Password Enter the Master password and then tap OK The Change Administration Password screen appears Enter your new Administration password in both fields The new Administration password is now active Locking the display to re enable the password To re enter the password if you have already entered the Administration Password l 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap A Tap Configure Tap Lock Config Tap Setup or Calibrate The Enter Administration Password screen appears Saving the vehicle configuration Note The vehicle configuration is different from the display and implement configuration The vehicle configuration saves the Autopilot vehicle settings that you created The display configuration saves the display appearance features that you selected
119. Control tab Adjust the rate control settings Field IQ Setup a beri l Ee es 0 a Sa Off Section switching only implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a screen appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages Number of Nozzles Enter the number of spray nozzles on the sprayer FmX Integrated Display User Guide 299 10 The Field IQ Plugin Drive Setup Valve Setup tab Drive Setup el orl Valve Type 300 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump Hardi Bypass Used on Hardi sprayers equipped with 3 way section valves that return flow to the tank when the boom section is off Pump Servo Servo valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump Electric over Hydraulic A valve that uses electric current to control the hydraulic valve output The Field IQ Plugin 10 Feedback Setup tab Flow Meter Type Select the type of flow meter that is connected Flowmeter Calibration Enter the number from the flow meter tag Min Flow Enter the required minimum flow rate for the system Use this setting to keep the control valve and flow meter above the minimum operating level FmX Integrated Displa
120. DVI you should be applying 15GPA then you should choose a nozzle that will have the ability to change rates above and below this NDVI reading You might choose a nozzle that puts out 12 5GPA at its lowest pressure e g 20psi and 21GPA at its highest pressure e g 60psi Since the penalty to under fertilize harm yield is usually greater than to over fertilize waste fertilizer it may be best to choose a strategy similar to the one shown here You will need to modify your values to fit your circumstances and meet the local field and delivery system conditions Best practice To ensure best performance from the GreenSeeker variable application system do the following e Donot use high pressure spray on the sensors when rinsing the machine Even though all of the connectors and modules are fully sealed there is the potential of leakage from a pressurized stream e Every time the spray tank is filled take a soft cloth and wipe the lenses of the sensors Try to check sensors at least once a day during full time operation e Be more aware of cleaning the sensors directly behind the machine e Ifyou do not have ground protection devices on the boom such as gauge wheels or skids take extra care to not run the boom into the ground Also be aware of sensor vulnerability to stationary structures in the field FmX Integrated Display User Guide 361 11 362 The GreenSeeker Plugin Sensors are usually mounted on the front of the boom a
121. Feature mapping page 89 For instructions on how to create a separate boundary file that can be used to calculate area and control automatic section switching at the edge of the field see Activating field boundaries page 92 To add a field feature to the map 1 Select the Mapping tab on the Run screen The features that you defined appear on the tab 2 Begin to drive the field 3 When you reach the point where you want to add a feature tap the appropriate feature button If the feature is a Point Feature the feature is added Ifthe feature is a Line Feature or an Area Feature the feature will begin Area and Line features continue until you tap the button a second time Note You can add a Point feature while adding a Line or Area feature For example use a Line feature to draw an overhead telephone wire and simultaneously use a Point feature to add the telephone poles FmX Integrated Display User Guide 63 3 Getting Started Pausing guidance You can pause guidance and return to your position later To pause guidance from the Run screen tap rose When you tap Pause the following happens e A pause icon appears at the point where your vehicle was e The status text shows the distance and angle required to return to that point e Swath snapping occurs to the pause position it does not follow your vehicle e Your position is saved to a file on the display You can then close the field and turn off
122. Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the secondary blade receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the HDOP is higher lower is better S Heading The current heading of the secondary blade in degrees from direct north S Latitude The secondary blade s current latitude S Longitude The secondary blade s current longitude S Network ID The RTK network ID of the secondary blade receiver s corrections S North The distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point S Offset A separate plane that is parallel to the design plane The offset if defined by a single measurement which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane S Offset X The Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark S Offset Y The Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark S Satellites The number of satellites the system is currently being received by the FieldLevel Il GPS receiver S Section Line Number The line number of the secondary blade S Speed The speed of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade GPS receiver S Target Height The height the secondary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green The height of the secondar
123. IMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS REGARDLESS WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS 4 Fmx Integrated Display User Guide DEVELOPED BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU PLEASE NOTE THE ABOVE TRIMBLE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVISIONS WILL NOT APPLY TO PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THOSE JURISDICTIONS E G MEMBER STATES OF THE EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA IN WHICH PRODUCT WARRANTIES ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE LOCAL DEALER FROM WHOM THE PRODUCTS ARE ACQUIRED IN SUCH A CASE PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TRIMBLE DEALER FOR APPLICABLE WARRANTY INFORMATION Official Language THE OFFICIAL LANGUAGE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IS ENGLISH IN THE EVENT OF A CONFLICT BETWEEN ENGLISH AND OTHER LANGUAGE VERSIONS THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE SHALL CONTROL Registration TO RECEIVE INFORMATION REGARDING UPDATES AND NEW PRODUCTS PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL DEALER OR VISIT THE TRIMBLE WEBSITE AT www trimble com register UPON REGISTRATION YOU MAY SELECT THE NEWSLETTER UPGRADE OR NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION YOU DESIRE Registration To receive information regarding updates and new products please contact your local de
124. K Note Any changes that you make to the vehicle appearance remain even if you remove the Manual Guidance option and replace it with the Autopilot option 104 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Configuring the GPS receiver When you install the Manual Guidance option the GPS Receiver option is also installed For instructions on configuring the GPS receiver see Chapter 6 The GPS Receiver Run screen for manual guidance When you use the Manual Guidance option the Run screen looks similar to when the Autopilot option is installed except that e There is no Autopilot tab on the right e There is no Engage button You can still access the Mapping plugin to add field features or create guidance lines Since there is no Autopilot system to control steering you must steer the vehicle manually while you watch the virtual lightbar for guidance FmX Integrated Display User Guide 105 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Autopilot automated steering system guidance Prior to configuration the Autopilot option must be installed on the FmX integrated display For more information see the mX integrated display Plug ins Guide There are two stages to configuring the Autopilot option e Configure the vehicle select the current vehicle make and model e Calibrate the Autopilot automated steering system for your vehicle Note The following configuration steps are usually done when the system is professi
125. Lines a area eatureDichonary txt H O Autopilot erana Te M 3 Data E ineheatunebecborary Grith Fara fi Peiireatrciacherary txt O Meadowbrook O South Feld i Planting U Spraying B G Gagnostics G Autopdot G Screenshots B Armware E J upgrade FmX Integrated Display User Guide 473 23 Data Management Client folder The Client folder stores a sub folder for each farm defined for the client The following diagram shows the C ient folder and file organization OF 6 AgGPS Data Smith Farms Qua O P O a E ra ib gt X 9 W My Computer B Se Local Disk C 4 Lh DVD RW Dive Ds fl SanDisk ImageMate Es B i ages O a8 nes E Autoedot E O bata 474 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management Farm folder The Farm folder stores a subfolder for each field defined for the farm The following diagram shows the Farm folder and file organization 02 AgGF5 Data Smith fanms Meadowbrook Bie Edt yew Favorites Tools Hep CD sox F a Search B Folders a amp E Address L Egas Data emih Farma Meadowbrook Folders X Name se testre My Documents E Y My Computer D Se Local Desk C 2 dd OVO RW Deve Ds H Sandisk imagemate E E 2 agers C AB Lines 2 i 5 Data 5 Smith Fams 5 0 South Fek G Matiy Field folder Each Field folder stores e A subfolder for each event performed on the fie
126. Module to be calibrated The message Not calibrated appears at the end of the modules that need calibration The following screen appears Field IQ Calibration B Rate and Section Control Module 5015561943 Vale Calibration Flow Calibration Pressure Calibration 3 Select the Control tab Rate and Section Controller Valve Calibration Contra Allawabhe Error Gain Minimum Pataca 4 Enter the following values Allowable Error FmX Integrated Display User Guide 325 10 The Field IQ Plugin Gain Minimum Response Note For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer see the Support Note Field IQ Crop Input Control System For Sprayers and Spreaders 5 Tap OK to return to the main calibration screen and then tap Flow Calibration The following screen appears Granular Calibration Lie a 6 Enter the following values Gate Height Setting Note If you entered a gate height measurement during setup you must also enter a measurement here Shaft Encoder Constant 326 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 7 To calculate the calibration constant tap Calculate The following dialog appears Calibration Constant Calculator Gate Width i 0 0 Drag Chain Distance Per Rev 2 2 0 Calibration Constant 201 290725 8 Enter the Gate Width and Drag Chain Distance Per Rev The system calculates the Calibration Consta
127. O oo ones 369 TrueGuide system aggressiveness settingS 2 aa ee ee 371 13 The TrueTracker Plugin 1 2 eee nanna 373 About the Irue Tracker System 22449246 a a e eh Ge ay eee See eee ey eee ee ees 374 TONNO e 44 een ees 655452 sep egee ee aba vera decauh eee eens 374 Benefits of the TrueTracker system 2 00 375 Requirements of the TrueTracker system 000 ee ee eee 375 Installing the TrueTracker system 2 2 ee ee 375 COMMe UIaOW 446 lt e547 as ee een ade 26 eee oS oe Hee oe ee pee Re 375 Activating the TrueTracker system os 4 244264 6 6454 844 FoR S S44 oe hb ORS 376 Configuring the implement settings 44 42449 4400 neeneg bea nage ban 376 Configuring the Vehicle tab sa620442 546 24 055 68 09 ook Re EH ES oe o 376 Configuring the Engage tab ear onge eae beng ae eee eee ey ae eos 377 Configuring the Steering tab ayo eG tee Ree ee ee ee oe ee ee 378 Configuring the implement controller 2 0 0 0 0 00000 379 ENC ie DUNO aaa eee eeaeeres Ge ae E ene nen eee ea ae eae ae ee ee ee 380 Conne ring the implement sesa s gee aaae EE a aE gee heron ee oa eas 381 Calibrating the 1MpleMents i ee5eoo e 224s ae enrade eae ee bea bee RE Hs 382 Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction 390 Calibrating the line acquisition aggressiveness 0 000 ee eee eee 393 Usme the rie Wacker systemi sse sresiterrinet eitek ee eh ek ee
128. PS 252 252 to NavController II 54608 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 135 5 Vehicle Guidance Options D Main NavController II cable 54601 ool AgGPS 252 262 receiver 55500 32 To configure the display only mode do the following 1 Inthe Current Configurations screen tap Configure 2 Select the Autopilot option and then tap Setup Vehicle Controller Port Connechor A Jext GPS e Vehicle Controller Settings Current Selection CASE 5185000 AG Edit Autopilot Sctiings Settings TAP AP Simulation 3 From the Connector drop down list select either A ext GPS or B ext GPS and then tap OK The Configuration screen appears 4 Select the Autopilot options GPS receiver and then tap Setup Vehicle 136 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 5 From the Corrections drop down list select the required correction option 6 Tap OK Row Guidance When the RG 100 row guidance plugin has been activated on the FmX integrated display the Autopilot automated steering system will follow curved or hillside corn rows that do not exactly match the guidance line The Autopilot system is required Home 2 Setup and configuration Active plug in tab Engage panel Contains the engage controls for plug ins such as the Autopilot automated steering system TrueTracker implement steering and the FieldLevel II automated levelling syste
129. PS receiver The current height of the primary blade The depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches used with the Autoslope leveling model P CMR Percent The percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the primary blade GPS receiver P Correction Age The time since the GPS corrections were last received from the primary FieldLEvel GPS receiver P Correction Type P Cut Fill The correction type used by the primary blade receiver The difference between the Primary Blade Height and the Primary Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height P Design Height The height the primary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green P Design Slope When using the Autoslope leveling model this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line P Distance Traveled For use with FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode The distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled
130. Q Plugin 10 Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Material Layout Section Control Rate Control enor Material Type 0 ew Material Name 10340 Application Rate Setup Material Type Select your Field IQ application type Note If spraying chemicals use the liquid fertilizer setting Row Crop Seed Liquid Granular Seed Granular Fertilizer Anhydrous Application Rate Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 1 Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 2 Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings e Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material e Target Rate Units Choose w
131. The CAN cable connects to either the C or D port on the rear of the FmX integrated display 2 Attach the EZ Steer controller to the dash Use the provided bracket 158 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Calibrating and configuring the EZ Steer system The calibration configures the T2 roll calibration and the EZ Steer system Angle per Turn Aggressiveness and Freeplay settings Before you calibrate the vehicle do the following e Ensure that the vehicles hydraulic oil is up to operating temperature Refer to the vehicle documentation e Ensure that the tire pressure is correct e Perform initial calibration without an implement or with the booms folded in on a high clearance sprayer After initial calibration is completed you can fine tune the settings with the implement or booms folded out e Choose a field with the smoothest possible surface and perform calibration at the normal operating speed for the vehicle The EZ Steer calibration process requires a straight A B line If you do not create an A B line before you begin the calibration the system prompts you to open a field and create one Calibrating the EZ Steer system To calibrate the EZ Steer system to work with the FmX integrated display you must complete the following 1 Enter the vehicle settings See page 159 2 Calibrate T2 roll compensation See page 161 3 Calibrate the EZ Steer system See page 163 Angle per Turn
132. To start out leave the value at 1 000 After the calibration test the system may adjust this number 4 Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration A N CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 5 Tap Test a The system asks if you would like to prime the system Tap Yes To to ensure that the seed disk is full the system turns the seed disks one revolution b Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on screen turn off the master switch c Inthe Number of Seed Meter Revolutions enter a value and then tap Start The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration Five to 10 revolutions is recommended FmX Integrated Display User Guide 275 10 The Field IQ Plugin d Follow the on screen prompts of operating the master switch After the system turns the specified number of revolutions enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap Continue e The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified Tap OK and then either press Test to repeat the calibration or tap OK to continue 6 Select the Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set Planter Calibration KE Rate Controller 4037601425 Calibrate Limits Max Speed 6 96 mph 11 20 mph 7 Tap OK 8 Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 for other
133. Tracker system m Using the TrueTracker system and how to configure it to steer implements more accurately FmX Integrated Display User Guide 373 13 The TrueTracker Plugin About the TrueTracker system 374 The TrueTracker implement steering system is an upgrade for the Autopilot automated steering system With the Autopilot system the vehicle receives guidance and pulls the implement When the TrueTracker system is added to the Autopilot system the implement receives separate guidance and steering to increase accuracy The system comprises two parts e Additional hardware installed on the implement e Additional FmX integrated display software provided by the TrueTracker plugin The TrueTracker system extends the sub inch year to year repeatable accuracy of the Autopilot automated steering system to the implement Terminology The term implement steering refers to the ability to actively steer the implement that a vehicle is towing Normally it is not possible to tell the exact location of the implement When you use the FmX integrated display with the Autopilot automated steering system for sub inch accuracy the GPS antenna and receiver are mounted on the vehicle and it is the vehicle that is guided On flat ground the implement will probably be directly behind the vehicle but in the following conditions the implement can pull draft to one side e On side slopes In variable soil conditions e On curved guidance patt
134. Trimble VRS Now or Network RTK operator as described below Server Name Address RTK VRS CORS base station broadcast name Server Port Number Base station port number Mount Point Base station mount point User Name Assigned username 6 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears The Ag3000 modem is now configured Note SIM tab fields In the USA the Ag3000 modem has an AT amp T card you do not need to enter the details Outside of the USA you must obtain details of the SIM card from the card provider and then enter them FmX Integrated Display User Guide 451 19 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 452 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The EZ Remote Joystick In this chapter This chapter describes the EZ Remote joystick which is a programmable external device that controls the functions of the FmX integrated mg Installation display m Requirements m Enabling the EZ Remote Joystick If you use the EZ Remote joystick you do not need to tap buttons on the FmX integrated display This improves your accuracy when you select buttons and gives you faster reaction times FmX Integrated Display User Guide 453 20 The EZ Remote Joystick Requirements e FmX integrated display e EZ Remote joystick Installation For installation information see the EZ Remote Joystick Quick Reference Card Enabling the EZ Remote Joystick 1 Connect the EZ Remote joystick into Port B on the back of the
135. USER GUIDE FmX Integrated Display Version 6 0 Revision A October 2011 Trimble Agriculture Business Area Trimble Navigation Limited Trimble Agriculture Division 10355 Westmoor Drive Suite 100 Westminster CO 80021 USA trimble_support trimble com www trimble com Legal Notices Copyright and Trademarks 2011 Trimble Navigation Limited All rights reserved Trimble the Globe amp Triangle logo AgGPS EZ Guide EZ Steer FmX and Tru Count are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited registered in the United States and in other countries Autopilot Autoseed AutoSense EZ Office FieldManager Field IQ FreeForm VRS VRS Now T2 TrueGuide and TrueTracker are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited GreenSeeker is a registered trademark of NTech Ltd For STL support the software uses the Moscow Center for SPARC Technology adaptation of the SGI Standard Template Library Copyright 1994 Hewlett Packard Company Copyright 1996 97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology Microsoft Windows ActiveX Excel and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Portions Copyright 2009 Nokia Corporation and or its subsidiary ies Portions Copyright 2003 Bitstream Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Release Notice T
136. X Integrated Display User Guide 227 9 Water Management lower the blade by the Blade Step amount Auto engage automatic blade height control e starts the slope calculation e resets the height e resets the cut fill Delete Benchmark delete the benchmark at the current location rence ne Tou ao net tave o dare overa perchar to dice your implement width A shape file is created with cut fill and height information Defining a plane You can define a plane in the Plane Editor on the FmX integrated display To do this use at least one point as a pivot point and extra information based on direction and slope requirements The following figure show the required elements Peen A a Pivot The single benchmark where the plane is defined All slopes will pivot around this point Benchmark Primary The first axis upon which the slope is defined It has a Primary Slope and Primary Heading component The Primary Slope is defined as a negative number where water will fall along the primary axis Cross The second axis upon which the slope is defined The Cross Heading will always be 90 or 270 from the Primary Heading The Cross Slope is defined as a negative number where water will fall along the cross axis To define the plane by a single heading and slope then you should set the Cross Slope value to 0 000 Composite When both Primary and Cross slopes are defined the Composite Slope direction shows the actual heading where water w
137. Y keyboard on a computer Select your preferred option from the Keyboard Layout drop down list The default option is ABCDEF 88 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Default settings To restore the settings of the FmX integrated display to the factory default settings select Default Settings and then tap Restore Feature mapping 1 From the Display Setup screen select Feature Mapping and then tap Setup Feature Mapping The four large buttons represent the field feature buttons that appear on the Mapping tab on the Run screen see The Run screen layout page 45 2 Inthe Mapping Location group select Boom Left Boom Center or Boom Right as the point on the vehicle where the feature will be created Fora Point feature select from the Point Features drop down list Fora Line or Area feature select from the Line Area Features drop down list FmX Integrated Display User Guide 89 4 Display Setup 3 Select one of the four feature buttons to assign a feature to 4 Do one of the following Tocreate a new feature and assign it to the button select the type of feature to create point line or area from the drop down list and then tap New The Edit Feature screen appears To assign an existing feature to the button select the type of feature to edit point line or area select the feature from the list that appears and then tap OK The Select Active Feature screen reappears with
138. YONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION PRODUCTION INSTALLATION OR DISTRIBUTION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON DURATION OR THE EXCLUSION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU NOTICE REGARDING PRODUCTS EQUIPPED WITH TECHNOLOGY CAPABLE OF TRACKING SATELLITE SIGNALS FROM SATELLITE BASED AUGMENTATION SYSTEMS SBAS WAAS EGNOS AND MSAS OMNISTAR GPS MODERNIZED GPS OR GLONASS SATELLITES OR FROM IALA BEACON SOURCES TRIMBLE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE OPERATION OR FAILURE OF OPERATION OF ANY SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SYSTEM OR THE AVAILABILITY OF ANY SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SIGNALS Limitation of Liability TRIMBLES ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION HEREIN SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT OR SOFTWARE LICENSE TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE PRODUCTS SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS INCLUDING WITHOUT L
139. Yield Monitoring Plugin Yield Monitor tab Inputs tab 442 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems In this chapter This chapter describes how to install and configure the DCM 300 or Ag3000 modem to m DCM 300 modem work with the FmX integrated display m Ag3000 modem FmX Integrated Display User Guide 443 19 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems DCM 300 modem 444 Introduction to the DCM 300 modem The DCM 300 modem enables the FmX integrated display to receive RTK corrections from a Trimble VRS network a third party RTK provider or a Continuously Operating Reference Station CORS Benefits of using a DCM 300 modem The benefits of using the FmX integrated display and the DCM 300 modem include the following More acres of RTK accuracy from Trimble VRS Now delivered to your display Easy interface and configuration with the display Roof mounted high gain cellular antenna for enhanced signal reception to minimize cell phone signal related drop outs On screen wireless status and diagnostics The DCM 300 modem is a rugged and sealed 3G communications solution for customers who need reliable communications for their farming operations The DCM 300 modem is available with a HSDPA modem for use with GSM wireless networks globally or an EVDO modem for use with the Verizon wireless network in the USA FmX Integrated Display User Guide VRS Plugin for DCM
140. agaeagee ge 293 Operating in the field 43 42hee4Ge bebe e een eaedekasteeeeseaan eee es 294 Setting up the Field IQ system for Spraying 2 0 0 0 eee ee ee 294 Mara eae pos eae See SR eae eee E ee eee eee em he ee 295 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 11 Contents 11 12 WAvOUGIAU 4en ueeeadaneeenee neue oGe the eee eset eee re eee ease 296 SeCHON COMM OMMD aur taegees sense ep eeee ebb eee ee eoueas Fer ee ene 297 Pave COMM OUId 45442 patna ee Boe eae Ree es 6 Oe ee ne bee a Oe ba re ee 299 DCUSOIS AN Geena eee awe ewe ee he eo ee Ree ee Eee oe 8 ee eee eos 302 ODEON as ante eaeehen nee seas EEE yoo bee eee ey eee ea 303 Material Setup Complete screen 1 2 ea 303 Calibrating the implement liftswitch 0 0 000 022 304 Calibrating the spraying modules 0 0 0 ee eee eee 304 Operating in the field suse ene ee neo ead FROGS Gee ARSE Ses bee eae 307 Setting up the Field IQ system for Spreading 0 0002 eee eee ee ee 307 Maal ee cee eee ke meter eho aye hae eee oes oy oem ee eee 308 Bou D 44u e452 o pees ee hese ae ee es Boe es oe owe ee ea re oe 309 Secon COMUMOIAD 2soeoen aenheeeesey a haweee eye oued een eee a ous 310 Rave CONMOIIAD 22 4 4aceueenteorer heen eeeeen eee yeh ae Bees 312 S d O Dean a a es a ee Aa a ee 317 CT AMON CAD gine e E Gee eee ee ae ee ee bee ee eee Yo oe eee 318 Material Setup Complete screen 2 1 ee ea 319 Calibrating the implement liftswitch 0
141. ain a boundary file Information stored in the Swaths shp file for fields with boundaries includes AB polylines Units are always metric in files created by the FmX integrated display The following information is stored in the boundary and ABLine attribute files Column Field description NRO Version Boundary orABtine ettibutefiewerion J 1D ABLinenvmber Name Nemeanignedtothe Bune Field area Boundary area Field perimeter distance Boundary only Length Length of the AB Line Dist1 Dist2 Pewwese fo Unless a field has a boundary the size of the field is not defined Therefore for fields without boundaries the _Complete in the EventHistory dbf file is always zero Note If you browse the dbf files using an Excel spreadsheet date fields may appear in a different format depending on your local settings 478 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Coverage logging data Coverage logging files are created when any application coverage is recorded For each coverage polygon the following information is saved to the coverage logging file Column priedas Track logging files Track logging files are created whenever the event is opened See Track logging files page 76 At each point a number of attributes are recorded The units stored in the track attribute file Track3D_ lt date time gt dbf are in metric units The following information is stored for each point in the track logging a
142. aler or visit the Trimble website at www trimble com register Upon registration you may select the newsletter upgrade or new product information you desire Notices This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits TRIMBLE is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that ma
143. alibrate the valve enter values in the 3 Manual Calibration fields and then tap OK For the WM Drain valve 1 From the Configuration screen select the WM Drain plugin and then tap Calibrate 2 Inthe WM Drain Calibration screen set the vehicle throttle to 100 and then tap Start Surveying a section line FmX Integrated Display User Guide 247 9 Water Management 248 Surveying your alignment for tile or ditch Before you begin using Autoslope you must set the Survey Height Offset This offset will be applied to the heights of your surveyed alignment preventing the need to rebench before installing tile This means that you can survey the alignment and then install tile straight away To set the Survey Height Offset do the following l 2A J From the Configuration screen select the WM Drain plugin and then tap Setup On the tile plow raise the boot as high as it will go and measure the distance from the bottom of the tile boot to the ground A Tile plow raised up to maximum height Survey height offset Ground surface Enter this value into the Survey Height Offset field Note It is recommended that you change the Survey Point spacing to 5 ft this will then record survey points every 1 5m 5 ft and provide a more accurate profile of the ground surface 4 5 Tap OK In the Run screen drive to a point that will be u
144. alibrating T2 roll compensation The EZ Steer system contains sensors that use T2 terrain compensation technology to provide roll compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump For roll compensation to work correctly the controller must be calibrated 1 Select the EZ Steer plugin and then tap Calibrate E Steer Steering Calibration Wahida Type Tractor 2WwDMFIA D orrtroler Orienta toecring FPorformn2nce 2 Select Controller Orientation EZ Steer Roll Calibration Orientation Set the image to match the nik onentation in th cab EZ S ter connectors point towards the rear of the vehicie Next FmX Integrated Display User Guide 161 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 162 2 From the Orientation drop down list select the orientation of the SCM steering control module and then tap Next EZ Steer Roll Calibration Park the vehich and mark fhe intide postion of both sets of whegls Park the vehicle mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap Next The display records the roll offset in the first direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read Turn the vehicle around ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in Step 4 and then tap Next EZ Steer Roll Calibration Proas OK to accept those settings of Cancel to restore the previos setings The display records the roll offset in the secon
145. alled For more information contact your local reseller There are six steps to complete Step 1 Configuring the implement Step 2 Preparing the FmX integrated display and antenna connections Step 3 Configuring the primary receiver Step 4 Configuring the secondary receiver Step 5 Configuring the Tandem Dual plugin Step 6 Calibrating the Tandem Dual valve module Step 1 Configuring the implement If you have not already configured the implement see Configuring the implement for leveling drainage page 202 Step 2 Preparing the FmX integrated display and antenna connections If not already installed on the FmX integrated display install the FieldLevel II plugin followed by the Tandem Dual plugin for more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 192 When both plugins are installed the Configuration screen will show both the FieldLevel II plugin with its associated GPS receiver and the Tandem Dual plugin with its associated GPS receiver FmX Integrated Display User Guide 235 9 Water Management Connect the FieldLevel II plugin primary antenna to the GPS1 connector on the rear of the display and connect the Tandem Dual plugin secondary antenna to the GPS2 connector on the rear of the display The correct configuration for the antennas on the implement s is as follows FmX integrated display Receiver position Receiver position port Tandem set up Dual set up Step 3 Configuring the prim
146. alues Decrease the slew time and increase the Increase the slew time and decrease the overshoot This provides rapid responses but can overshoot This improves the stability but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instability introduce significant delays in the steering for example a tendency to excessively response and can cause the vehicle to oscillate overshoot from side to side Notes on performing the proportional steering gain calibration e Perform the Automatic Deadzone calibration immediately before you run the PGain calibration even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past e Perform this calibration on a hard level surface that is free of obstructions e Maintain a vehicle speed above 1 6 kph 1 mph while you perform the calibration Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs e Slew times no longer decrease a low value is required e Overshoot exceeds 5 8 depending on the vehicle e Wheels noticeably shake near end stops FmX Integrated Display User Guide 121 5 Vehicle Guidance Options To calibrate the proportional steering gain 1 Select the Valve P gain procedure from the calibration list See Autopilot calibration page 111 The first Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration screen appears Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration E 2 Tap Run Slew Test A warning message appears 3 Tap Next A N CAUTION The whee
147. ance Options 5 Calibrating the automated steering deadzone AN The Automated Deadzone calibration procedure runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs WARNING During the Automated Deadzone calibration the system moves the wheels that steer the vehicle To avoid injury be prepared for sudden vehicle movement In this test the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs Notes on calibrating the automated steering dead zone You must complete the Steering Angle procedure before you run this procedure To ensure optimal system performance the hydraulic fluid must be at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure On some vehicles with large reservoirs it may take several hours for the fluid to reach operating level especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console If you perform the calibration while the system is still cold repeat both the Deadzone and the Proportional gain calibration procedures once the system is at operating temperature To configure the automated steering deadzone l Place the vehicle in a large field that is free of hazards To minimize the effect of the ground conditions the field should have smooth soil tha
148. ane To set the Primary Slope Heading choose the first benchmark to define the heading and then tap the From Set gt button Note It is recommended that this point is the uphill point of the two points to be used to define the primary slope Select the second point of the primary slope and then tap the To Set gt button 230 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 The selected benchmarks appear in the Benchmarks table along with their associated cut fill values The Primary Slope and Cross Slope values reflect the calculated slopes based on the benchmarks entered in the New Plane screen To update the slope values a Identify the benchmark to be used as the new pivot b Tap the Choose Pivot button The Choose Pivot screen appears c From the Choose Pivot screen select the benchmark to be used as a the pivot for the new slope from the screen d Tap OK The Plane Editor screen appears FmX Integrated Display User Guide 231 9 Water Management 10 Select the Primary Slope Cross Slope or Height Above Pivot areas to edit the slope values as required Note The cut fill values in the Benchmarks table will update automatically 11 The plane is now defined Tap OK The Run screen appears Note The FieldLevel II system will search for a survey on the field If there is a survey a cut fill map appears as the new design plane 232 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 D
149. ap the Engage button on the main guidance screen e Press the optional remote engage foot pedal or rocker switch e Turn the steering wheel The system automatically disengages when e The vehicle or implement is outside the engage limits e GPS positions are lost on the implement or on the vehicle e Minimum Fix Quality is not maintained and the system receives low accuracy positions for example no corrections FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueGuide Plugin 12 Engage status indicators Engage status Button color Vehicle icon color Ez y u_ rr Operating the TrueGuide system 1 Inthe Run screen with the 7rueGuide tab showing tap AUTO The TrueGuide system status is shown as Disengaged FmX Integrated Display User Guide 369 12 The TrueGuide Plugin 2 Tap Engage to start guidance The Auto button changes to ON and the TrueGuide system status is shown as Waiting The Autopilot system acquires the line before transistioning to the TrueGuide system The TrueGuide system status remains at Waiting while the Autopilot system acquires the line Once the TrueGuide system has taken control the TrueGuide System status changes to ON and the TrueGuide system Engage button changes to Auto 3 To disengage the TrueGuide system at any time tap Off Note To force the TrueGuide system to turn on when the status is Waiting tap ON again Note As soon as the TrueGuide system is d
150. ariable Rate Application Based on information supplied to a rate controller the rate of fertilizer or other chemical applied 346 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 GreenSeeker primary components GreenSeeker RT200 with FmX integrated display components rE Power switch sensors Rem Description OOOO O ee prener E ta ocr cn a ic EA Ee O ee eer ee ee i ee i eee FmX Integrated Display User Guide 347 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin Interface module The Interface Module contains circuitry to GreenSeeker ATF SP fees fae Poel interface boom mounted sensors with the FmX integrated display The interface module has CAN serial and power connections The module is an environmentally sealed enclosure which can be installed inside or outside the cab GreenSeeker sensors Reflectance readings are taken by the sensor These units generate their own illumination for use in any lighting condition day or night When the unit is on a red band of light will be observed directly below the rectangular sensor window The sensor is designed for an optimal height of 28 48 over the plant crop canopy to be sensed The field of view width of the sensor measurement is approximately 24 within the sensors optimal height range Sensor mounting bracket Sensors are typically mounted to a standard stainless steel bracket supplied by Trimble These brackets are
151. ary uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and
152. ary receiver The FieldLevel II plugin controls the primary receiver 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS receiver listed below the Field Level plugin and then tap Setup 2 From the Receiver drop down list select Internal Primary 3 From the Corrections drop down list select RTK 4 Set the Network ID field to the same network ID that is set in the base receiver Step 4 Configuring the secondary receiver The Tandem Dual plugin controls the secondary receiver l From the Configuration screen select the GPS receiver listed below the Tandem Dual plugin and then tap Setup 2 From the Receiver drop down list select Internal Secondary 236 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Step 5 Configuring the Tandem Dual plugin The FmX integrated display must be configured to control the Tandem Dual plugin in either a tandem configuration or a dual configuration depending upon the implement s being used l From the Configuration screen select the Tandem Dual plugin and then tap Setup T anden Back 2 By default the Type field is set to Tandem Back and can control two implements one towed behind the other Ifa single implement is to be used in a dual configuration select Dual Right from the Type drop down list 3 Enter the appropriate value in the Antenna Height field This value relates to the antenna installed on either the rear implement or the antenna installed on the
153. ated display harness that the Enalta sensors are connected to 420 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide The Productivity Monitoring Plugin 17 4 Adjust the port settings Productivity Monitoring Setup 5 In the Enalta list select Enable Enalta CCT to enable the Enalta system 6 Select the NMEA messages that the systems will use to communicate You can select GGA Select Enable GGA VTG Select Enable VTG GGA and VTG messages Select both buttons RMC 7 Enter the following settings Description Logging Rate While Field Open The rate at which data is logged when a field is open 1 sec 300 sec Logging Rate While Field The rate at which data is logged when the field is closed 1 sec 300 sec Closed Minimum Operating Speed When a field is open and the vehicle speed drops below this speed a pop up message appears onscreen asking the driver to select a reason for the low speed The system will not operate until the driver selects a reason Maximum Stoppage Time When a field is open and the vehicle stops moving for longer than this time the system prompts the driver for reason for the stoppage The system will not operate until the driver responds Productive When The system is marked productive when a condition is active None The system is not productive Logging On productive Off non productive AP Engaged Engaged productive Disengaged non productive Minimum Speed Above productive Be
154. been added to the vehicle profiles on the FmX integrated display e The Row Guidance plugin has been added to the FmX display configuration 1 Inthe Home screen tap eB l 2 Inthe Configuration Selection screen tap the Edit button next to Implement 3 In the Configuration screen tap Add Remove to add the plugin to the configuration Setting up the plugin 1 Inthe Configuration screen select the Row Guidance plugin and then tap Setup The Row Guidance Configuration screen appears 2 Once you are in the RG 100 setup select the header model attached to your combine and verify that the measurements are accurate for your vehicle measurements can differ due to vehicle variations 138 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 3 Measure distances with the header at the approximate operation height Inaccurate measurements will result in a degraded performance Row Guidance Configuration Please select a header Select the type of head on the combine Feeler to Axle Offset Enter the distance from the pivot point of the feeler to the front axle This measurement must be accurate to within an inch otherwise the performance will be degraded Cutter Bar to Axle Distance Enter the distance from the front of the cutter bar or point where the crop enters the snapper rollers to the center of the front axle This measurement must be accurate otherwise the performance will be degraded Feeler Left Righ
155. between the points from the first run and the points from the second run Divide the distance by two Convert your speed from mph to inches second inches second mph x 17 6 To calculate the Lead Time setting divide the distance between the points in inches from Step 5 by the vehicle speed in inches second Half the distance between points inches Lead Time seconds Speed inches second Enter the lead time on the Remote Output screen For example if a4 mph pass creates a 14 distance between each set of points a Divide the distance between the points by 2 In this example 14 2 7 b Convert the speed from mph to inches second 4 mph 4 x 17 6 70 4 inches second c Divide the halved distance between the points by the speed 7 inches 0 099 Lead Time in seconds 70 4 inches second d Drive along the AB line and then back at your application speed while you create trigger points e Ensure that the trigger points are sufficiently close to one another If the gap between the points is unacceptable repeat the calibrations FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Serial Data Input Plugin In this chapter When serial data input is activated the FmX integrated display can receive and log NMEA messages from an external device for example m Configuring serial data input an infra red sensor m Connecting serial data input This chapter explains how to configure the
156. bles you to insert a straight section of line rather than having the line follow the exact path of the vehicle as happens with direct mapping FmX Integrated Display User Guide 55 3 Getting Started When you select tap Record the line you are driving is mapped When you deselect Record the display stops directly mapping your path Instead a dotted line spans from the vehicle to the point where you deselected Record When you select the button again the line becomes solid and your path is mapped again Point where Record was de selected Creating guidance with the FreeForm pattern The FreeForm pattern is an advanced pattern that enables you to create multiple lines of different types in a single field to obtain guidance in fields of any shape You need to record each line that you drive to generate the next guidance line You can create e Curved line segments e Straight line segments in the form of straight AB Lines With this combination you can use the FreeForm pattern to create non circular spirals or multiple curved guidance lines for irregular shaped fields X Tip With FreeForm curves remember that your next guidance line will appear only if you record your vehicle s path along the current guidance line Record each pass to generate your next guidance line Creating a FreeForm section 1 From the Run screen tap Swaths The Swaths Management screen appears 2 Select the FreeForm tab in the upper left of the
157. by the implement receiver Impl East The distance that the implement is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the implement is to the west of the field origin point Impl Engaged Time The time that the implement has been engaged Impl GPS Status The status of the GPS correction used for the implement Impl H Error Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the implement GPS position in 2 dimensions Impl HDOP The Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the implement receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the HDOP is higher lower is better Impl North The distance that the implement is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the implement is to the south of the field origin point Impl Nudge Trim The amount of nudge or trim currently applied to the implement position Impl Offline Dist The distance away from the guidance line Impl Satellites The number of satellites the implement receiver is reading Impl Short term XTE An implement pass to pass Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur within less than 15 minutes Impl Speed The current implement speed Impl Steering Angle The steering angle of the implement Impl Up The vertical height of the implement relative to the field origin point a negative number means the implement is lower than th
158. cation on the implement and the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control modules you will use Module Select the module number that corresponds to each section Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control Section Grouping Assign the rows that are in each section Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each section control module e Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn o
159. ce a rebench Force If Force Rebench is set to Yes and the field has been closed and opened again the Rebench system will not let you start work until you have re benched Use this setting if you are using a different base station setup between work sessions If you have a X Tip To view relative offset values on the Run screen set the offsets as status text items on the slide out tab Configuring the Valve Setup for all leveling models When you select the Valve Setup tab on the FieldLevel II Setup screen the following items are available mem eseiption S Valve Type Select the Valve Type field and then select the type of valve that is connected CAN Bus Select the port on the FmX integrated display that the valve module is connected to Valve inverted Leave this field as Not Inverted unless the tank and pressure hoses have been installed incorrectly on the valve If this is the case select Inverted to eliminate the need to reverse the hoses Configuring the Height Filter for all leveling models When you select the Height Filter tab on the FieldLevel II Setup screen the following items are available in the Filter Type list pem pemp ooo This setting this is the raw GPS data used for height is recommended Average The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected This will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the controls gradually resume using the raw GPS height
160. ce a rebench VDOP Level Vertical Dilution of Precision VDOP is a measure of the vertical accuracy of the GPS signal If the VDOP reaches this value a warning appears A VDOP Setting of less than 3 is recommended Filter Type The options are e None This setting the raw GPS data used for height is recommended e Average The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected This will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the controls e Jump detect This will filter out some jumps in the height readings When you select this you must enter the following values Threshold The change in height value that will trigger the value Decay Time Once this filter is triggered this will be the amount of time it takes to gradually resume using the raw GPS height 7 Tap OK Step 3 Configuring the receiver 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS receiver listed below the WM Drain plugin and then tap Setup 2 From the Receiver drop down list select Internal Primary 3 From the Corrections drop down list select RTK 4 Set the Network ID field to the same network ID that is set in the base receiver 246 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Calibrating the WM Drain plugin The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers This process takes approximately 8 10 minutes for each valve Note To manually c
161. ce from halfway across the width of the left track to halfway across the width of the right track Autopilot Track Spacing Calibration Calibrating a hydraulically steered tracked tractor If you selected a hydraulically steered tracked tractor as the make and model Engine Speed appears on the calibration list Notes on hydraulically steered tracked vehicles e This group of vehicles includes the CAT AGCO Challenger Tracked family e No calibration is required if the system is installed on a CAT MT 700 800 series equipped with the ISO option This also includes John Deere tracked vehicles FmX Integrated Display User Guide 129 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen The Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen enables you to verify that the RPM sensor output is correct P ingtructons hizke sure that tractor is in Park and Press the Meat button Engine RPM Cancel Moxt gt gt OK Ifthe Engine RPM value is not close to the actual engine RPM follow the onscreen instructions to adjust the sensor output Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen The Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen verifies and optimizes the response of the hydraulic steering pumps Follow the onscreen instructions to perform this procedure Make certain that the tractor is mowing forward slowly Use lowest gear with high engine RPM Fress Hiert r Right Pump
162. ck 4 Insert the USB memory stick into the USB socket on the rear of the FmX integrated display 5 Press the Power button on the rear of the display to turn on the FmX integrated display and then wait for the Home screen to appear 6 Tap Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade screen appears 7 Select a firmware file from the Firmware list and tap Upgrade 8 Once the upgrade is complete tap OK The system restarts 466 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Advanced Configuration 22 Upgrading the Field IQ system firmware You can use the display to upgrade the firmware in the following components Field lQ Master Switch Box 12 Section Switch Box Rate and Section Control Module Seed Monitoring Module Section Control Module Rate Control Module Rawson Control Module To upgrade a components firmware 1 2 3 4 5 9 Transfer the new firmware file from www trimble com to your office computer Connect the FmX integrated display USB memory stick to your office computer Copy the firmware upgrade file to the Firmware folder on the USB memory stick Insert the USB memory stick into the USB socket on the FmX integrated display Press the Power button on the rear of the display to turn on the FmX integrated display and then wait for the Home screen to appear Tap Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Select the appropriate plugin from the Firmware list Any available firmware upgrade files appear in the upper right list S
163. communicate with the controller FmX Integrated Display User Guide 401 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin 402 The FmX integrated display varies the width of the coverage polygons according to the number of boom sections but it does not know the absolute width of each boom section it only knows the relative width of each boom section with respect to the total boom section width When recording coverage polygons each section is considered to be a percentage of the Application Width set in the FmX integrated display Implement Boom Setup screen For example if you create an intentional overlap to avoid gaps in the application coverage by making the application width greater than the swath width This proportionally changes the recorded width of each boom section Using the controller To allow the rates being sent by the FmX integrated display to be used by the Raven controller the channel must be set to Rate 1 SCS4XX SCS6XX or to Product X Auto SCS7XX Ifthe controller is set to Rate 2 or Manual the controller ignores the rates being sent but the display still records the applied rates Limitations Set the baud rate to 9600 Some older controllers are only capable of 1200 baud these controllers need to be upgraded CAUTION Some Raven controllers do not support zero rates If the target rate is zero and spray is still being applied you must turn off the boom sections manually Rawson and New Leader The Rawson and
164. compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off after the set number of seconds Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area Coverage Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area FmX Integrated Display User Guide 267 10 The Field IQ Plugin Rate Control tab Adjust the rate control settings Field IQ Setup T E e a Off Section switching only implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a screen appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup e Advanced The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages 268 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Drive Setup Valve Setup tab sud iene eee Valve Type Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow Plumb
165. control module s their location on the implement and the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control modules you will use Module Select the module number that corresponds to each section Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control Section Grouping Assign the rows that are in each section Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each section control module e Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the
166. creen When you have completed setting up a new material the Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field IQ Setup Wizard e Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen 292 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 From the Field JQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4 Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the modules Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate 1 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate 2 From the Field Q Calibration screen select the operation under the Module that you would like to calibrate The message Not calibrated appears at the end of the modules that need calibration Note Calibration screens will vary slightly if you are using a linear actuator Note Before priming the system the Automatic Manual Switch on the master switch box must be in the manual position Note If you have an impelement lift switch calibrate it first See above FmX Integra
167. creen from the Run screen set the Mapping information tab drop down list to Variety and then tap Attributes If you select a different implement or change the settings of the current implement the variety assignments are removed Prescriptions You can define variable rate controller setup data and load prescription files that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller Applied rates are received from the controller and both target and applied rates appear on the screen In addition you can log data relating to the variable rate application to the card The FmX integrated display can load prescription files created by a Geographic Information System GIS The method you use to create the prescription depends on which GIS package you use Once you create the prescription store either the three prescription files in ESRI shape file format or the single gdx file in the AgGPS Prescriptions folder Then when you are within the proximity criteria the prescription is available to load When you map a new field or select an existing field you can also select any shapefile shp or AgInfo GDX gdx prescription file created in AgInfo version 3 5 44 0 or later that is within the following limits For this type of field Prescriptions must If you load a shapefile prescription select the rate column If you use complex contoured
168. ct your local reseller Tap OK The Autopilot controller is now configured Selecting the vehicle 1 Inthe Vehicle tab on the Vehicle Controller Setup screen tap Edit Weck Profile Locman con Dotobise dmt Model Browee m FmX Integrated Display User Guide 109 5 Vehicle Guidance Options There are a number of pre configured profiles for the various vehicle makes and models You can load them from Autopilot controller The majority of vehicle profiles are stored on the Autopilot controller Vehicle profile database file As additional profiles become available or are updated they are added to a vehicle profile database You can download the database and load profiles from it Saved file You can install an individual vehicle profile that you have previously saved 2 Inthe Vehicle Profile Location group select the source for the make and model Tap this button Then go to step From Controller new Selecting a new vehicle make and model from the list on 3 the Autopilot controller From Database new Selecting a new vehicle make and model from a database of vehicles vdb on the FmX integrated display If you need to obtain a vdb file contact your local reseller From Saved File Selecting a saved vehicle make and model from the 5 existing display cfg on the card Selecting a new vehicle make and model from the list on the Autopilot controller a From the drop down l
169. cureRTK requires firmware version 1 59 or later on MS750 GPS receivers and firmware version 3 67 on AgRTK and AgGPS 442 base stations 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup SecureRTK Logging Radar Output Veehbche niemal Autonomous 2 Select the SecureRTK tab ScouncATk Logging Radar Output Descripton Expiry 3 Inthe Key field enter the base station access code provided by your base station service provider The Status and Expiry fields change to show the current status of the security feature 174 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GPS Receiver 6 4 Optional In the Description field enter the name of the base station 5 Tap OK If SecureRTK is enabled on the base station rovers with authorized access codes can use corrections from that base Note Rovers without a SecureRTK access code are unable to access a secure Trimble RTK base station Autoseed fast restart technology Autoseed fast restart technology greatly reduces the time needed for OmniSTAR HP XP VBS convergence Once the OmniSTAR signal has initially converged you can turn off the receiver When you turn the receiver on again accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown To benefit from Autoseed technology e you must use OmniSTAR HP or XP corrections e shut down the receiver e donot move the vehicle before you turn on the receiver again
170. d you can set a time value that will Raise automatically raise the blade For example if you set 0 5s the blade will raise for half a second when you turn off Auto mode Remote Input You can attach a remote for enabling and disabling Auto mode This remote is Auto controlled with the Remote Input Auto setting Configuring relative heights for all leveling models By default relative heights are enabled meaning coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark For field leveling or data collection you can set relative offsets so that the coordinates are recorded relative to the offsets set for the master benchmark You can set offsets in any of the following directions e The X axis e The Y axis e The height The Relative Heights tab of the FieldLevel II Setup screen shows the following items Description Relative Select Enabled to use relative heights from the master benchmark Choose Disabled Heights to use GPS heights at all times Relative X If relative heights are enabled this is the X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark Relative Y If relative heights are enabled this is the Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark FmX Integrated Display User Guide 215 9 Water Management Height Offset If relative heights are enabled this is the height value that will be applied to the master benchmark permanent base station setup that is never moved then it is OK to not for
171. d Rate The total seed rate that is currently being applied Total Vol Applied The total volume of material applied Transfer Status Connected Farm transfer activity TrueGuide Roll Roll corrections in degrees that are applied TrueGuide Trim The distance from the guidance line that the vehicle has been shifted The vertical height of the vehicle relative to the field origin point a negative xe number means the vehicle is lower than the field origin point 84 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Sti Pace VDOP The Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the VDOP is higher lower is better Vehicle Model The model of vehicle that is configured Vehicle Type The type of vehicle that is configured Vertical Error Estimate The current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver In the Display Setup screen select Status Items and then tap Setup Upper left status text item Upper right status text item Select Status Items Se i a n i Ts i ftidh Slide out tab status text The Select Status Items screen has two tabs that enable you to configure various display options for the status text items The Run Screen tab The Run Screen tab lets you allocate the various items that will be displayed on the Run
172. d direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 6 The T2 calibration results will appear in the Roll Offset window The Roll Offset value should be between 0 and 4 7 Tap OK The EZ Steer Steering Calibration screen appears Calibrating and setting the EZ Steer parameters To calibrate the EZ Steer system and set the correct steering performance parameters the following steps must be completed with the vehicle moving forward along the A B line 1 From the Z Steer Steering Calibration screen select Steering Performance The EZ Steer Steering Performance screen appears 2 To configure the Angle per Turn settings select the Step J tab EZ Steer Steering Performance 0 00 Omen qase sase Step 1 Step Steps Angle Per Turm Sear by opening afield and serving an AE lire hiie sai on tec AB fine miy kf or righ theo adjusteng tie sehing on this bab ped nips yeaa performance using Angle Per Turn tien nary ie bee Met met Bea l Cant engage EZ Steernoer calibrated This is the angle that the wheels turn through during one full rotation of the steering wheel This is a course aggressiveness adjustment If the setting is too low the system may require several attempts to reach the line With the vehicle moving forward along the A B line a Nudge the vehic
173. d monitoring may not work include the following 1 Make sure the display Header Height setting is lower than John Deere s setting FmX is not mapping FmX stops mapping periodically through the field setting FmX yield information does Different crop types may be selected not match John Deere s information Major jump or extremely shown on the John Deere monitor The header could be raising and lowering past the Stop Logging Header Height The Stop Head Height setting is lower than Set the Head Height to 100 on different weight values than what the John Deere monitor shows The John Deere monitor could be logging more Ensure that the crop type is the same Note The machine must be in normal harvesting operation mode Increase the Header Height setting on the FmX Verify the crop types match in both displays the John Deere display data than the FmX logs therefore showing a larger value FmX Integrated Display User Guide 433 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Third party display instructions 434 Setting up the Claas Cebis Quantimeter Note When using the Yield Monitoring plugin with Claas Quantimeter always set the Autopilot Coverage Log setting to Manual See Configuring the Engage tab page 107 Crop Harvested setting 1 On the Cebis display select and then select Fig 2 Select Ho and then select the crop that you are harvesting Moisture Measuring setting l Selec
174. d that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things FmX Integrated Display User Guide 3 a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms a
175. decline occurs at different levels for different models of tractor The manual override sensitivity is the level that the voltage must spike to before the override occurs and the system disengages The voltage must also taper below that level before automated steering can be engaged again e If you set a high level of sensitivity the system will disengage more quickly and you will have to wait longer before you can re engage e Ifyou set a low level of sensitivity the system will take longer to disengage and you will be able to re engage more quickly WARNING Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fail resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle Any adjustment to this setting must be made only by an authorized dealer Trimble strongly recommends that you perform this calibration only if the default sensitivity is unacceptable under all conditions Do not to choose a sensitivity setting that is either too sensitive or not sensitive enough In either case manual override may cease to function correctly On some platforms you could set the sensitivity so low that the manual override function will not detect any steering wheel motion It is vital that you avoid this FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 To configure and check the manual override 1 Select the Manual Override option from the procedure list see page 111
176. described in Chapter 7 Implement Configuration Enabling and configuring the variable rate controller in the FmX integrated display 1 From the Configuration screen select the Serial Rate Control plugin and then tap Setup Edit Variable Rate Controller settings Note The fields that appear on the screen depend on which controller you selected 2 3 4 5 6 Select the controller make from the Controller drop down list Select the display port the controller is connected to from the Port drop down list If the Active Channel field appears enter the active channel name In the Send Rate As list select the unit of measure In the Rates tab enter the default rate and step size for the controller in the Default Rate and Step Size text fields FmX Integrated Display User Guide 399 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin 7 Inthe Rate Snapping list select Enabled or Disabled Daan Pinte AGP Sue ate snapping 9 Inthe Rates tab enter the number of sections in the Number of Sections field 400 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 Configuring the variable rate controller If you specified a variable rate controller type the FmX integrated display initiates communications with the controller each time that you open a field Communications are terminated when you close the field Ifthe FmX integrated display cannot communicate with the controller e A message appears identi
177. designed to fit most boom structures and are typically mounted with U bolts 348 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 Care and maintenance To maintain the high performance of your GreenSeeker RT200 variable rate application and mapping system do the following e Each day or during applicator re fill check the GreenSeeker sensor detector and light source windows for dust and dirt and wipe clean with a soft rag e The GreenSeeker system should not be left outdoors during extreme weather conditions Wide temperature variations are hard on electronics and fluid seals and may reduce the operating life of the system e DO NOT store a GreenSeeker system with the sensors facing upward Doing so may allow water to collect around the windows and gaskets causing seal failures in those areas Also direct sunlight can in some cases focus enough energy into the sensor to damage the detector Note There are no field serviceable components of the electronic system do not attempt any field repair of a malfunctioning interface module or sensors If you experience operating problems contact your local dealer or Trimble representative Field preparations for Nitrogen application Note The following instructions apply to the most common Nitrogen applications Check algorithms for specific instructions For updated specific algorithm instructions go to www GreenSeeker com Field information Before the Gre
178. display An EZ Remote joystick icon automatically appears on the Configuration screen 2 From the Configuration screen select EZ Remote and then tap Setup The EZ Remote Assignment screen appears EZ Remote Assignment 3 Inthe EZ Remote Assignment screen you can configure each key for the function you want to control remotely You can also adjust the brightness of the LED joystick buttons 454 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The EZ Remote Joystick 20 4 On the EZ Remote joystick press the first button you wish to program The Function Assignment screen appears Function Assignment for Button D Tap the feature that you want to program into that button on the control joystick Tap Set and then tap OK The Keypad Assignment screen appears again Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 to program more buttons as required Aon SO When completed tap OK Note You can configure the EZ Remote control joystick while operating in a field From the Run screen tap the Configure button t and then follow the steps above Note The functions available to assign to each button depend on which plugins are activated on the FmX integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 455 20 The EZ Remote Joystick 456 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The LB25 External Lightbar In this chapter This chapter describes how to configure the LB25 external lightbar to operate with the FmX m Configuring the lightbar int
179. displayed the current ground height is above the target height and the height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to moved down to reach the target height When Fill is displayed the current ground height is below the target height The originally planned or designed height at the current location When using the Autoslope leveling model this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line For use with Point to Slope mode this is the distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled The difference in the East component from the Local Tangent Plane LTP The solution type for example RTK Fixed or RTK Float and so on The current estimate of the error in the horizontal component FmX Integrated Display User Guide 221 9 Water Management Rem Denerption ooo P Network ID The network ID that the GPS receiver is set to which needs to be the same as the base receiver network ID P North The difference in the North component from the Local Tangent Plane LTP P Offset The relative offset in the vertical component P Offset X The relative offset in the X component P Offset Y The relative offset in the Y component P Satellites The number of satellites in the GPS GLONASS solution P Section Line Number The line number selected for design in AutoSlope This is the current section line being recorded in the field P Speed The current speed of th
180. e 126 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 6 Park the vehicle and exit the cab Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a flag in the ground to mark the vehicle center line for this pass 7 Complete the pass Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction 8 Engage automatic steering mode Stop the vehicle midway down the pass with the drawbar pin location very close to the marker flag Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line 9 Park the vehicle and exit the cab Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a second flag in the ground to mark the tractor centerline for this pass Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass 10 Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results in the table on page 127 Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right The following figure shows an example of a right offset measure the distance between the flags 11 Repeat Steps 5 to 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Use the following table to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run Offset distance Offset direction FmX Integrated Disp
181. e When all sections are off the control valve returns to the closed position on Sections Closed Lock in Last Position When all sections are off the control valve remains in the last position This setting allows the system to return to the target rate faster Auxiliary Valve If you have an Auxiliary Valve installed select one of the following Master Valve closes when the system is turned off Dump Valve opens to dump flow to return line when the system is turned off Pump Disarming Enable Select this option if you have a Pump Disarming Switch installed Switch FmX Integrated Display User Guide 315 10 The Field IQ Plugin Feedback Setup tab Shaft Encoder Constant Pulses per revolution Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio 316 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup x i Pa Laaa a i j j ki P E a eg I HEC LH L nere aoe Oma pej WED mg Ba ml ja ai r i i A aeee a iat TE FI Typ d Bal in i z ki jy s m iml NENSI e e e aral yeaa Se i i E ia fi l 7 i When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information ti Sensor Type
182. e D 1 OCUCTION 6 oe ce ck bee weeds eae eet e eee ee eee eS 17 About the product a4 6 bone eeneee 4 he BA Eber ea eee ee eee he Pee es 17 Usme ismana ta a e a ee a ee ee ee ee ee ee 17 Related information 44 ny4he Geos oon eo eee Ge ane ee OS GO ae ee as Oe ee 17 Tecnmical acsi t2 6 oe ee a ee ee sae eee 17 COUR COMMU NGS ae ae eR ae ee sl oe ee ee ee Ge a ee oe 18 2 Display Overview 2 ee nnana nnn 19 DVS LCHUCOMDONCHLS oo 62k Af ae eee AE Oe eee ee A Ee eS ee ee 20 PackoutcomeniS segad 4084 sceceegebeagaeet etede ses eed Bee 20 PEONO ii ewe eee cee ge kee ee eee oe ee eee oa Bee ee oa ee eee 21 Wed VieWs oe tence te ewee eee ke tee ene ete ee ene ee eee ote oes Ad System software aaua aaa OO OG Oe Ee ee eee hee ee ee Gd 23 COMMOLDUTIONS sta esha cade ee ees C2444 A Ce eh eek ee eee eS 2 24 Tonchi screen cl nien oe s Face han beach eb ee ae ede Pee eee eh bee eae oo 24 Folder Mere ne eae Phebe tee See eae ete hoe et tee eee ease 21 Using the FmX integrated display anaana aaa 28 T rme onthe display 2ca4 ene bedda aeeeeGhe ai eae Bene eee ees 28 Turning of thedisplay are saairi s See be See Ores tae eee eee ee eee 28 HOME SCICC st heb heehee Oe ae ee OS Be ee ee ee eee oo ee E 29 Configuration Screen spr seesi oe eee be Gag eee ye ee oe ee ee Se E one 30 PUMLSCICCO Gna ee oud sb one ee eed ee eee oe Bh EES GS Ce ee ee ee oe ol Zoom and Pan functions s cee eee PEED Eee dekati kba eee eee ue 32 Context sensikive he
183. e LGPL license is included in the appendices of this manual and at ftp ftp trimble com pub open_source FmX This software includes the DejaVu fonts which are licensed under the Bitstream Vera license terms available at http dejavu fonts org wiki index php title License and http www gnome org fonts 2 FmX Integrated Display User Guide GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright c 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case bas
184. e appears on the button you selected 5 Tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 91 4 Display Setup Creating an area feature You can use area features to define areas of land as Productive or Unproductive If the sprayer passes into an area that is defined as unproductive the boom sections turns off This can be useful for setting exclusion zones that you do not want to spray for example waterways 1 Inthe Name field enter the name of the feature 2 Ifthe area feature will be a section of land that can be included in area calculations set the Productive Area button to Yes If it is unproductive land set the button to No 3 To select the feature appearance color tap Color 4 Ifa signal pin is attached to the system set the Remote Output button to Enabled This enables you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you enter or exit this area 5 From the Trigger Warning list select one of the following settings No warning appears Entering Area A warning appears while you are inside the area A warning appears while you are outside the area Note The Remote Output and Trigger Warning settings relate only to this type of area feature They do not apply to any of your other area features You must set the warning for each type of area feature individually 6 Tap OK The new area feature appears in the Area list 7 Select the new feature from the list and then tap OK The new feature appears on the button
185. e constellation changes as you drive in the field The vehicle can steer offline requiring Trim as a result of Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions Note The Nudge buttons become Trim buttons in RTK mode 2 Adjust the distance associated with the End of Row warning Longer vehicles that take longer to turn need an earlier warning and so a greater distance Set the Valve On Speed For vehicles that operate at normal speeds select Normal Additional settings are supported only with NavController II firmware versions 5 10 and later For vehicles operating at very slow speeds select Low or Ultra low Speed thresholds that you can select from the display are e Normal gt 0 4 m s 1 3 ft s e Low gt 0 1 m s 0 3 ft s FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 e Ultra low gt 0 02 m s 0 07 ft s 4 Tap OK Configuring the implement controller Your vehicle make and model were selected when your TrueTracker system was installed If the details in the Implement Controller Settings group are correct skip this step and go to Configuring the implement page 381 Otherwise configure the implement controller as described here Note When you configure the implement make and model the previous calibration settings are lost If you will want to use the current vehicle settings again save them before you proceed Configuring the i
186. e default is 2009 Master password A backup password in case you lose the Administration password If you require the Master password contact your local reseller The password screen appears the first time that you tap a Setup or Calibrate button after you turn on the display Use the virtual keyboard to enter the Administration password and then tap OK Note Passwords are case sensitive Configuring the display 1 Inthe Configuration screen select the System option and then tap Setup 2 Ifnecessary enter the Administrator password See Password access page 73 Ldap be WS In the Display Setup screen you can configure Display preferences e Map settings including Night mode e Status item configuration e Language and units including keyboard layout setup e Default settings FmX Integrated Display User Guide 73 4 Display Setup Mapping preferences e Feature mapping configuration e Data dictionary editor e Data files management this appears at the top of the Display Setup list Display options e External lightbar setup e Guidance setup e Sound settings Hardware configuration e CAN bus settings e Power management setup e Time zone configuration e External keypad These steps are described in more detail in the following sections Data Files The Data Files management screen enables you to manipulate your saved data From either the displays internal memory or the USB memory stick you
187. e ei 394 Main guidance screen a a auaa oe ee Soe Pb ee ae eee ee ee 394 Maplement ICOM ae pee ee he ee Bee RRA ee ee eee ek ees 394 Implement GPS information button 2 2 0 0 ee ee eee 395 Implement status TExDILCMIS 2 42 22555 26 e4 So CRG PESOS ORE EEC E ARGS 395 icaye h4 01201 Ai laD ae a re a rapea a ee ea eee ee ee ee eee ee ee re 396 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin 1 2 annnn 397 Non Trimble variable rate controllers ee ke ae donee ooh ab ee we eee hae eR wD 398 Installing a non Trimble variable rate controller 00 398 Enabling the Serial Rate Control plugin 0 0 0 0 0000048 399 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 13 Contents 15 16 17 18 14 Configuring the spray boom in the FmX integrated display 399 Enabling and configuring the variable rate controller in the FmX integrated display 399 Configuring the variable rate controller 2 0 00 00000048 401 Setting any other features of the variable rate controller 406 Additional information for non Trimble variable rate controllers 407 DICSCODUOUS 44448 keea ee ERD E OR RRR EG eRe oe eae aeRO kee ER Ee 407 The Remote Output Plugin 1 2 eee n nn nnnnnae 409 Connectine remote OCD 4 22d caea eh oe ea bee hac dea gelato Ge e ee eee 410 Configuring the Remote Output plugin 2 2 ee 410 Calibrating the lead time for your impleme
188. e field origin point 80 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Description Impl Vehicle Model The implement profile name Nn 2 D lt n D r 5 A Implement The name of the current implement Implement F B Offset Distance of front to back offset Implement L R Offset Distance of left to right offset Implement Width Width of the implement Latitude The vehicle s current latitude Line Feature Length The length of the current line feature Local Time The current local time Long term XTE A vehicle Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur more than one hour apart Longitude NDVI Nearest Point Name Network ID The vehicle s current longitude Normalized Difference Vegetation Index The name of the nearest point feature The RTK network ID of the GPS receiver s corrections Network Status The current status of the wireless cellular network North The distance that the vehicle is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the vehicle is to the south of the field origin point Nudge The amount of nudge currently applied Nudge Trim Offline Dist Offset X Offset Y P Altitude P Blade Height P Boot Depth The amount of nudge or trim currently applied The distance away from the guidance line The Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark The Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark The current height of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade G
189. e four arrow icons positioned at the edge field area 3 To zoom in and out tap either the plus or minus symbol linked to the magnifying glass Note Tapping the field area of the Run screen when in zoom and pan mode turns the magnifying glass zoom feature on and off The fifth level of zoom in the pan view is a summary view of all your coverage It adjusts depending on the size of the field It does not include grid lines Tip If you close the field create a second field and then show the summary view the summary view may be zoomed to show the area of both fields To avoid this restart the display The view will be correct For more information on using the Run screen see The Run screen layout page 45 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 33 2 Display Overview Context sensitive help The FmX integrated display has context sensitive help screens that provide details and helpful information about the current screen To access the help tap A Help screen similar to the one show below appears To exit the Help screen and return to the previous screen tap OK 34 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Installing the display Mount the FmX integrated display in the vehicle cab in a position that is easily accessible 1 Use the included M6 x 1 screws to firmly screw the mounting plate to the back of the display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 35 2 Display Overvie
190. e is offline Do the following To the left Increase the freeplay offset to the right To the right Increase the freeplay offset to the left Note If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to Auto Low Note The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available To access these options select the EZ Steer plugin Diagnostics from the main Configuration screen 7 Enter the parameters and then tap OK The Z Steer Steering Calibration screen appears 8 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears EZ Steer plugin diagnostics The EZ Steer Diagnostics screen displays the SCM statistics and inertial information 1 From the Configuration screen select the EZ Steer plugin and then tap Diagnostics The EZ Steer Diagnostics screen appears This screen displays the roll and heading of the vehicle and the temperature of the steering control module E Steer Diagnostics Serial Number 4750192113 Speed Connected Temperature Can t engage EZ Steer not calibrated Ginn see Boel wibenng ren FmX Integrated Display User Guide 165 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 2 Tap Steering Perf The Z Steer Steering Performance screen appears This screen is for advanced users who understand how to adjust EZ Steer performance Ifyou are not an advanced user it is recommended that you follow the numbered tabs to adjust the steering parameters See Calibrating and setting the EZ Steer
191. e system change the Override Sensitivity in the EZ Pilot Setup screen The EZ Pilot system automatically disengages when e The vehicle is outside the engage limits configured in the Engage Options screen e The system is paused FmX Integrated Display User Guide 155 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 156 e GPS positions are lost e The Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives low accuracy positions for example no corrections e To manually disengage the system do one of the following Tap the engage button on the main guidance screen or press the engage button on the optional remote control Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor EZ Pilot plugin screen The EZ Pilot tab on the Run screen shows the current nudge increment and online aggressiveness values A HoOVW9000000RI00000000000 e Tap either the lt or gt button to increase or decrease the Nudge Increment setting by the distance set in the Steering Settings setup screen e Tap either the or button to increase or decrease the Online Aggressiveness setting by 5 The default value is set in the Steering Settings setup screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Vehicle specific performance Before you use the EZ Pilot system it is recommended that you consider the following vehicle specific performance suggestions Vehicle type Performance hint
192. e vehicle P Survey Cut Fill The cut fill for the location of the vehicle within a field that has been processed in AutoPlane P Target Height The height the blade will attempt to reach This is the design height the offset When the blade reaches the target height the arrows turn green The difference in the up component from the Local Tangent Plane LTP P VDOP The vertical dilution of precision P Vertical Error Estimate The current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel GPS receiver These status text items can be set to appear permanently at the top of the screen or on a slide out tab The following items can also be viewed from the Run screen FieldLevel GPS status FieldLevel Number of satellites e FieldLevel correction age e To configure the status items see Status items page 77 Reloading a field When you create a design for a field for example a target leveling plane the design is saved in the field directory The design files are associated with the field so if you close the field and then open it again the design reloads with the field With RTK GPS the position of the RTK base station is important to the heights used when the field was previously open If the base station is not accurately positioned in the same physical location you must reestablish the design over an existing benchmark to reestablish the height 222 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Water Managem
193. e window see Run screen view modes page 31 Selecting a swath pattern To obtain guidance with the FmX integrated display you can use e One of the four standard swath pattern types e The FreeForm guidance pattern See Creating guidance with the FreeForm pattern page 56 Use the standard patterns to create different shaped guidance lines on the display Straight Curved guidance a lines ines Guidance Pivot guidance lines li ines enclosed in headlands FmX Integrated Display User Guide 51 3 Getting Started To select a swath pattern 1 Onthe Run screen select the Mapping tab 2 Tap Swaths Description MI scan eS 3 Select the appropriate pattern from the drop down list on the right of the screen 52 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Creating a new line The type of line that you can create depends on the swath pattern that you selected Creating a straight line There are two ways to create a straight line AB Line Define the start and end points A Line Define a point on the line and the heading direction To create a straight AB Line l 2 3 4 5 7 From the Swath Management screen select the straight line field pattern Enter an access path if required See Adding an access path page 59 Tap New Straight The Run screen appears To create the start point of the line tap Set A Drive to the end of the line The end B poi
194. eans deena dae haces 499 VIEW VWWalNIN SCICGh g2 ucannsqei seek aes te ec eh nneeageRened oneness 499 GP oor sCleCNe Gai seach teen reease ee eee tdeecneeeeeugee ana ndaee 500 Se Mh0C ec ee ee a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee 500 Forcing the system to turnoff s oo 2446 secera teuo SEED ES PE OREO ADEE SE EHO RS 501 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Introduction This manual describes how to install configure and use the available plugins for the Trimble FmX integrated display version 5 11 Even if you have used other Global Positioning System GPS products before we recommend that you spend some time reading this manual to learn about the special features of this product If you are not familiar with GPS visit the Trimble website www trimble com for an interactive look at Trimble and GPS About the product The Trimble FmX integrated display which consists of both software and hardware is an easy to use advanced field management system The software runs on a 30 cm 12 touch sensitive color LCD screen The FmX integrated display is the highest level display for agricultural purposes by Trimble The display is compatible with the Autopilot automated steering system For several years the Autopilot system has been the most accurate system for agricultural guidance by Trimble Now with the FmX integrated display that same accuracy can be controlled with a touch screen interface to provide easy p
195. eatures for higher accuracy or better performance e Begin driving See Getting Started Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When the display prompts you to close the field tap Yes FmX Integrated Display User Guide 461 22 Advanced Configuration Configuring remote coverage logging 462 You can configure the FmX integrated display to control coverage mapping by using a switch on the implement instead of the button on the Run screen Installing the logging option To connect an implement switch to the FmX integrated display and configure the display to use the switch to control the logging install a switch on the implement to allow for correct switch activation when the implement is raised or lowered For example a switch similar to the Trimble P N 60477S shown below can be used to activate the coverage logging The switch must make and break the connection on pins 10 and 11 on the FmX port connector For example to use the 6047758 switch 1 Connect pin A of the switch to pin 10 of the 12 pin Deutsch connector on Port A or Port B of the display 2 Connect pin B of the switch to pin 11 of the 12 pin Deutsch connector on Port A or Port B of the display Doing this results in the connection being made between pins 10 and 11 of Port A or B of the display when the implement is raised o
196. ecords additional details about your vehicle which helps the system to steer the vehicle more accurately For high accuracy systems you must have all the settings correct The vehicle calibration screen tools are similar to those in the Autopilot Toolbox II software Notes on calibration e Before you perform vehicle calibration select the vehicle make and model on the Vehicle Setup screen See Selecting the vehicle page 109 e Nocalibration is required if the system is installed on a Cat MT 700 800 series equipped with the ISO option Common calibration items You can calibrate several aspects of the vehicle The calibrations that are available depend on which components are installed in the vehicle and system Four calibration options appear for all types of vehicle Note You must perform the Controller Orientation and the Roll Correction calibrations Description Controller Orientation Correctly associate the outputs of the Autopilot controller sensors with the direction of the vehicle Manual Override Required for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function Change the default only if the operation of the manual override function is unacceptable Roll Antenna Compensates for antenna height and static roll caused by minor Compensation variations in the Autopilot controller and the GPS receiver mounting Line Acquisition How aggressively the vehicle approaches the guidance line For
197. ect Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears Tap Delete Data The Delete Data Storage screen appears Select External USB Drive from the tabs and then select the data to delete Tap either Delete All Events or select the data to delete 2 oF eS W N When prompted tap Yes The data in the internal memory is deleted FmX Integrated Display User Guide 487 23 Data Management Data dictionaries 488 The FmX integrated display can load data dictionaries in the AgGPS 170 Field Computer format These data dictionaries enable you to select field entry data for example Client Farm Field and Event from a list of predefined values which saves you from having to re enter commonly used items You can create a data dictionary either through the display or the Farm Works software For more information on editing data dictionary entries on the FmX integrated display see Data Dictionary page 95 To create a data dictionary on an office computer 1 Onan office computer create a text file The text file can have any name but the file extension must be txt 2 Enter the body text 3 Copy the txt file to the AgGPS Data Dictionary folder on the displays USB memory stick On screen for example in the Client screen the file entries appear as shown below client J smith Field Field 1 Hogan Section Event Feature mapping ee Fertilization strip ti 1 Plant pera
198. ect Implement from the list on the left of the screen and then tap Copy The implements from the FieldManager display now appear in the Implement Configuration screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 183 7 Implement Configuration Adjusting the implement settings The implement setup screens contains five sections Section Definition Implement Type Describes the primary task for the current implement Measurements The basic information required for guidance using the EZ Steer system or the Autopilot system Geometry More detailed implement dimensions required for better implement modeling both with and without a GPS receiver on the implement Values required to apply or avoid overlap Extras Provides access to the Hybrid Setup options and remote log switch configuration Implement Type Implement Setup 1 Inthe Implement Type tab select the current task from the drop down list 2 To change the implement layout tap Edit and then select the layout type that matches your implement 184 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Implement Configuration 7 Measurements Implement Setup implement Type Measurements Geometry Overlap switcnes Swath Width 40 0 0 A APC rton Width Application Oftsaet Pao LetyRight Offset Note The screen is scaled to the swath or application width whichever is larger If any offset is greater than this the tractor image may pass the edge of the screen N
199. ed display The Microsoft Excel spreadsheet software and most database software also let you open and view the data in the attribute dbf file Generating files in the office The FmX integrated display can load files that you created in office software Save Shapefile or Agfile gdx prescriptions to the AgGPS Prescriptions folder on the card to send rates to a variable rate controller FmX Integrated Display User Guide 471 23 Data Management Folders on the USB memory stick This list shows e The names and types of files containing mapping and logging information e The folder where the FmX integrated display saves these files on the USB memory stick ate Description les We Field AB Line Boundary and or AB Swaths shp Lines polylines Swaths dbf Field For more information see Field Swaths shx folder page 475 Field boundary Polygon Boundary shp Boundary dbf Boundary shx Event history Event information EventHistory dbf Point features Attribute ID and PointFeature shp latitude longitude PointFeature dbf and height PointFeature shx Line features Line with attribute ID LineFeature shp LineFeature dbf LineFeature shx Area features Area polygons with AreaFeature shp attribute ID AreaFeature dbf AreaFeature shx Coverage Series of polygons Coverage shp Event Coverage dbf For more information see Event a Coverage shx folder page 477 Track Series of 3D points Track3D_ lt date ti
200. ed on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that th
201. ed the forward direction 3 Configuring the roll offset correction Use one of the following methods to calculate the roll offset and then enter the roll offset correction to compensate for it Tire track offset method e Flag offset method Choose the method which best matches the conditions Calculating the roll offset Tire track offset method Tip Use a highly repeatable GPS correction mode for roll correction For best results use a RTK mode or OmniSTAR HP signal that has been converged for at least twenty minutes If you do a roll calibration with less accurate GPS correction modes repeat the measurements at least four times to ensure a more consistent result 1 Remove any implement from the vehicle 2 Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m 1320 ft in length 3 Reset the roll offset value to 0 zero 4 Create an AB Line 5 Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field To do this start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created When the system is stable engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot system to complete the pass 6 At the end of the pass turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction 7 Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass 8 Inthe middle of the return pass stop the tractor and confirm that the current
202. ee eee 482 Importing AB Lines or boundaries aces 4 lt 6s5 44 9655 Ch ORG SeEDRE HEEL ETHER 482 Te Piece uOns Tolder 2 aaa cuanenuee die dere eeea su a kee ees 484 Copying OF deleting data Giles sses aesaad kt eae ged Gee GE eee ee See bees 485 Accessing data files from the Home screen 2 0000 eee eee eee 485 Accessing the data files through the Configuration screen 485 CODING Cal 2 as ce eeeeesweeaed MEAS eee See dee ee eee es chee eee es 486 WCU MO Udld 2 once ee ee ee ee eet ay ee eee ee eee base eee Shee s aa ee ee 486 Weta eO 6 008526 eee eee wee Ok eee be ok ea ee ee 488 Troubleshooting 1 annann 491 Advanced WIAGNOSWCsts 4 kag bad as Gan SORES PASS Se REE EE SESE Se eH oe on oes 492 Viewing Taw SMa Gala 3 409 984 0 9 oe bee eee eG eh hee pee eed ees 493 Restore Gc louie setings sec cue ears be eee eeee eee sea ee ee ee eee esas ee 494 Viewing FmX integrated display diagnostic information 0000 eee eee 495 Display configuration information 65 4444 2d he hee ae eee bbws hoes ORS 495 USB memory stick information lt 6 eee a4 ee hee we oH EH SORES RHE ES OS 495 Viewing vehicle diagnostic information 0 0 0 2 ee ee 495 Vehicle Diagnostics Guidance screen 2 0 eee ee 496 Vehicle Diagnostics Steering screen anaa ee ee 497 Vehicle Diagnostics Details screen 5 0 i0asis 4a age Ree RES OR Rew eS 498 Autopilot Faults Screen e s i ea eee ea eee eae ee ease d
203. een In the field the easiest way to interact with the system is to tap the touch sensitive screen with your finger A N CAUTION Do not press on the screen with a sharp item such as a pencil you may damage the surface of the screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 21 2 Display Overview Rear view Primary GPS connector Secondary GPS connector RTK antenna connector CAN communication sockets A B oO Power connection socket 8 Serial communication sockets C D Power button To turn the display on or off press and hold the power button for approximately 0 5 seconds Brightness controls To increase or decrease the brightness of the FmX integrated display press the corresponding button 22 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 USB socket You can connect a USB memory stick to the display to transfer data to and from the unit Power connection socket Connects the power cable P N 66694 to the display Primary secondary GPS connector Connects the GPS cable P N 50449 to the display RTK connector Connects the RTK cable P N 62120 to the display Serial CAN sockets Connects external devices to the display For example you can use these sockets to attach devices like AgCam cameras System software The FmX integrated display includes the following features e Field definition and mapping e Feature mapping e Guidance to predefined field patterns e Logging of co
204. eering wheel is turned The system uses the steering delay setting to compensate for this slowness and ensure that steering corrections occur at the correct point To improve the performance of your swather adjust the Swather steering delay setting by a small amount 0 1 seconds at a time Test the result between each adjustment After using the EZ Pilot system After you finish using the EZ Pilot system do the following e Before you leave the vehicle turn off the power to the display to turn off the EZ Pilot system e For road travel the red EZ Pilot override button must be in the off down position FmX Integrated Display User Guide 157 5 Vehicle Guidance Options EZ Steer assisted steering system guidance The EZ Steer assisted steering system works with the FmX integrated display s internal GPS receiver to provide vehicle guidance Installing the EZ Steer controller For information on installing the EZ Steer controller in your vehicle refer to the EZ Steer Assisted Steering System Getting Started Guide and the EZ Steer Assisted Steering System Installation Instructions Connecting the EZ Steer system FmX integrated display EZ Steer Antenna cable 50449 FmX basic power cable 67258 FmX power cable 66694 FMX power bus 67259 FmX to EZ Steer cable 75742 Oo EZ Steer motor cable 62257 1 Use the FmX to EZ Steer cable to connect the EZ Steer system to the display Note
205. egrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 457 21 The LB25 External Lightbar Configuring the lightbar 458 1 2 3 4 5 Connect the LB25 lightbar to port B on the rear of the FmX integrated display From the Home screen tap x In the Current Configurations screen tap Configure Select the System option and then tap Setup From the Display Setup screen select Lightbar and then tap Setup In the Light Bars Configuration screen the virtual lightbar from the FmX integrated display is shown along with any detected external lightbars Light Bars Configuration a ee saj iwe lightbar s found FmX Integrated Display User Guide The LB25 External Lightbar 21 6 Select an external lightbar and then tap Setup 7 Enter the required settings and then tap OK The Light Bars Configuration screen appears 8 Tap OK The external lightbar is now configured FmX Integrated Display User Guide 459 21 The LB25 External Lightbar 460 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Advanced Configuration In this chapter Configuring remote coverage logging m Changing the password m Saving the vehicle configuration m Saving a PDF version of the current field Upgrading the FmX integrated display firmware Upgrading the Field IQ system firmware Unlocking additional devices Once you complete the basic configuration you can e Use this chapter to configure more advanced f
206. egrated display to project the position of the vehicle into the future The direction and speed of the vehicle are combined with the lead time to project a future position The target rate at this projected position is sent to the variable rate controller giving the controller time to reach the required rate at approximately the same time that the vehicle arrives at the projected position You must choose an appropriate lead time This depends on the controller type and configuration the type of materials being applied and the nature and specifications of the delivery equipment Last default or zero rate When the vehicle moves outside the area covered by the prescription file no target rate is available There are three options for controlling the output rate e Continue to use the last rate being output when the vehicle moves off the prescription e Usea default rate e Usea zero rate Specify the required option in the Select Prescription screen e Prescriptions can now be selected even when the vehicle is a great distance away from the field enabling operators or managers to load a prescription before driving to the field elect Prescription aa eie j Fi 70 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup In this chapter m Accessing the system configuration settings m Configuring the display CHAPTER This chapter describes how to configure the basic settings and appearance the display Note Some co
207. ehicle steering e The second tap disengages automated steering Two stage press The Engage button requires two taps to engage e The first tap engages implement steering e The second tap engages the vehicle steering e The third tap disengages automated steering To configure how the Engage button works see Configuring the implement controller page 379 396 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Serial Rate Control Plugin In this chapter The FmX integrated display can be connected to third party variable rate controllers by a range of E Non Trimble variable rate manufacturers controllers This chapter describes how to configure the m Additional information for non display for use with these rate controllers Trimble variable rate controllers Note You can install only one variable rate control plug at a time FmX Integrated Display User Guide 397 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin Non Trimble variable rate controllers 398 The FmX integrated display supports the following non Trimble variable rate controllers Make Model Sage The FmX integrated display can send control signals to vary only one channel at a time Note Before you can make any changes you must close all fields To use a non Trimble variable rate controller to operate a spray boom do the following 1 Install the non Trimble variable rate controller See page page 398 2 Enable the Serial Rate Control plugin See page page
208. eiver page 218 Step 1 Configuring the implement If you have not already configured the implement see Configuring the implement for leveling drainage page 202 Step 2 Configuring the leveling model Install the FieldLevel II plugin for more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 192 1 From the Configuration screen select the FieldLevel II plugin and then tap Setup FmX Integrated Display User Guide 213 9 Water Management 2 Select the leveling model from the drop down list Point and Slope Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage From the starting point the vehicle levels at a constant slope regardless of its direction See Slope adjust for Point and Slope leveling page 214 Flat Plane laser Levels the field to a design plane The plane can be configured in the onboard software using benchmarks and slopes or by creating a plane of best fit over a surveyed surface Autoslope It uses a high accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement However the design heights are corrected to a plane surface to match your old laser leveled fields See Configuring settings for all leveling models page 215 Flat Plane GPS Levels the field to a design plane The plane can be configured in the software using benchmarks and slopes or by creating a plane of best fit over a surveyed surface Autoslope It uses a high accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement See Configuring s
209. elect the appropriate firmware file Once the upgrade is complete tap OK The system restarts The components firmware is updated FmX Integrated Display User Guide 467 22 Advanced Configuration Unlocking additional devices You can purchase enhanced features for the FmX integrated display from your local Trimble reseller To enable the additional features do the following 1 Turn on the FmX integrated display The Home screen appears 2 Tap Unlocks Advanced Functionality Access True Tracker 3 Tap the button for the feature that you want to unlock The Enter Password to Activate screen appears 4 Enter the password and then tap OK The feature is enabled The password is saved to the memory for future use 468 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Data Management In this chapter This chapter describes the files and folders on the FmX integrated display USB memory stick m Transferring data to an office computer Data formats Folders on the USB memory stick Files on the USB memory stick Importing AB Lines or boundaries Data dictionaries FmX Integrated Display User Guide 469 23 Data Management Transferring data to an office computer All field data collected by the FmX integrated display is saved onto the USB memory stick To transfer data to an office computer 1 Remove the USB memory stick from the FmX integrated display 2 Insert the USB memory stick into your office
210. ement In this chapter The FmX integrated display has four Water Management plugins e WM Survey e FieldLevel II e Tandem Dual e WM Drain m WHM Survey plugin m FieldLevel II plugin m WN Drain plugin This chapter describes the function of each plugin followed by a detailed description of how to configure and use the Water Management plugins to create and manipulate field surveys FmX Integrated Display User Guide 197 9 Water Management WM Survey plugin 198 Traditionally farmers level their fields or install tile for uniform drainage The consistent water flow over the crops improves crop yields and crop consistency which improves profits Description The Water Management system is designed in three parts e The WM Survey plugin enables you to use a high accuracy GPS receiver on the water management implement to create a topographic survey of the layout of your field The three dimensional data shows the surface topography of the land Note If you are working in a field that has already been leveled you may not need to perform a survey and you can go straight to leveling with the FieldLevel II system or installing tile using the WM Drain plugin Once you complete the survey you can use it to design the optimum drainage slope that can be graded with minimal dirt movement e After you create a survey of the field and a design for how to modify it you can use the FieldLevel II plugin to control a land leveling
211. en the Application Offset and the rear row Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Field IQ Setup Material Layout Section Canbral aoe Section Control Module z Location setup Set Sy i er Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 261 332 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 en Section Control Module Setup Tap Setup to configure the section control module s their location on the implement and the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control modules you will use Module Select the module number that corresponds to each section Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control Section Grouping Assign the rows that are in each section Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each section
212. enSeeker applicator can be utilized to apply nitrogen N across a field a nitrogen rich reference strip NRS or calibration area must be established prior to or shortly after planting This reference strip is used to determine the amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment mineralization etc and importantly this years expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen The ideal NRS would run the length of the field but it should at least be 400 feet long Establishing a calibration reference area Establish the NRS in a representative reference portion of the field i e not in high spot or low spot The rate of N necessary to establish a NRS is crop and region dependent and should be equivalent to the highest rate necessary to satisfy crop needs throughout the growing season The rest of the field is referred to as the Non Reference Non Ref portion It may also be referred to as the N limited area or farmer practice region For best results the RT200 should be used to read the NRS and apply N at growth stages dependent upon the crop algorithm used For most supplied algorithms this is typically e Wheat Feekes growth stage 4 6 e Corn V8 V12 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 349 11 350 The GreenSeeker Plugin For updated specific algorithm instructions see www GreenSeeker com In order for the sensors to accurately determine NDVI for topdressing or sidedressing
213. ent 9 Re establishing a benchmark If you open a field that has an existing master benchmark a large green circle is shown for 100 m 300 ft around the master benchmark flag This indicates that you need to rebench over the master benchmark location to ensure that the design is aligned with the previous position You must be within this circle before you are allowed to re establish the master benchmark To ensure that the design is properly aligned 1 Return exactly to the master benchmark location that you marked on the ground for example with flags see Benchmarks page 202 regardless of where your current on screen position appears to be 2 Re establish the benchmark This process is designed to accommodate RTK base station setup differences from the last time the field was open Importing control files from the Multiplane software Once you finish manipulating a topographic survey file in i agcrs MultiPlane you can export a control file GPS for use with AB Lines the FieldLevel II system Copy the design control file into a Autopilot the AgGPS Designs folder on a USB memory stick n G Data Dictionary Ifthe USB memory stick has not yet been used with the FmX integrated display the AgGPS Designs folder will not A exist To create the directory on the USB memory stick Lad 1 Insert the USB memory stick into the back of the FmX integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 223
214. ere is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library
215. erns The stand alone Autopilot automated steering system has no way to detect or correct for implement draft FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 In these conditions the draft distance can be significant enough to lose repeatability for successive field operations despite the 25 mm 1 inch accuracy of the tractor equipped with the Autopilot system Benefits of the TrueTracker system The TrueTracker implement steering system is an optional upgrade for the Autopilot system You must unlock and install the second FmX integrated display s internal receiver on the implement Using the Trimble T3 inertial terrain compensation technology and the accuracy of the receiver the TrueTracker system can steer the implement ensuring it remains online behind the vehicle even on extremely sloped ground The TrueTracker system supports the following Steering in reverse Straight and curved guidance patterns Independent implement offset Independent aggressiveness control for the implement Zero steering to center the coulters Requirements of the TrueTracker system An Autopilot system with the FmX integrated display An unlock code for the FmX integrated display implement steering functionality Installing the TrueTracker system The TrueTracker system requires professional installation For more information contact your local Trimble reseller Configuration To configure the TrueTracker system complete
216. ertical location See screenshot below table Pipe Type Select the type of pipe you will install Select the pipe size you will install Raise the tile boot or blade by the Blade Step amount Lower the tile boot or blade by the Blade Step amount Recalculate from here When the tile plow encounters a rock pull the boot up over the rock then press Recalculate From Here This will modify the design to ensure that the rest of the tile run stays within the minimum slope requirement preventing the pipe from diving down to the original design grade Note This feature works only when installing tile in the direction away from the outlet point Coarse When selected pressing the Up or Down arrows will move the blade by the Coarse Blade Step amount This enables the operator to move the blade by a large amount instead of small increments Auto Set Automatics to the hydraulic valve The blade or tile boot will be driven to the design depth depending on where you are relative to the section line Logging Log the coverage so that you can see on your map where you have been dependent on your Implement Width A shape file will also be created with cut fill and height information FmX Integrated Display User Guide 253 9 Water Management Driving in Point and Slope mode When you drive in Point and Slope mode the WM Drain tab appears as follows Survey Go to the Survey Work pane where you can survey the section line you will design Des
217. es setting LED spacing Virtual lightbar 3 cm per The distance represented by each LED on the and EZ Guide LED 1 per lightbar Plus lightbar LED Display Mode Virtual lightbar show error How the LEDs respond to offline distances When and EZ Guide _ chase mode Show error is selected the display shows the Plus lightbar direction that you need to move in When Show correction is selected the display shows your current distance offline To set the look ahead time or the LED spacing 1 Tap the appropriate number field 2 Inthe dialog that appears enter the required values To set the display mode 1 From the Display Mode drop down list select the required option 2 Enter the virtual lightbar settings and then tap OK The Lightbars Configuration screen appears 3 Tap OK The virtual lightbar is now configured EZ Remote joystick For more information on installing and configuring the EZ Remote joystick see Chapter 20 The EZ Remote Joystick Guidance Selecting Guidance enables you to configure advanced guidance settings If you are setting up the system for the first time you should not need to adjust these settings FmX Integrated Display User Guide 97 4 Display Setup Enabling the Limit Field Selection filter From the Display Setup screen select Guidance and then tap Setup Guidance Setup To review the settings or if you have any guidance lines originally generated with an A
218. es Ifyou are using the optional Field IQ individual section switch box this screen indicates which switches have been assigned to each section To test this flip each switch in the section switch box The section it is assigned to appears gray View Error Log Shows all the errors that have occurred since the error log was cleared Section Test The system begins a sequence of engaging each section and groups of sections 342 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 4 The Field IQ Plugin 10 Operate the sprayer and check the value shown for the Applied Rate If necessary adjust the Aggressiveness setting to achieve the desired rate Operations Hardware Sengor MOTE FRO ALI Tank Level 423 43 gal Refi Tank Rate Switch Mode Rate 2 w T Current Fiow 0 00 galimin Control Speed 5 0 mph Master Switch Of Dpermiors Hardware Serial number Position on the implement Firmware version Status of CAN connection Tx Rx number of packets FmX Integrated Display User Guide 343 10 The Field IQ Plugin 344 Fm lt xX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The GreenSeeker Plugin In this chapter This chapter describes how to configure and operate the GreenSeeker RT200 variable rate and mapping system plugin on the FmX integrated m GreenSeeker primary display components Introduction m Care and maintenance Field preparations for Nitrogen application m Operating the GreenSeeker Plugin m
219. et Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that is entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the rear row Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Field 1Q Setup Rate Control Sensors Section Contral Om pa Section Contral Module Location ai Section Contral Setup de ee ee rr Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 261 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 297 10 The Field IQ Plugin een a Section Control Module Setup Tap Setup to configure the section
220. ete an implement that you no longer require 1 From the Configuration Selection screen tap Implement Switch 2 From the Implement Configuration screen select the appropriate implement from the list 3 Tap Delete 4 When prompted tap Yes to confirm the deletion 188 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Overview of Plugins In this chapter Introduction to plugins Adding or removing a plugin Configuring a plugin Entering the password to activate a plugin This chapter explains the FmX integrated display plugin and how to configure plugins Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When prompted to close the field tap Yes FmX Integrated Display User Guide 189 8 Overview of Plugins Introduction to plugins The FmX integrated display has a number of plugins that you can install to expand its functionality Most of these plugins require additional hardware to work correctly Rem status Description Seem Ag3000 modem Optional Enable the Ag3000 GSM GPRS cellular modem to Chapter 19 VRS receive RTK type corrections using VRS infrastructure Plugin for DCM 300 network technology and Ag3000 Modems EZ Remote joystick Optional Control a variety of display functions remotely Chapter 20 The EZ Remote Joystick LB25 external Optional Monitor your line with a second or third
221. etting if the vehicle drives consistently to the left of the line Motor Speed Set the maximum rate at which the SAM 200 will operate FmX Integrated Display User Guide 147 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Seon Deseriptiom o Online Aggr How aggressively the EZ Pilot system corrects deviations from the current guidance line e Avery high setting will correct deviations quickly but the vehicle may steer erratically e Avery low setting will allow a smoother drive down the swath but the vehicle may go further offline before the deviation is corrected Approach Aggr How quickly the EZ Pilot system steers the vehicle onto the current guidance line e Avery high setting steers the vehicle quickly but the steering correction may be too severe e Avery low setting steers the vehicle very slowly but the vehicle may overshoot and travel too far down the swath before reaching the guidance line Advanced tab Note For more information on how to use the features in the Advanced tab contact your local reseller Calibrating and configuring the EZ Pilot system The calibration configures the T3 roll calibration and the EZ Pilot system Angle per Turn Aggressiveness and Freeplay settings Before you calibrate the vehicle do the following e Ensure that the vehicles hydraulic oil is up to operating temperature Refer to the vehicle documentation e Ensure that the tire pressure is correct e Perform initial calibration wit
222. ettings for all leveling models page 215 Multiplane design Uses more complex surface designs imported from the MultiPlane design software See Working with MultiPlane designs page 224 Contour Uses the FmX integrated display virtual lightbar or an LB25 external lightbar to guide the vehicle along contours to keep the vehicle at the same elevation This can be used for levee marking and applications that require guidance to elevations See Configuring settings for all leveling models page 215 The FieldLevel II plugin Setup screen has five tabs Settings Blade Settings Relative Heights Valve Setup and Height filter The Settings tab is the same for all leveling models except for Point and Slope which includes an extra field for Slope Adjust The other four tabs are the same regardless of which leveling model you choose and are described in the following sections Slope adjust for Point and Slope leveling When you select Point and Slope leveling the Slope Adjust setting appears in the first settings tab of the FieldLevel II Setup screen Description Slope Adjust The Slope Adjust field controls the amount that the gradient changes each time you tap the up arrowe or the down arrow on the Level tab For example if the leveling gradient is set to 3 and the S ope Adjust field is set to 2 when you tap the down arrow gt on the Level tab the leveling gradient increases to 5 214 FmxX Integrated Dis
223. evices 0 error 105 2 Tap Advanced Diagnostics Lewel swath Control Powte 492 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24 3 Select the diagnostics level This determines how much debugging information is logged in the program files 1 Minimal level of information 6 default Medium level of information i Highest level of information 4 Select whether or not to show swath control points When the guidance line is a curve it appears on screen as a series of short straight sections joined together The Swath Control Points appear where these line segments meet Description Hidden default Normal guidance lines Guidance lines show the control points You can also use the System Diagnostics screen to view raw port data For more information see Viewing raw serial data page 493 Viewing raw serial data You can view raw serial data as the display receives it This can be useful for analyzing the GPS signal To view the raw serial data 1 From the Configuration screen select the System option and then tap Diagnostics System Diagnostics Serial Port System information Advanced Settings Power Levels CAN Devices 0 error 105 This screen shows each of the connectors ports on the FmX harness and the number of data packets that have been sent and received FmX Integrated Display User Guide 493 24 Troubleshooting 2 To view the raw
224. ew client See Creating a client page 42 Select an existing client from the Client drop down list The Farm list now contains only the farms associated with that client Select the appropriate farm or create a new one Select the appropriate field or create a new one Select the appropriate event or create a new one Oo pr Je To add more information for record keeping tap Event Attributes The Event Attributes screen appears See Adding record keeping information page 42 8 To add and edit information on the variety of products that can be distributed from the implement tap Hybrid Setup See Logging varieties page 65 9 Tap OK to enter the Run screen Once you create the field select a swath pattern to use while you drive the field See Selecting a swath pattern page 51 Creating a client 1 Tap New beside the Client list and then use the virtual keyboard to enter a client name 2 Repeat this process to create a farm field and event and record keeping Event Attributes if required Note You can also enter Client Farm Field and Event information using the Data Dictionary Data Dictionary page 95 Additional settings Limit Field Selection Filter When opening existing fields the FmX integrated display can limit the number of fields displayed based on a pre defined distance from the current GPS position For more information on configuring the filter see Enabling the Limit Field Selection filter page 98
225. f s e e 8 gt 0 2 5 1 57 mp N 4 To create a save file for your work select On from the Save Summaries drop down list FmX Integrated Display User Guide 75 4 Display Setup Track Logging tab The Track Logging tab includes options to record the vehicle track at either a set time or a set distance Points along the track are logged at the greater of the two values logging time or logging distance To always log a point based on either of the two values set the other value to zero Setting both values to zero disables Track Logging Description Distance 0 Time 0 Track logging is turned off Distance 1 Time 0 Track logging is recorded by distance m Distance 0 Time gt 1 Track logging is recorded by time s Distance gt 1 Time gt 1 Track logging is recorded by whichever setting is higher Track logging files Track logging files are created whenever you open an event The track file records points at the rate defined in the Mapping screen see the previous section At each point a number of attributes are recorded The data stored in the track logging file Track3D_ lt date time gt dbf is in metric units The information stored for each point in the track logging file is as follows Column Field description Version irek attribute fe vesion OOOO Eoo Stats Tet fesson O Moms nomero O OOP O aittyotpsion beses on sarete geome quality of positions based on sa
226. f green yellow and red These shades reflect how far off target the rows ar applying Green Rows are applying on target Red Rows are applying off target Black Rows have been manually turned off Depending on the material the following buttons appear Bin Tap to go to the Virtual Bin Tank Setup screen where you can adjust the bin settings Seed Disc Tap to fill the seed disk Arm Pump Tap to enable Field IQ to control the pump White Rows have been turned off automatically by the system Tap the arrows to view more row numbers General setup information Do the following prior to setting up the Field IQ system for planting spraying and so on Before starting the Field IQ plugin setup on the FmX integrated display ensure that e all components of the system are installed on the vehicle and implement e the Field IQ plugin has been added to the FmX integrated display configuration See Adding or removing a plugin page 192 e the implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation such as planting or spraying See Chapter 7 Implement Configuration The Field 1Q Setup Wizard The FmX integrated display contains a Field IQ Setup Wizard that steps you through setting up the Field IQ system You must enter accurate values on each screen of the wizard to ensure that the system operates correctly To navigate the wizard e Tap Next to proceed to the next screen e Tap Back to return to the previous
227. f the data from the internal memory CAUTION Deleting data is permanent You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data 1 From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup If necessary enter the administration password and then tap OK Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears Tap Delete Data The Delete Data Storage screen appears Tap Delete All Events or Delete Everything oS p amp P When prompted tap Yes The data in the internal memory is deleted Deleting selected data from the USB memory stick CAUTION Deleting data is permanent You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data 1 From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup If necessary enter the administration password and then tap OK Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears Tap Delete Data The Delete Data Storage screen appears Select External USB Drive from the tabs and then select Field Data Select the item to delete from the Client Farm Field or Event list and then tap Delete To oe SE SY P When prompted tap Yes The data in the internal memory is deleted Deleting all of the data from the USB memory stick CAUTION Deleting data is permanent You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data 1 From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup If necessary enter the administration password and then tap OK Sel
228. f up and down buttons These buttons provide independent control of the implement offset ed ea a an oo eee O Ol oO Primary front or left side implement height control Secondary rear or right side implement height control e Fora tandem configuration the left up and down buttons offset the height of the primary front implement the right buttons offset the height of the secondary rear implement e For a dual configuration the left buttons offset the height of the primary left side of the implement the right buttons offset the height of the secondary right side of the implement 240 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 WM Drain plugin The WM Drain farm drainage solution is a concept to completion toolset that streamlines the survey analysis design installation and mapping steps of surface and subsurface drainage The WM Drain farm drainage solution is a concept to completion toolset that streamlines the survey analysis design installation and mapping steps of surface and subsurface drainage Configuring the WM Drain plugin Note Before you can configure the system it must be professionally installed For more information contact your local reseller There are 3 steps to complete e Step 1 Configuring the implement e Step 2 Configuring the WM Drain settings e Step 3 Configuring the receiver Step 1 Configuring the implement If you have not already configured
229. face module and the rate controller if required The RT200 interface module s green Power LED will blink three times accompanied by three beeps when the unit is first turned on Following this the Status LED will blink in time with each transmission of sensor data over the CAN bus Expect to see a brief green flash followed by a red flash at the I M message rate typically at 0 5sec this indicates that data from the left green flash and right red flash CAN ports is being transmitted 2 Install the GreenSeeker plugin For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 192 3 From the Home screen load the field to be sprayed FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 GreenSeeker plugin screen The control items in the GreenSeeker tab on the Run screen depend on what you previously selected for example a crop algorithm or a custom table The Calibration Required message appears when a new job event is first opened and a crop algorithm has been previously used or selected Note If you want to use a custom table but see this screen tap Edit and then follow the custom table instructions found in the FmX Integrated Display User Guide If a custom table has been previously selected the Calibration Required message will not display l 2 From the Run screen select the GreenSeeker plugin tab Calibration Required Tap Calibrate 00 0 60 Calibrating 0 00 The GreenSeeker pl
230. figured interfaced maintained stored and operated in accordance with Trimble s relevant operator s manual and specifications and b the Products and Software are not modified or misused The preceding warranties shall not apply to and Trimble shall not be responsible for defects or performance problems resulting from i the combination or utilization of the Product or Software with hardware or software products information data systems interfaces or devices not made supplied or specified by Trimble ii the operation of the Product or Software under any specification other than or in addition to Trimble s standard specifications for its products iii the unauthorized installation modification or use of the Product or Software iv damage caused by accident lightning or other electrical discharge fresh or salt water immersion or spray outside of Product specifications or v normal wear and tear on consumable parts e g batteries Trimble does not warrant or guarantee the results obtained through the use of the Product or that software components will operate error free THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE S ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES RELATING TO THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN THE PRODUCTS SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE NAVIGATION LIMITED OR AN
231. for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that y
232. fying the problem If the specified controller type has a configurable baud rate the error message includes details of the baud rate that the FmX integrated display requires the controller to use e The Applied rate disappears from the Run screen e Variable rate logging is suspended while the controller is disconnected Raven To use a Raven controller with an FmX integrated display the controller must e be GPS ready e use Ravens latest communications protocol which was introduced in 1996 If your controller is not GPS ready or does not use the latest protocol contact Raven for an upgrade pack To use a Raven controller you need a special adaptor cable Trimble P N 69729 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 which is connected to port A or B on the display Configuring the controller For a Raven controller to operate correctly with an FmX integrated display the following Data Menu settings are required e BAUD 9600 e GPS Inac e DLOG ON e TRIG 1 e UNIT Sec Some Raven controllers may forget settings if power is disconnected You must then reconfigure the controller Application width When the FmX integrated display is connected to a Raven controller the total boom section width must be set to match the Application Width setting in the Implement Boom Setup screen A N CAUTION The first boom section width set on the Raven controller must be greater than 0 If you set it to 0 the display will not
233. g The heading direction of the slope when the two slopes are combined The icon beside each slope option shows the direction of the slope East gt West Slope Because this is a negative slope it drops from East to West The Stats table at the top left of the screen shows field information taal A ee ed The volume of dirt that must be cut for the current design The volume of dirt that must be added for the current design Note If the Cut and Fill values are the same you will only be moving dirt The volumes will balance out The system includes the Cut Fill Ratio when configuring these amounts The area of the field inside the boundary FmX Integrated Display User Guide 209 9 Water Management The image of the field on the left of the screen can show one of two things e When the Height button is selected the image shows the topographical height of the field y e When the Cut Fill button is selected the image shows where dirt needs to be removed and where it needs to be added Areas that require dirt to be cut are shaded red Areas that require dirt to be filled are shaded blue Neutral areas that do not need adjusting are shaded green Creating a design To create a design for the optimum slope for your field that requires the minimum amount of dirt to be moved 1 Enter the Cut Fill Ratio 210 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 2 Inthe Section list do o
234. g system installed on the tractor For instructions on how to install the Autopilot system see the Autopilot Automated Steering System Installation Instructions relevant to your vehicle e Stable implements Implements that are unstable such as sprayers with large flotation tires will cause rocking in the antenna that will be greater than the performance improvements on the ground e Both the Autopilot option and the TrueGuide plugin activated on the FmX integrated display For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 192 TrueGuide implement setup Before using the FmX integrated display with the TrueGuide system plugin select and configure a new or existing implement For more information see Chapter 7 Implement Configuration Note You can update existing saved implements with implement geometry to support TrueGuide implement guidance Note Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point of the implement These offsets should be minimized whenever possible Settings on the Geometry tab are required for implement modelling When configuring an implement for the TrueGuide system the following antenna offsets are required Description Hitch to ground contact Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the point implement rotates around Antenna front back Measured from the implement working point to the center of the GPS antenna if moun
235. gGPS 170 Field Computer or an FieldManager display see Advanced diagnostics page 492 Sounds 1 From the Display Setup screen select Sounds and then tap Setup i L T Cee cee There are two ways that the display can produce sounds FmxX through an optional external speaker Sonalert through an optional Sonalert alarm 2 To enable a sound select the required option from the drop down list and then tap OK 98 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 CAN bus settings Note These settings are very advanced use them only under the direct advice of Trimble Technical Support The FmX integrated display features advanced power management features to dim the backlight or turn off the display after a pre set period of inactivity 1 From the Display Setup screen select CAN Bus Settings and then tap Setup 2 Ifthe either the A or B CAN buses do not have a physical terminator enable the CAN Termination option for that bus 3 To control the strength of the edges on the CAN bus enable the CAN Driver Strength setting It is recommended that you set the CAN driver Strength to Full FmX Integrated Display User Guide 99 4 Display Setup 100 Power management The FmX integrated display features advanced power management features to dim the backlight or turn off the display after a pre set period of inactivity 1 From the Display Setup screen select Power Management and then tap Setup
236. garding GDD regional values go to http www ntechindustries com software and browse to the Where to Find GDD Information link Field setup To prepare a reference area do the following 1 Ifpast practice was a 100 pre plant application of N decrease pre plant N application rate of the field to a level at least half of previous total N applied during non GreenSeeker management practice For spring or winter wheat if application rate has historically been 100 lbs N acre decrease the rate to 50 lbs N acre For corn if application rates have historically been 200 lbs N acre decrease to 75 to 125 Ibs N acre For corn or wheat be aware that a sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non limiting reference area FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 2 Prior to or shortly after planting establish the NRS Nitrogen Rich Strip in a representative portion of the field i e not in a historically high spot or low spot and then apply an applicators width swath of N The rate of N applied should be high enough to satisfy crop N needs in a good year For spring or winter wheat the N rate should be at least 100 lbs N acre For corn the N rate should be at least 200lbs N acre Keep in mind that a sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non limiting reference area 3 Make certain to use a permanen
237. gger marks will be applied on the ground From the Configuration screen tap Implement Setup and then enter this value as the F B Offset distance on the Implement Boom Setup screen Calibrating the front back offset l 2 3 Create a straight AB Line In the Remote Output plugin set the Lead Time to 0 Drive as slowly as possible down the AB Line from point A to point B marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers At the end of the line turn the vehicle around Drive back down the line from point B to point A marking another set of trigger points Measure the distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second run Divide the distance by two Adjust your Front Back Offset value by this amount Ifthe return points are nearer where you originally started than the first set of points increase the F B offset Ifthe return points are further from where you originally started than the first set of points lower the F B offset Setting the lead time l Drive at your intended application speed down the AB Line from point A to point B marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers Ensure that your speed remains constant At the end of the line turn the vehicle around Drive back down the line from point B to point A marking the trigger points FmX Integrated Display User Guide 413 15 The Remote Output Plugin 414 4 Measure any offset distance
238. gle and steering system 1 Select and then select F 2 Select and then select Fim 3 Select Learning sensing system Setting up the centralizing switch 1 Select and then select PYS 2 Select EJ scroll left or right to adjust the central position and then select OK Setting up the steering sensitivity 1 Select and then select F 4a 2 Select Sm scroll left or right to adjust the steering sensitivity and then select OK Configuring the Stop Head Height on the Greenstar Monitor l Press Stele 2 Press Harvest Monito for Harvest Monitor 3 Position the header to 100 Record Stop Height 4 Press c00 next to Record Stop Height Configuring the Stop Head Height on the Command Center 1 Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center 2 Select the Combine icon in the lower right corner of the screen 436 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 3 Press the 3rd button from the left on the command center to select the Combine tab 4 After Combine tab is selected continue to press the 3rd button from the left until page 3 appears page numbers are located on the Combine Tab Reserd Step Hott 56 5 Position the header to 100 6 Press Enter on Stop Head Height screen to record the required stop header height Kecord Stop Herght 5B Calibrations Original Greenstar Display 60 Series Combines Calibrate Moisture l Press t
239. grated display outputs pulses for an external device For example you can use a remote output signal to control a tree planter This chapter explains how to configure the Remote Output plugin so that the display can output data FmX Integrated Display User Guide 409 15 The Remote Output Plugin Connecting remote output The signal that is output on pin 2 of the FmX integrated display s B port is a 5 volt signal with a rating of approximately 70 mA this signal controls the device that requires the remote output The relay is grounded to pin 10 of the display s B port Signal out to device Configuring the Remote Output plugin When remote output is activated the FmX integrated display sends pulses to an external device For example you can use a remote output signal to control a tree planter Note Pulse output occurs only when coverage logging is enabled To enable pulse remote output 1 Install the Remote Output plugin See Adding or removing a plugin page 192 2 From the Configuration screen select the Remote Output plugin and then tap Setup 410 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide The Remote Output Plugin 15 The Remote Output screen appears 3 From the Remote Output Connector drop down list select Connector B The default option is Disabled More options appear FmX Integrated Display User Guide 411 15 The Remote Output Plugin 4 From the Remote Output Type drop down list select one of the f
240. h Fars E O Meadovwbrock 484 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Copying or deleting data files The Data Files screen enables you to copy or delete card data It shows the fields varieties prescriptions and data dictionaries that are in the internal memory and on the USB memory stick On the FmX integrated display there are two methods to access the Data Files screen See the following sections e Accessing data files from the Home screen page 485 e Accessing the data files through the Configuration screen page 485 Accessing data files from the Home screen From the Home screen tap Data Files The Data Files screen appears Accessing the data files through the Configuration screen From the Home screen tap am l On the Current Configurations screen tap Configure l 2 3 On the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup 4 Ifnecessary enter the administration password and then tap OK 5 Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears FmX Integrated Display User Guide 485 23 486 Data Management Copying data To copy data from the USB memory stick to the internal memory or from the internal memory to the USB memory stick 1 From the list select the item to copy Ifthe item is in the USB list the lt Copy button becomes available Ifthe item is in the nternal Storage list the Copy gt button becomes available 2 Tap
241. h ample area for the vehicle to make right and left turns You must calibrate the IMD 600 before you calibrate the SAM 200 For best results operate the vehicle at between 2 and 4 mph To calibrate the right turn angle 1 Drive straight forward until the icon appears and then tap it 2 Allow the system to operate for 20 seconds until you receive a message that the calibration is complete Repeat the procedure to calibrate the left turn angle Calibrating and setting the EZ Pilot parameters To calibrate the EZ Pilot system and set the correct steering performance parameters the following steps must be completed with the vehicle moving forward along the A B line 1 From the Z Pilot Steering Calibration screen select Steering Performance The EZ Pilot Steering Performance screen appears FmX Integrated Display User Guide 151 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 2 Tap the Override Sensitivity tab 3 To control the amount of force that is required to disengage the system tap the Aggressiveness tab The Aggressiveness setting fine tunes how aggressively the system holds the line If the setting is too low the vehicle will not hold the line if the setting is too high the vehicle may over correct and make S turns 4 Adjust the Aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going into S turns More aggressive turns Increase the Aggressiveness value Less aggressive turns Decrease the
242. h of the blade when cleaning surface ditches used with the Autoslope leveling model CH1 CH4 Product Level Client Name CMR Percent Control Speed The current level of the products that are in channels 1 4 Name of the current client The percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds The speed reported to the multi application controller Correction Age The length of time since the last correction was received Correction Type The correction type that is being used Coverage Percent The percentage of the field area that is covered area Current Flow The current flow of material Cut Fill The difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When Fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height The height the blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green Design Height Design Slope When using the Autoslope leveling model this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line Dist to Feature The distance to the nearest feat
243. h represents vehicle steering e The small inner color which represents implement steering Implement steering Vehicle steering Is engaged Is engaged 380 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Configuring the Engage button You can set the Engage button to work in two different ways In the Two stage engage list select the appropriate option Implement Setup T eae The Engage button requires multiple taps to engage e The first tap engages implement steering e The second tap engages the vehicle steering e The third tap disengages both implement and vehicle steering The Engage button engages with one tap e The first tap engages implement and vehicle steering e The second tap disengages both implement and vehicle steering Configuring the implement Configure an implement so that the system can tell e which type of implement is attached e how much area it covers e how far it is offset See Chapter 7 Implement Configuration Note When you enter the number of implement sections if the implement does not have sections enter 1 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 381 13 The TrueTracker Plugin Calibrating the implement 1 From the Configuration screen select the TrueTracker plugin and then tap Calibrate Implement Controller Setup 2 Select an item to configure and then tap OK 3 Configure the selected item Automated steering deadzone page 384 Roll antenna correct
244. hat units your target rate will apply e Bushel Weight Enter the bushel weight of the current material FmX Integrated Display User Guide 295 10 The Field IQ Plugin Layout tab Enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material Mavberial Bin Tank Setup Laydut Section Control Rate Control Row Monitor 4 Bin Tank Setup Row Offset Setup Description Allows the system to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field 296 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Ce a Row Offset Setup Row Offs
245. he Active Plugins list To remove a currently installed plugin from the Active Plugins list tap it and then tap lt Remove The plugin moves to the nactive Plugins list 4 Tap OK to return to the Configuration screen 192 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Overview of Plugins 8 Configuring a plugin Each plugin requires a different configuration For a detailed description of how to configure each one see the appropriate chapter later in this manual In general e Each plugin has several setup screens To access the screens tap the plugin and then tap Setup Calibrate or Diagnostics Configuration oy stent New oy Stern e Most of the plugins add additional features to the main guidance screen Entering the password to activate a plugin To activate some plugins you must enter the activation password If you do not have an activation password contact your local Trimble reseller You can activate a plugin through a text file see below or manually see page 194 Option 1 Activating automatically through a text file Note This method of activating the system is faster than the manual method When you purchase the TrueTracker system the FieldLevel II system or a variable rate system your local Trimble reseller provides you with a text file containing a password 1 Insert the USB memory stick from the FmX integrated display into a card reader that is attached to an office computer FmX Integra
246. he instructions on each page e Run the engine at full throttle FmX Integrated Display User Guide 383 13 The TrueTracker Plugin e Raise the implement To run the steering sensor calibration 1 Select the Steering Angle procedure from the calibration list Implement Steering Sensor Calibration Instructions steered Press Start to proceed 2 Tap Start 3 Perform the calibration The value in the Volts field is updated as the wheels are steered Calibrating the Implement Automatic Deadzone The Implement Automatic Deadzone calibration procedure runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs A N WARNING During the Implement Automatic Deadzone calibration the system moves the wheels that steer the implement To avoid injury make sure that the area around the vehicle and implement is clear In this test the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs Notes on calibrating the Implement Automatic Deadzone e You must complete the Steering Angle procedure before you run this procedure See Calibrating the steering angle sensor page 116 e To ensure optimal system performance the hydraulic fluid must be at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure On some vehicles with large reservoirs it may take several h
247. he instructions that accompany a Warning or Caution The information they provide is intended to minimize the risk of personal injury and or damage to property In particular observe safety instructions that are presented in the following format WARNING This alert warns of a potential hazard which if not avoided can cause severe injury CAUTION This alert warns of a hazard or unsafe practice which if not avoided can cause injury or damage Note An absence of specific alerts does not mean that there are no safety risks involved WARNING Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fail resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle Any adjustment to this setting should only be made by an experienced user WARNING During the Deadzone calibration the system moves the vehicle s steering wheels To avoid injury be prepared for sudden vehicle movement WARNING When you tap the liquid flow calibration Start button the machine will become operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death WARNING When you tap the control valve calibration Start button the machine will become operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death WARNING When you tap the fill disk Start button the machine will become
248. he same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when
249. he target for longer than the delay setting Low Alarm Triggers when the rate drops the below the target for longer than the delay setting for the selected percentage Singulation Low Triggers when singulation reaches a percentage lower than 100 for longer than the delay setting Seeds When Off Triggers when this percentage of seeds is detected while the sections are off for longer than the delay setting No Seeds When On Triggers when this percentage of seeds is not detected for longer than the delay setting Blockage Sensitivity Alarm When less than this amount of material is sensed for the number of seconds given When no pulses are sensed for this amount of time the alarm triggers Multiples Threshold If two seeds fall within this percentage of seed spacing it is considered a double Lowering this number requires seeds to be closer together to be reported as a double Skips Threshold If two seeds fall outside of this percentage of seed spacing it is considered a skip Raising this number requires seeds to be further apart to be a skip Averaging Sample Size This is the number of seeds used to calculate the average Increasing this amount makes the response slower but more stable Misplaced Seeds Threshold If a seed falls outside this percentage of seed spacing then it s considered misplaced and reduces the spacing quality FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Layout tab Enter information about the i
250. he track passes and record the distance Also note whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results in Table 12 on page 393 Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right 11 Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Use Table 12 on page 393 to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run FmX Integrated Display User Guide 391 13 392 The TrueTracker Plugin Calculating the roll offset flag offset method iP 10 Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m 1320 ft in length Reset the Roll Offset value to 0 zero on the Roll Correction screen See Configuring the roll offset correction page 391 Start a new field Create a straight AB Line Start a new pass Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable Stop the tractor midway through the pass Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line Park the vehicle and exit the cab Insert a flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass Complete the pass Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction Engage automatic steering mode Stop the vehicle midway down the pass very close to the marker flag Confirm that there is no cross track error the curren
251. height Large red arrow pointing down The blade is considerably above the target height more than double the On Grade Limit value The arrow points in the direction that the blade needs to move for the blade to be on grade The size of the up or down arrow indicates the amount of movement required FieldLevel Il status text items Status text items describe factors in leveling models Note The FieldLevel II status items all begin with P which denotes the Primary GPS receiver If you have the Tandem Dual plugin installed you will also have S status items available which denotes Secondary P Altitude P Blade Height P Boot Depth P CMR Percent P Correction Age P Correction Type P Cut fill P Design Height P Design Slope P Distance Travelled P East P GPS Status P H Error P HDOP P Heading P Latitude P Longitude Description The current GPS altitude of the blade The current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS height depending on settings selected The depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches used with the Autoslope leveling model The percentage of data being successfully received from the base GPS receiver The time since the last GPS correction was received from the GPS base station The solution type for example RTK Fixed or RTK Float etc The difference between the blade height and the target height When Cut is
252. her the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area Coverage Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area 286 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Rate Control tab Adjust the rate control settings Field IQ Setup T Rate Control On The system sets the target rate Off Section switching only Rate Control Module Location Tap Setup to configure the rate control module s their location on the implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a screen appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages FmX Integrated Display User Guide 287 10 The Field IQ Plugin Drive Setup Valve Setup tab Drive Setup el orl Valve Type 288 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump Pump
253. hich the system can remain engaged If the vehicle drives offline greater than this limit the system disengages Engage on A B Configure whether the system can be engaged on the master A B line Override sensitivity Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before the system disengages EZ Steer external switch Configure the behavior of a seat foot switch 3 Configure the Engage Options as required and then tap OK The Configuration screen appears Engaging the system To engage the EZ Steer system you must have an open field in the Run screen and have an A B line defined The vehicle must be within the engage limits configured in EZ Steer systems Engage Options To manually engage the EZ Steer system do one of the following e Tap the engage button on the main guidance screen or press the engage button on the optional remote control e Press the optional remote engage foot pedal Disengaging the system Turning the steering wheel manually disengages the EZ Steer system It is recommended that you check this setting before you start using the system in a new installation by engaging ona line and then turning the wheel until EZ Steer disengages To adjust the amount of force required to disengage the system change the Override Sensitivity in the EZ Steer Setup screen The EZ Steer system automatically disengages when e The vehicle is outside the engage limits configured in the Engage Options screen e The system i
254. his is the October 2011 release Revision A of the FX Integrated Display User Guide part number 93023 80 ENG It applies to version 6 0 of the FmxX integrated display software Legal Notices The following limited warranties give you specific legal rights You may have others which vary from state jurisdiction to state jurisdiction Product Limited Warranty Trimble warrants that this Trimble product and its internal components the Product shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Trimble s applicable published specifications for the Product for a period of one 1 year starting from the earlier of i the date of installation or ii six 6 months from the date of original Product shipment from Trimble This warranty applies only to the Product ifinstalled by Trimble or a dealer authorized by Trimble to perform Product installation services Software Components All Product software components sometimes hereinafter also referred to as Software are licensed solely for use as an integral part of the Product and are not sold Any software accompanied by a separate end user license agreement EULA shall be governed by the terms conditions restrictions and limited warranty terms of such EULA notwithstanding the preceding paragraph During the limited warranty period you will be entitled to receive such Fixes to the Product software that Trimble releases and makes comme
255. his setting to keep the control valve and flow meter above the minimum operating level 336 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup x i Pa Laaa a i j j ki P E a eg I HEC LH L nere aoe Oma pej WED mg Ba ml ja ai r i i A aeee a iat TE FI Typ d Bal in i z ki jy s m iml NENSI e e e aral yeaa Se i i E ia fi l 7 i When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information ti Sensor Type Select from Air pressure vacuum Liquid pressure NH3 pressure Bin level RPM Gate Height Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify which wire is controlling the sensor FmX Integrated Display User Guide 337 10 The Field IQ Plugin Operation tab Field IQ Setup Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting controls when to shut the system down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override This setting maintains the application rate when the im
256. hn Deere module Setup tab l I ll i i l Enter information about the combine you are using GESA Select the brand of combine you are using Model Select the model of combine you are using Yield Monitor Type Select the type of yield monitor you are using e Claas e John Deere e Serial Data Input Port Connection Select the port on the back of the FmX integrated display that the yield monitor is connected to 428 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Operation tab Setup Operation Crop Map Legend Head Logging Height Grain Fkrar Delay Reset Autocut Note The selections available on the Operations tab may vary depending on the yield monitoring type that you selected Enter settings to configure the combine you are using Head Logging Height The height at which yield data logging starts and stops The Head Logging Height is read from the Header Height Sensor If required tap Current Height to enter values related to your own setup Note Head Logging Height is not available for the Claas 600 700 This is set by the CEBIS Grain Flow Delay The amount of time in seconds that it takes for the grain to reach the yield sensor after it enters the head Reset Autocut Controls when the rows are automatically reset e When head is lifted automatically resets the rows at the end of the row when the head is lofted past the logging height e Never disables Aut
257. hout an implement or with the booms folded in on a high clearance sprayer After initial calibration is completed you can fine tune the settings with the implement or booms folded out e Choose a field with the smoothest possible surface and perform calibration at the normal operating speed for the vehicle The EZ Pilot calibration process requires an open field in which the vehicle can make right and left turns and also travel down a straight A B line If you do not create an A B line before you begin the calibration the system prompts you to open a field and create one Calibrating the EZ Pilot system To calibrate the EZ Pilot system to work with the FmX integrated display you must complete the following 1 Enter the vehicle settings See page 145 2 Calibrate T3 roll compensation See page 149 3 Calibrate the EZ Pilot system See page 151 148 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Angle per Turn Aggressiveness Freeplay offset 4 Confirm the calibration settings Note You may have to perform the EZ Pilot calibration more than once to achieve optimal results Calibrating T3 roll compensation The EZ Pilot system contains sensors that use T3 terrain compensation technology to provide roll compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump For roll compensation to work correctly the IMD 600 must be calibrated 1 Select the EZ Pilot plugin and then tap Calibrate EZ Pi
258. ies depending on the plugins that you selected in Step 7 182 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 9 Implement Configuration 7 Tap OK Your current configuration now appears in the Configuration screen Selecting an existing implement To select a pre configured implement l 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap ee In the Configuration Selection screen tap the implement Switch If necessary enter the Administration password See Password access page 73 In the Implement Configuration screen select the implement you want to switch to and then tap OK Note If there is only one available implement it is selected by default The currently selected implement is displayed in the Configuration Selection screen For information on the settings see Adjusting the implement settings page 184 Importing an implement from the FieldManager display The FmX integrated display can import and use implements that were created in the FieldManager display To import an implement l O PpP o o m SS A p Copy the implement file into the AgGPS folder on the USB memory stick Insert the memory stick into the FmX integrated display and then turn on the display From the Home screen tap A In the Current Configurations screen tap Configure If necessary enter the Administration password See Password access page 73 In the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup Select Data Files and then tap Manage Sel
259. igation 2 2 ee ee 62 Placing field features OMNSCICGn 4444 hope eda Gee GPs eee oh eee ae eae 63 Paci SUIGGNCe lt 4 46 a5 60 45 4446 e E eS ha ees ee he eh ee 64 Adjusting the status text Size 4544 24 0844 eS 5G bnew heh rak tda een cheeses 64 Introduction to coverage logging ae es e eden ge eee ete e dew See e REARS ESOS ER 65 IOCCWIS VANICHCS so tint ag oy ede tees e eee ee One 4 ae he ee A oe 65 PEE eO e 44454 ohne uaehoebegoens ssa attest eedw dees edad ns t6 05 OG 67 Display Setup xo Be ee ee ee ee ee 71 Accessing the system configuration settings 1 2 0 eee ee ee T2 Passworde 144 2445445402 ar hE EEE ENEA RERET 73 Conigurine the display lt seis ssenres aadi haw apnea ds 2 aw ae eee oe n ee 73 Deca sa ae ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 74 Map Settings including night mode 0 00 eee eee eee 74 SIGS UN Ke 0 se eo ee ce ee ee ee ee ee eer ee 77 Selecting the language units of measure and keyboard layout 88 D SCUIGS a eum ea ease eee eee ee eee eee ee ee ee eee ee oes 89 Pearle Mappila 4 54 oa cee bebe oe ae Be oe ee eg eee oO ee eee 89 Waa WICHONALY ty ab 6 bio a aoe A a oh Ce Se OE A RR ORS He Bone ae ore 95 ISNA peep eae aee eee eee ee game ee Pee ae eee nee ee Boe eee 96 PA Remote Jysk 4 444 a5 HAG te Fae ONS Gee eR Ee EDS eee ae ee 97 CO e a a Oa a E a a a be ae 97 DOUNdS E E E E E E EE E E eee E ees 98 CANDU SCOS enota eanne a a a eea 99 Powar mam A e e a arer eraa aa eE N
260. ign Go to the Design Work pane where you can select a section line and then edit the design Note A white cross is displayed on the run screen showing both horizontal and vertical location See screenshot below table Pipe Type Select the type of pipe you will install Select the pipe size you will install Raise the tile boot or blade by the Blade Step amount Lower the tile boot or blade by the Blade Step amount Select a defined percentage of vertical drop for a horizontal distance traveled Coarse When selected pressing the Up or Down arrows will move the blade by the Coarse Blade Step amount This enables the operator to move the blade by a large amount instead of small increments Auto Set Automatics to the hydraulic valve The blade or tile boot will be driven to the design depth depending on where you are relative to the section line Logging Log the coverage so that you can see on your map where you have been dependent on your Implement Width A shape file will also be created with cut fill and height information p 254 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 The slope is defined as the percentage vertical drop against horizontal travel A positive slope goes upwards and a negative slope goes downward For example if the slope is set to 1 the slope will drop 1 ft for every 100 ft horizontally traveled Vertical drop Actual slope 1 1 ft Horizontal travel 100 ft FmX Integrated Display
261. ign support the FieldLevel II system has five leveling models e Point and Slope The system levels at a consistent upward or downward slope regardless of the vehicles direction This can be useful for installing tile and field drainage e MultiPlane The FieldLevel II system supports external leveling designs from MultiPlane design software This software can run a wide range of what if scenarios enabling you to create complex designs with multiple field sections You can export these design control files and then load them into the FieldLevel II system to shape the field surface based on the work in the office FmX Integrated Display User Guide 211 9 Water Management e Flat plane laser Use this leveling model to level a field that has previously been measured with a laser The FieldLevel II GPS system will correct the design heights to a plane surface to match your previous laser system e Flat plane GPS Use this model to level a field using the FieldLevel II GPS system No corrections will be made to a flat plane so the surface will be curved to match the surface of the Earth This is the most accurate model to use so that water sits at an equal depth across a field e Contour The system guides you around a contour The system indicates whether to drive up or down to maintain your current level This is designed for marking rice levees Terminology The FieldLevel II system uses the following terms Cut Fi
262. ill fall If you have 0 000 slope on the Cross axis the Composite Heading will be the same as the Primary Heading 228 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Defining a plane using a single point 1 From the Run screen select the Survey Design plugin and then create a benchmark that will be used to define the direction of the slope and its heading Note It can be useful to create the benchmark at the critical point for example where the water will enter or exit the field This ensures that where the benchmark is the plane is on grade 2 Select the FieldLevel II plugin and then tap Design ee ee 3 Ifmore than one benchmark is stored tap Choose Pivot and then select the benchmark that you want to be on grade 4 Tap OK The Plane Editor screen appears 5 fusing a known offset enter it into the Height Above Pivot field 6 Enter the values for Primary Slope Primary Heading and Cross Slope For water to run along the Primary and Cross axis the slope values must be keyed in as negative values Ifyou want to define the primary heading by measuring a second point see Defining a plane using multiple benchmarks page 230 7 To change the direction of the Cross Slope tap Flip This changes the Cross Heading between 90 and 270 from the Primary Heading 8 The plane is now defined Tap OK The Run screen appears Note The FieldLevel II plugin searches for a survey on the field If there
263. implement on your vehicle and to adjust the land to an optimal slope The FieldLevel II system uses a high accuracy GPS receiver with an antenna mounted on the implement blade to measure and control its elevation The FieldLevel II design defines the three dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement reshapes the ground The FieldLevel II system automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the design height anywhere in the field The color cut fill map simple on screen adjustments and automatic blade control makes leveling easy e For improved productivity when leveling a field the FieldLevel II system supports tandem or dual scraper implements With a tandem system the second scraper is also controlled by GPS which means that you can work in areas requiring cuts and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers With a dual system an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent cylinders This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of the scraper Terminology A cut is a point on the field where dirt needs to be removed A cut occurs when the existing field is higher than the proposed field surface A fill is a point on the field where dirt must be added A fill occurs when the existing field is lower than the proposed field surface A neutral is a point on the field where the existing and proposed elevations are the same No di
264. in each section Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each section control module e Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn on in advance Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off after the set number of seconds Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The hig
265. ing Inline Valve is in the solution line going to the boom The valve opens to increase the application rate Bypass Valve is in the return to tank line The valve closes to increase the application rate Valve Behavior On Sections Close When all sections ar off the control valve returns to the closed position Closed Lock in Last Position When all sections are off the control valve remains in the last position This setting allows the system to return to the target rate faster Auxiliary Valve Master Valve closes when the system is turned off eS pump Vane opens o np tote ne when essen s tumed oft Pump Disarming Switch Enable Select this option if you have a pump disarming switch installed D Disable Select this option if you do not have a pump disarming switch installed FmX Integrated Display User Guide 269 10 The Field IQ Plugin Feedback Setup tab mm La Shaft Encoder Constant Pulses per revolution Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate 270 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Row Monitoring tab Field IQ Setup Tw Disabled Row monitoring is turned off Blockage Select this opt
266. ion Operating in the field 1 From the Home screen tap eft 2 From the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK 3 From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK Setting up the Field IQ system for Air Seeding Make sure that you have set your implement to Seeder and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs For information on this tabs Se FmX Integrated Display User Guide 281 10 The Field IQ Plugin Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Field IQ Setup a Material Type Select your Field IQ application type Note If spraying chemicals use the liquid fertilizer setting Row Crop Seed Liquid Granular Seed Granular Fertilizer Anhydrous Material Name Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the material Material Details Tap Setup to open the Hybrid Setup screen See Logging varieties page 65 282 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Seting Bescon Application Rate Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings e Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 1 Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume tha
267. ion control WM Survey control Used for surveying boundaries interior lines or section lines It is also for designing an Autoplane surface where you can create a best fit plane through a surveyed field and balance the cut and fill to your requirements 13 FieldLevel II single Used when there is a single antenna on a scraper or tile plow control Blade step Use the up and down arrows to manually adjust the grade of the scraper or tile plow blade Blade position indicators Design button Engage this button to design a field slope and orientation or in the case of Autoslope you can set the design parameters for the tile or surface ditch profile When you use the FmX integrated display to provide guidance for example guiding to a contour guidance is displayed on the virtual lightbar at the top of the screen When you use the display to show field leveling information blade position indicators appear on the Run screen example Green bar in center The blade is at the correct target height it is within the On Grade Limit Small red arrow pointing up The blade is beyond the On Grade Limit value below the target height Large red arrow pointing up The blade is considerably below the target height more than double the On Grade Limit value 220 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Em Bescription e Small red arrow pointing down The blade is beyond the On Grade Limit value above the target
268. ion page 391 382 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Configuring the controller orientation 1 Select the Controller Orientation option from the list Autopilot Controller Orientation Foisle fha imaga to meich ee the EAER en nter the anentaton pratt aad cham PEE ETT A EEE controller looking dawn from the top with the nose of the tractor pointing to the top of the An image represents the current mounting orientation of the controller The image is shown as though You are looking down on the vehicle from above The top of the screen points to the front of the vehicle 2 Use the buttons to select the orientation of the controller Ifthe controller is set at a sloped angle tap Direct Entry and then enter the yaw pitch and roll angles of the controller Note If you use the Direct Entry method to set custom angles the on screen image of the controller does not appear 3 Tap OK to accept the new orientation or tap Cancel to exit Calibrating the Implement Steering Sensor Perform steering sensor calibration to convert the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle measurement Note Complete this calibration before you attempt to calibrate the steering deadzone or roll correction procedures You must ensure that you e Perform this procedure on a level surface that is free of obstructions e Follow t
269. ion rate When using the RT200 with a typical liquid delivery system it is important to match nozzle sizes to expected delivery rates After the appropriate reference strip readings GDD and selection of crop type are input into RT Commander the application graph can be accessed to show the prescription rates at various sensor NDVI readings Depending upon what delivery system is used there will be actual minimum and maximum rates obtainable These will be dependent upon components like the pump control valve nozzles and boom plumbing sizes The GreenSeeker plugin for the FmX integrated display has features that allow for minimum and maximum rates to be set regardless of the crop algorithm prescription Once a nozzle set is chosen the minimum should be set at the lowest rate the nozzles will still give adequate pattern performance Maximum rates may be limited by rates that lessen atomization or drift 360 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 Selecting a nozzle It is usually best to match nozzles to the lower midrange of the typical rates shown on the application graph Ultimately it is up to the grower or crop consultant to determine the minimum or maximum rates and nozzles which are most appropriate For example GreenSeeker Calibration Max Lim If most of your NDVI readings in the area of the field not in the NRS are around 0 53 and your review the application graph shows at 0 53 N
270. ion when using an air seeder or when applying granular material Seed Count Select this option for precision seeding Row Sensor Enable Turn individual row sensors on or off Row Sensor Wiring Select which wire each row sensor is wired to FmX Integrated Display User Guide 271 10 The Field IQ Plugin Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup x i Pa Laaa a i j j ki P E a eg I HEC LH L nere aoe Oma pej WED mg Ba ml ja ai r i i A aeee a iat TE FI Typ d Bal in i z ki jy s m iml NENSI e e e aral yeaa Se i i E ia fi l 7 i When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information ti Sensor Type Select from Air pressure vacuum Liquid pressure NH3 pressure Bin level RPM Gate Height Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify which wire is controlling the sensor 272 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Operation tab Field IQ Setup Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting
271. ions 208 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Once completed you can establish a design either by manually editing the slopes or by using the display to calculate a best fit plane The best fit calculation optimizes the height and slopes of a design plane to minimize the amount of dirt that has to be moved Once a design is completed and before you exit the AutoPlane design screen select the topographic height map or the cut fill color theme to transfer it to the Run screen with the design Options on the screen Cut Fill Ratio When you move dirt compaction or expansion can change the volume that it covers The Cut Fill Ratio is the amount of cut dirt that equals one volume of fill dirt For example the default Cut Fill Ratio is 1 20 This means you lose 20 of your cut yards to compaction when you put the cut yards back down in the fill areas Section If you set up sections when you defined the field you can select one from the list Left Right list The section to the left of the section line or the section to the right of the section line The design slope values show the angles and heading of the slope Description North gt South Slope The angle of the design slope from North to South East gt West Slope The angle of the design slope from East to West Composite Slope The true angle of fall of the design This is the angle of the slope when the two angles above are combined Slope Headin
272. isengaged the Autopilot system immediately begins providing all guidance 370 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueGuide Plugin 12 TrueGuide system status indicators The system status appears on the TrueGuide tab between the Off On Auto buttons TrueGuide status Description The TrueGuide system is off Disengaged The TrueGuide system is ready but not engaged Waiting The Autopilot system is engaged and the TrueGuide system is preparing to engage after a short pause The TrueGuide system has engaged and is on TrueGuide system aggressiveness settings To set the default aggressiveness value see Setting up the TrueGuide system page 366 e Increasing the aggressiveness increases the response to move the implement back to the guidance line e Decreasing aggressiveness smooths the response to the implement moving offline Use as default Foe aaa Adjusting aggressiveness during operation 1 From the Run screen select the TrueGuide Plugin 2 Doone of the following To increase aggressiveness tap To decrease aggressiveness tap FmX Integrated Display User Guide 371 12 The TrueGuide Plugin 372 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The TrueTracker Plugin In this chapter One of the FmX integrated display features that can be unlocked is the TrueTracker implement m About the TrueTracker system steering system m Configuration This chapter describes the True
273. isplay User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Item Description Trimble part number AG15 GNSS antenna 77038 00 D RTK antenna cable 11 RTK antenna 12 NavController II main harness 54601 13 RG 100 NavController Il to feeder house cable 85538 RG 100 feeder house to JD sensors 85537 B RG 100 feeder house to Claas CNH sensors 85924 CNH adapter cable 85790 EZ Pilot assisted steering system guidance The EZ Pilot assisted steering system works with the FmX integrated display s internal GPS receiver to provide vehicle guidance Installing the EZ Pilot system For information on installing the EZ Pilot controller in your vehicle refer to the supported vehicle specific EZ Pilot installation instructions FmX Integrated Display User Guide 143 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Connecting the EZ Pilot system Rem Description mb part number o pe O K OI a a Beast ae To eaner o FmX display 94100 xx Basic power cable 77282 Basic power cable 67258 144 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 1 Use the FmX to EZ Pilot cable to connect the EZ Pilot syste
274. ist select From Controller New b Tap the Model drop down box and then select the make and model that you require from the list Selecting a new vehicle make and model from a database a From the drop down list select From Database new and then tap Browse b Select the vdb file that you want to open and then tap OK Selecting a saved vehicle make and model from the display From the drop down list select From Saved File existing and then tap Browse b Select the required file and then tap OK c Select Change Vehicle to save the new settings The following message appears The specified vehicle model will now be selected on the Autopilot controller This will cause the Autopilot controller to be reset Do you want to continue Note If you select a vehicle make and model but do not upload that configuration to the Autopilot controller that make and model will not be loaded 110 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 3 Tap OK to load the new configuration The following message appears The Autopilot controller will now be reinitialized in order to complete the vehicle selection 4 Tap OK The file is now loaded For more information on saving vehicle profiles on the FmX integrated display see Saving a vehicle profile page 132 Autopilot calibration Once you configure the vehicle make and model calibrate the system for your individual vehicle The Autopilot system calibration process r
275. ive e A history of faults that have occurred View Warning screen When you are viewing the vehicle diagnostics screens the View Warning button flashes red if there is an active warning on the display To view any active warnings tap the button FmX Integrated Display User Guide 499 24 Troubleshooting GPS Status screen The GPS Status screen provides information on the current GPS data from the GPS receiver Use this screen to check that the GPS receiver is outputting the expected data e From the Configuration screen select the Autopilot GPS Receiver option and then tap Diagnostics This screen shows Your current GPS position The number of satellites GPS quality The Autopilot system and receiver version numbers Screen snaps 500 To save images in the FmX integrated display tap the button on the right of the screen that matches the current screen For example to create a screen snap of the Run screen l Tap Zt The Run screen appears 2 Tap fe i again The screen snap is saved in the AgGPS Diagnostics Screenshots folder A warning sound indicates that you have created a screen snap Note The screen snap is of the lowest level folder under each button So if you take a screen snap while in the Implement Setup screen the snap is of the Configuration screen The screen snap feature is most useful for capturing images of the Run screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24
276. iver drop down list select which GPS receiver you will use for your FieldLevel system It is recommended that you select Internal Primary when configuring the display as a stand alone FieldLevel II system but you can use an external GPS receiver If you are also using the Autopilot system it is recommended that you use Internal Secondary as the Autopilot system will be occupying the Internal Primary receiver 3 From the Corrections drop down list select RTK for all FieldLevel II applications 4 Set the Network ID to the same network ID that is set in the base station receiver 5 Tap OK The FieldLevel II plugin is now configured and ready to use 218 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Operating the FieldLevel II plugin Run screen The FmX integrated displays Run screen changes when the FieldLevel II plugin is installed It can also change depending which leveling model is selected Create Benchmark Virtual lightbar Provides guidance with illuminated LEDs When using the FieldLevel II Contour leveling model the virtual lightbar can be used for levee marking Also in the Autoslope leveling model it will guide you onto the design alignment when installing tile or cleaning a surface ditch Status items tab Open to view a variety of text information regarding the operation of the FmX integrated display 4 Primary cut fill Primary cut fill indicator When the blade is below
277. l ac When constructing prescription maps make sure that the maps use the same units that the controller is configured for Alarms If you want low limit and target rate alarms set these on the variable rate controller You can also set a default rate to be used if you go off the prescription or do not have a prescription For more information refer to the documentation provided with your variable rate controller FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 Additional information for non Trimble variable rate controllers Prescriptions You can define variable rate controller setup data and load prescription files that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller Applied rates are received from the controller and both target and applied rates are shown on the screen In addition data relating to the variable rate application may be logged to the card The information describing prescriptions for the Field IQ system also applies to non Trimble variable rate controllers FmX Integrated Display User Guide 407 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin 408 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Remote Output Plugin In this chapter m Connecting remote output m Configuring the Remote Output plugin m Calibrating the lead time for your implement When remote output is activated the FmX inte
278. lay User Guide 127 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Offset distance Offset direction Total 3 Average offset value 12 Average the results of the three runs Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three Entering the roll offset 1 Enter the average offset value in the Roll Offset field See Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction page 124 2 Select one of the offline direction options depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the left or right Calibrating the line acquisition aggressiveness 1 Select Line Acquisition from the calibration list See page 111 2 Adjust the line acquisition aggressiveness slider The slider controls how aggressively the vehicle approaches the guidance line using a scale from 50 to 150 The optimal value for each profile is not necessarily 100 it varies for different vehicle profiles Note When you adjust the slider check the vehicle stability at the speed shown or at the maximum engage speed 128 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Calibrating a tracked tractor If you selected a tracked tractor as the make and model the Track Spacing option appears on the calibration list This option is not shown in the Vehicle Controller Setup screen shown on page 112 Track Spacing value Use this option to configure the width of the tracks on the vehicle The width of the vehicle tracks is the distan
279. ld See Event folder page 477 e Three Swaths files 23 e Ifit is a bounded headland field three Boundary files See Field boundary and AB Line files page 478 e Anempty file whose name represents the coordinates of the field boundary file for example 172 000E43 000S12H pos locates the boundary at latitude 172 000 East longitude 43 000 South and altitude 12 m high e Any recorded features files See Features files page 481 e Any paused files See Pausing guidance page 64 e The field event history file EventHistory dbf It contains information about each event carried out in the field See Event History file page 480 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 475 23 Data Management The following figure shows how a Field folder and its files are organized Dp L AgGF5 Data Smith Farms Meadowbrook South Field Be Edt Vew Favorites Tools Hep E A A E n i En Address Eggs Data Smith Farms Meadowbrook South Field i Desktoo FC my Documents E my Computer Se Local Deck C1 4h Ov0 Rw Drive 0s B SanDisk imageMate E E i agers G AB Lines E G autopdot Fl g Data A G Smith Fams 476 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Event folder Each Event folder stores e Coverage logging shapefiles that are recorded during the event called Coverage See Coverage logging data page 479 e Track logging shapefiles that are recorded during the event called Track3D_
280. le left or right 1 m 3 from the A B line b Engage the EZ Steer system c Adjust the Angle per Turn value so that when the system is engaged the vehicle moves close to the guidance line More aggressive turns Decrease the Angle per Turn value Less aggressive turns Increase the Angle per Turn value Note Use the Cross Track Error history plot on the top right of the page and the Average Offline distance to optimize EZ Steer performance for each step in the calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 163 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 3 To configure the Aggressiveness settings select the Step 2 tab The Aggressiveness setting fine tunes how aggressively the system holds the line If the setting is too low the vehicle will not hold the line if the setting is too high the vehicle may over correct and make S turns 4 Adjust the Aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going into S turns To make Do the following More aggressive turns Increase the Aggressiveness value Less aggressive turns Decrease the Aggressiveness value 5 To adjust the Freeplay Offset settings select the Step 3 tab 164 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Add a Freeplay Offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line 6 Engage the system on the A B line Vehicl
281. left of the screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 77 4 Display Setup The slide out tabs automatically slide back in when the specified time out value is reached To close the tab before then tap the tab Upper left status text item Upper right status text item Slide out tab 0 00 gal a Auxillary Walwe Disabled 5 00 gal a Current F how 0 00 gal min Control Speed Tatai Vol Applied 3 59 mph 139 2 gal Total Vol Applied N 0 00 gal 139 2 gal Total Vol Applied NH3 n a 139 2 gal To configure which status text items appear on the Info screen see Status items page 79 78 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Status items The status items are ordered by plugin Ifa plugin is removed the items associated with it are no longer available The available items are as follows shown in alphabetic order Description blank The status text item is not shown Altitude The current height of the vehicle Applied Rate The current application rate Area to Empty The area that can still be applied before the tank is empty Auxiliary Valve The current status of the auxiliary valve Available Memory The amount of free space on the display s internal memory Average Population The average rate across all rows Avg Seed Spacing The average distance between seeds based on the average sample size Blade Height The current height of the blade Boot Depth The depth of the boot when installing tiles or the dept
282. lightbar Chapter 21 The LB25 lightbar External Lightbar FleldLevel Optional Survey a field and then create a design Chapter 9 Water survey Design Level the field to a design install subsurface Management FieldLevel Il drainage or surface ditches Tandem Dual Control leveling with two GPS receivers in one of two possible scraper configurations Field IQ Optional Configure the Field IQ crop input control system to Chapter 10 The Field control sections and vary application rates IQ Plugin GreenSeeker Optional Vary fertilizer rate in real time using crop vigor Chapter 11 The measurements GreenSeeker Plugin Yield monitoring Optional Access yield monitoring information from John Chapter 18 The Yield Deere combines and Ag Leader displays Monitoring Plugin TrueGuide Optional Configure the TrueGuide implement guidance Chapter 12 The system for implement control TrueGuide Plugin TrueTracker Optional Configure the TrueTracker system to enable Chapter 13 The implement steering TrueTracker Plugin Serial Rate Optional Configure a non Trimble variable rate controller Chapter 14 The Serial Controller Rate Control Plugin Remote Output Optional Enable and configure remote data output to an Chapter 15 The external device Remote Output Plugin Serial Data Input Optional Enable and configure data input from an external Chapter 16 The Serial serial device Data Input Plugin Productivity Optional Enable and configure the display to w
283. linked When the system is in diagnostics mode the secondary material is not functional When the system is in diagnostics mode you can only operate a linked material when you also open the sections of the primary material 1 Inthe Section Control tab in the Section Control field select Link to Material 2 Inthe Linked Material field select the primary material that you want to link to 3 Select the Rate Control tab and then set up rate control For more information see the sections for each type below 262 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting up the Field IQ system for Planting Make sure that you have set your implement to Planter and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs For information on this tabs Se Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Field IQ Setup l Material Material Name cor Material Details Setup Application Rate Setup Rate Alarms Seip Material Type Select your Field IQ application type Note If spraying chemicals use the liquid fertilizer setting Row Crop Seed Liquid Granular Seed Granular Fertilizer Anhydrous Material Name Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the material Material Details Tap Setup to open the Hybrid Setup screen See
284. ll Blade Height Target Height Design Height Rem Beseiption O Blade Height The current height of the blade The height at the current location determined by the design plane Offset The difference between Design Height and Target Height Using the offset buttons creates a plane that is parallel to the original design Target Height The height on the target plane that the blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the height indicator arrow turns green Cut Fill The difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height e When Cut is displayed the current ground is above the target The height indicator arrow turns red and points down which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height When Fill is displayed the current ground is below the target The height indicator arrow turns red and points up which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height Configuring the FieldLevel Il plugin 212 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Note Before you can configure the system it must be professionally installed For more information contact your local reseller There are four steps to complete e Step 1 Configuring the implement page 213 e Step 2 Configuring the leveling model page 213 e Step 3 Calibrating the FieldLevel II valve module page 217 e Step 4 Configuring the FieldLevel II GPS rec
285. lot Steering Calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 149 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 2 Select JMD 600 Orientation Tru Application Control Calibration Note For best accuracy install the IMD 600 as shown in the installation instructions for the supported platform in which it is being installed Make sure the IMD 600 is installed at right angles to the center line of the vehicle Non orthogonal angles will cause performance degradation 3 From the Orientation drop down list select the orientation of the IMD 600 module and then tap Next EZ Pilot Roll Calibration 4 Park the vehicle mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap Next The display records the roll offset in the first direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read 150 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 5 Turn the vehicle around ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in Step 4 and then tap Next The display records the roll offset in the second direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read 6 The T3 calibration results will appear in the Roll Offset screen The Roll Offset value should be between 0 and 4 7 Tap OK The EZ Pilot Steering Calibration screen appears Calibrating the SAM 200 Notes Ensure that you are operating the vehicle in an open field wit
286. low non productive FmX Integrated Display User Guide 421 17 The Productivity Monitoring Plugin Operation When you open a field enter the additional details When the conditions that you set in the configuration are met they trigger pop up messages on the FmX integrated display 422 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Yield Monitoring Plugin In this chapter The FmX integrated display can access yield data that is collected by yield monitoring sensors Introduction This chapter describes how to configure the FmX integrated display for use with various yield m Setting up the Yield Monitoring monitoring platforms plugin Error messages m General setup information m Third party display instructions m Yield Monitoring Diagnostics FmX Integrated Display User Guide 423 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Introduction Definitions Clean Grain Elevator After grain has been separated from the rest of the plant the clean grain auger moves the grain from the separator to the grain bin Grain Bin The hopper on the combine that is filled with clean grain as harvest progresses Header Height A sensor that indicates the position of the head The load of grain that has been harvested Commonly accepted density for a grain Commonly accepted moisture for a grain The variety of grain that is being harvested Yield Monitoring Module that interfaces between the yield monitoring sensors and CAN Module
287. lp orraa me E a E e e ae a tee U A e Ge eee a 34 Mmstalline the display se ragad eaaa eee eke as eee a a es 35 COMMECHNS thedisplay 4 vn ese kbeeacaeeenekeee Sse eats keaees pee ee eRe es 37 Inserting a memory stick into the USB socket 2 0 2 0 2 eee ee 37 Feria Cah al O eera oc oa Gece ee Lee hee hha ee tee OO a ee eg eee 38 3 Getting Started 1 0 ee 39 Introduction to field features 2a ee cee ek eh aoe eee en eee oe ee Ee Oe eee se ee 40 Sa AC Oise a ace eee eee Oe and eee og Oa he he eee 41 Bu a CIC anes E E E estar E E EEEE EEE TE 42 Additional settings 5 ss saa eeeuy ayes tee see mee eh eee eee es os gaa eee 42 Clog Geld 2 oi bee eee Geers oe eee eee Ge Sue ae REO Tee eens en os 44 SAVNE An eCVENCSUMMNIATY 6644444466684 he SOO OAs CHEE Ewe oe EEO 44 The RUM Screen IAVOUl 604 pees eee eee eee eae SOG EEE ES ORO eee ES e eee 45 Selecting a swath pattern 2 2 ee 51 Crea ie ATON ieee eae sees bee eed oe eee he eee eee Cah G eee 53 The Record DUTON 447 noe 4m ee eee eee ae tee eee eae a ees 55 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 7 Contents 5 8 Creating guidance with the FreeForm pattern 0 0000 ee eee 56 GANS CNNC 2 6226 age PAS E eee ee ea Ree ee eee ee cle eee 59 PAGING anaccess palh ose eae eee ae ES EERE eee eee a e OE So a ox 59 Swati management se oy caribaea Be hE So eee Gee ce ee ee ee i 60 Using the Guide to tabs nannaa deee me TaN eo ew See ee ee eee 62 Using Skip to fine tune nav
288. ls can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle Be prepared for sudden wheel movements 4 Tap Next in the next two screens that appear 5 Test various gain settings while you monitor the vehicle performance and the values in the Slew Time and Overshoot fields for the Turn Left phase a Adjust the New Gain field if required b Turn the front wheels completely to the right to begin the test The test is for the stop to stop position 122 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 c Tap Turn Left Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration Note The optimum gain setting has short slew time short millisecond reading and low overshoot percentage less than 5 8 6 Repeat Step 5 with Turn Right Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew 7 When you locate the best gain value do one of the following Tap OK to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory Tap Cancel to restart the calibration procedure FmX Integrated Display User Guide 123 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 124 Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction Note Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed direc
289. lt date time gt The following figure shows how an Event folder and its files are organized Ga bE Ag iata arith Farms Me adawhrank anuth Forde Planting Qu O S a i rates iS E X A Agdrens bs Acts Plata mth Farms Meadin nank auth Geld lant Enders x a estan E E My Documents coverage ah sho EB My Computer kr Coverage shin E S Local Dik C S Treck30_2006 08 17 01_21_6_557 dbt E G OWO AW Grive D 8 Trad _ 7006 08 17 01_71_36_557 sho Taniak Ler Mate E T Trace 2006 1 1 d e 667 shy 5 gt AgGrs mi Tracie _ 200408 1701_21_35_557 rE E gt AD Unes 3 Track30_2006 08 17 01_22_20_194 dbf E Gy Autopilot B Track3D _2006 08 1701_22_20_19 sho 58 Data T Track30_2006 06 17 01_22_20_199 shx T Track30_2006 08 17 01_22 30 199 tx S Track30 _ 2006 08 17 12 49_00_786 db TT 2006 08 17 12 49_00_TS4sho PS Track O 006 00 17 12 45 00_ 786 shu Fl Track 2006 08 17 17_49_00_ 786 tn TaskData folder The TaskData directory contains yield data collected in the ISO11783 BIN format which is read by Farm Works and other precision Agriculture software titles FmX Integrated Display User Guide 477 23 Data Management Files on the USB memory stick Field boundary and AB Line files There is one set of boundary and AB Line shapefiles for each field called e Boundary e Swaths Information stored in the Boundary shp file for fields with boundaries includes a boundary polygon Fields without boundaries do not cont
290. ly turned off White Rows have been turned off automatically by the system Field IQ Status tab Shows the engage status of each row on the implement Green Engaged Gray Section closed due to overlap Red Not engaged or section manually turned off Tap the blue arrows to toggle between the Row Status Indicator tab and the Field IQ Status tab Engage button Green Auto guidance engaged Gray Auto guidance can be engaged Red Auto guidance cannot be engaged 258 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 ale cerca ee Logging button Green Logging enabled Red Logging Tap a material in this example Corn to view more details Page 1 of the plugin tab Page 2 of the plugin tab Row Details tab ip SS O erame otne maserar yon ore wewn O O O O seremematen seer ewee FmX Integrated Display User Guide 259 10 The Field IQ Plugin Target rate Tap the button to select if Target 1 or Target 2 is shown or to select Manual to turn the Targt rate off Tap the button to decrease the Target rate by 1 tap the button to increase the Target rate by 1 Tap to go to page 1 or to page 2 of the plugin tab Tap to return to the previous plugin screen Tap to go to the Row Details tab Current sensor status Gate Setup Tap to go to the Gate Setup screen Density Tap to go to the Density screen where you can enter the density of the current product There ar various shades o
291. m You can also control for coverage logging Offline guidance display When the vehicle is online the center indicators are green When the vehicle moves offline the indicators change to red and move to either side depending on the direction to the line Tap to toggle between overhead and trailing views Information dialog Tap to display a larger amount of permanent text for operations relating to the display while viewing the Run dialog in the upper right hand corner Zoom and Pan Tap to show zoom and pan function buttons To zoom in and out tap the magnifying glass to pan in any direction tap the arrow buttons You can also tap the main map window to adjust the zoom level FmX Integrated Display User Guide 137 7 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Coverage theme the coverage and variety tracking settings Height coverage overlap variety and GPS quality can be shown Configuring the Row Guidance plugin on the FmX display Setting up the implement Before starting the Row Guidance setup on the display ensure that e All cables and components of the system are installed on the vehicle e The Autopilot system has been installed and configured with the NavController II firmware version 5 20 or later e When setting up the Autopilot plugin for use with the RG 100 system ensure that a vehicle profile that ends in RY is selected in the Vehicle Controller Setup screen and the XML header file in version 3 8 has
292. m to the display Note The CAN cable connects to either the C or D port on the rear of the FmX integrated display Note Connect the Display to Sonalert cable to Port A on the back of the display 2 Mount the IMD 600 as show in the platform kit instructions for the approved platform in which EZ Pilot is being installed Setup 1 Install the EZ Pilot system plugin for more information see the FmX integrated display Plug ins guide 2 From the Configuration screen select the EZ Pilot plugin and then tap Setup The EZ Pilot Settings screen contains four tabs Vehicle Engage Steering and Advanced Vehicle tab Wes Pike Engage Steering Advance Asle To Ameena Offset sems Beseption OCOS O Vehicle type The type of vehicle the EZ Pilot system will be steering Wheelbase The distance between the front and rear axles On tracked vehicles the wheelbase is exactly half the length of the track e lf the antenna is in front of the axle enter a Forward distance e lf the antenna is behind the axle enter a Back distance Note It is recommended that you measure the offset distance as accurately as possible within 3 an incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance FmX Integrated Display User Guide 145 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Sens peert O Axle to Antenna Offset Center the axle of the front or rear wheel to the top of the GPS antenna Note Make sure that you take this measurement to within 7
293. mX integrated display Vehicle guidance is controlled by either the manual guidance option the Autopilot automated steering system option the FieldLevel II plugins or the EZ Steer system plugin Several of these guidance options incorporate GPS receivers For more information see Chapter 6 The GPS Receiver FmX Integrated Display User Guide 103 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Manual guidance Manual guidance setup options enable you to configure the onscreen vehicle appearance and color hh 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Make sure the Manual Guidance plugin is installed For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 192 3 Select the plugin and then tap Setup Manual Guidance Settings 4 To change the vehicles on screen appearance select a vehicle type from the drop down list 5 Use the virtual keypad to enter measurements into each of the following fields Axle to Antenna Offset The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna If the antenna is in front of the axle enter a Forward distance If the antenna is behind the axle enter a Back distance Measure the distance accurately within 3 inches An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance Antenna Height Measure the antenna height vertically from the ground to the base of the antenna Wheelbase The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel 6 Tap O
294. me gt shp with attributes Track3D_ lt date time gt dbf Track3D_ lt date time gt shx Summary lt eventname gt _Summary txt AgGPS Summaries lt Client_Farm _Field_Event gt n For more information see Event folder page 477 Diagnostic Folder files ProgramLog txt Diagnostics ProgramLog old FmX integrated display logs FaultLog txt Autopilot faults service messages messages_ gz messages_ gz 1 9 Operating system logs core gz Debug data lt Date gt 472 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Description s fer Yield points with TaskData xml TaskData attribute ID TLG lt xxxxx gt bin TLG lt xxxxx gt bin Autopilot config Vehicle cfg Diagnostics Autopilot Diagnostics Preferences a Screenshot_ lt num gt png Diagnostics screenshots The AgGPS folder The AgGPS folder stores system utility files and subfolders that contain the input and output files of the FmX integrated display See Prescriptions page 67 and Folders on the USB memory stick page 472 The following diagram shows system utility files and the data folders in the AgGPS folder saved on a USB memory stick by the FmX integrated display Bi L AgGrS Ble Edt yew Favorites Tools Hep Q O F P sn E res S X 1D al CAB Lines Loy Autopia GData E Gh OAW Orive D3 firmware E ff Sandisk ImageMate E Becia AGPS Summaries E G An
295. mplement make and model Note In version 3 0 of the FmX integrated display the Vehicle Profile Location defaults to From Database new 1 Inthe Implement Controller Settings group tap Edit Edit Implement Controller 2 Do one of the following e To select anew make and model from a database of vehicles vdb on the FmX integrated display CompactFlash card In the Vehicle Profile Location list select From Database new b Tap Browse c Select the required vdb file and then tap Open If you need to obtain a vdb file contact your local reseller e To select an existing vehicle from a previously saved file cfg on the card FmX Integrated Display User Guide 379 13 The TrueTracker Plugin a Inthe Vehicle Profile Location list select From Saved File existing b Tap Browse c Select the required file and then tap Open 3 Tap Change Restore Implement The following message appears The specified implement model will now be selected on the Autopilot controller This will cause the Autopilot controller to be reset Do you want to continue 4 Tap OK to load the new configuration or tap Cancel to abort The Autopilot Controller will now be reinitialized message appears 5 Tap OK After the Trained and qualified warnings have appeared the file is loaded Engage button When implement steering is enabled the Run screen Engage button changes state It has two status indicators e The main button color whic
296. mplement that will be used to apply the material Material Layout Section Control Rate Control Row Monitor 4 Bin Tank Setup Row Offset Setup Description Bin Tank Setup Allows the system to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for e Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied e Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field FmX Integrated Display User Guide 265 10 The Field IQ Plugin Cee Row Offset Setup Row Offset Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that is e
297. mplete the form and then click Send Alternatively you can send an email to trimble_support trimble com Your comments Your feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to improve it with each revision Email your comments to ReaderFeedback trimble com 18 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview In this chapter System components Using the FmX integrated display Installing the display Connecting the display Inserting a memory stick into the USB socket External lightbar s CHAPTER The FmX integrated display is a touch sensitive screen that runs field management software This chapter introduces the FmX integrated display and some of the basic operations Also covered is the usage of the FmX integrated displays mapping and guidance features The chapter explains how to set up and use the field features and how to perform steering navigation FmX Integrated Display User Guide 19 2 Display Overview System components Pack out contents The box contains the following components e The FmX integrated display e The mount bracket and screws e GNSS antenna e GNSS antenna mounting plate e Power cables e Quick reference card e Documentation CD e Radio antenna RTK only D FmX integrated display RAM mount and screws 20 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Front view Bhegraied Wisplay Trimble Item Description ssid oO 12 touch sensitive scr
298. n in advance Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off after the set number of seconds Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area Coverage Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area FmX Integrated Display User Guide 311 10 The Field IQ Plugin Rate Control tab Adjust the rate control settings Field IQ Setup T E e a Off Section switching only implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a screen appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup e Advanced The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages 312 FmX Integrated Di
299. n of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work
300. nd conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License Warranty Remedies Trimbles sole liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranties set forth above shall be at Trimble s option to repair or replace any Product that fails to conform to such warranty Nonconforming Product and or issue a cash refund up to the purchase price paid by you for any such Nonconforming Product excluding costs of installation upon your return of the Nonconforming Product to Trimble in accordance with Trimble s product return procedures than in effect Such remedy may include reimbursement of the cost of repairs for damage to third party equipment onto which the Product is installed if such damage is found to be directly caused by the Product as reasonably determined by Trimble following a root cause analysis Warranty Exclusions and Disclaimer These warranties shall be applied only in the event and to the extent that a the Products and Software are properly and correctly installed con
301. nd do not have rigid protection Rinse the boom at the end of every day Do this to keep the system clean and remove to any corrosive materials Doing so will greatly extend the life of your machine Sensors should be re calibrated after approximately 1000 hours of use due to possible changes in light output This is generally done at the factory or authorized service center Sensors have an optimum operating range of 32 48 above the crop canopy 38 is the optimum height and must be measured from the top of the crop to the rectangular LED window of the sensor Make sure all wiring harness components remain fastened to the boom as to not obstruct the view of the sensors and are free of any pinch points from boom folding and movement FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The TrueGuide Plugin In this chapter m Connecting the TrueGuide implement guidance system m Configuring the TrueGuide implement guidance system m Calibrating the TrueGuide implement guidance system This chapter describes how to configure the TrueGuide implement guidance plugin to work with the FmX integrated display Note Firmware version 2 0 or later of the FmxX integrated display and the NavController II firmware version 5 10 are required for TrueGuide implement guidance The TrueGuide plugin for the Autopilot automated steering system and the FmX integrated display supports a second GPS receiver an FmX internal or external AgGPS
302. nd stops Retry and if the problem persists instead of centering the steering at the start of each cycle try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over Error Valve Connectors The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite direction to what Could Be Swapped was expected Retry and if the problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly Error No GPS A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure Error No Steering During the calibration cycle insufficient movement was sensed in order for the Response Detected calibration to complete If the problem persists the hydraulic installation could be faulty Error Unable To Determine A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone Retry and if the DZ Try Again problem persists contact Technical Support Proportional steering gain calibration Note Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration Perform the proportional steering gain calibration only when the TrueTracker system performance is less than satisfactory The proportional steering gain PGain setting enables you to reach a compromise between rapid steering response and stability Modifications to
303. ndem configuration or the left side cylinder of a single implement e The Tandem Dual plugin valve calibration relates to the rear implement cylinder in a tandem configuration or the right side cylinder of a single implement e Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode Please refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type To calibrate the valve module 1 From the Configuration screen select the Tandem Dual plugin and then tap Calibrate Tandem Dual Calibration Set throttle to 100 and press Start 2 Set the vehicle throttle to 100 3 Tap Start The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers This process takes approximately 8 10 minutes To manually calibrate the valve enter values in the three Manual Calibration fields and then tap OK 238 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Operating the Tandem Dual plugin Blade height indicators Once you install and configure tandem mode two implements each with a GPS receiver or dual mode a single implement with a GPS receiver at each end a second blade height indicator appears on the Run screen Description Primary left side implement height indicator Secondary right side implement height indicator These operate in the same way as the single receiver FieldLevel height indicators See
304. ne of the following Select the section to level Select None to level the whole field 3 Tap Best Fit The system uses the interior points that you collected to calculate the optimum slope of the field The design information appears in the design slope options and the Stats table An arrow appears on the image of the field to show the direction of fall If necessary you can manually adjust the angle of the slope However this may require a greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was the optimum Saving the new design Tap OK to close the AutoPlane screen The new design is saved as the default plane for this field When the field is opened the design loads but the color theme is not saved To re establish the color theme tap AutoPlane and then select Height or Cut Fill Reloading a field When you create a design for a field for example a target leveling plane the design is saved in the field folder The design files are associated with the field so if you close the field and then open it again the design reloads with the field With RTK GPS the position of the RTK base station is important to the heights used when the field was previously open If the base station is not accurately positioned in the same physical location you must reestablish the design over an existing benchmark to reestablish the height FieldLevel II plugin Leveling models In addition to AutoPlane and MultiPlane des
305. ne section and another tap the Next Path button on the Run screen If the Next Path button is not available tap Back and then tap Next Path Guidance jumps to the next section To cycle through the available sections keep tapping Next Path Note This selects a curve only if the curve is within the snapping zone Recording FreeForm guidance simultaneously with coverage When you select the FreeForm pattern on the Swaths Management screen you can select the When Logging option from the Record Swath drop down list When this option is selected the system activates FreeForm logging whenever coverage is being logged You can simultaneously turn on or off coverage and FreeForm logging with the Logging button on the Run screen Or if you have an external remote logging switch that controls coverage logging the system records FreeForm curves when the remote logging switch is enabled the remote switch turns on coverage which begins FreeForm logging However if a Field IQ system is connected the master switch on the Field IQ controller now controls FreeForm logging and not coverage itself Note Coverage switching will not create large numbers of short FreeForm sections FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Loading a line To load a line that you previously created in this field 1 From the Run screen tap the Swaths button The Swath Management screen appears 2 Doone of the following To load a
306. ned as the percentage vertical drop against horizontal travel A positive slope goes upwards and a negative slope goes downward For example if the slope is set to 1 the slope will drop 1 ft for every 100 ft horizontally traveled Vertical drop Actual slope 1 1 ft Horizontal travel 100 ft To view or change the Point and Slope gradient tap Edit on the FieldLevel I tab Alternatively tap the or buttons to move the slope by the Slope Adjust amount defined in the FieldLevel settings under Leveling model Point and Slope Slope Adjust Driving in Flat Plane Laser and Flat Plane GPS modes When driving in Flat Plane mode the Laser and GPS options operate the same The Flat Plane Laser model results in a mathematically flat surface This means that the plane does not follow the curvature of the Earth but remains on a plane Use this model when the land has previously been leveled with a laser system and you want to touch up the field The Flat Plane GPS model results in an equipotential surface meaning that the design surface is curved with surface of the Earth Note Neither of these models can be used with a laser system the entire FieldLevel IT system only works with GPS Design enter the Plane Editor where you can edit the Design plane Bench or Rebench create a benchmark see Benchmarks page 202 Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height raise the blade by the Blade Step amount Fm
307. new setting or tap Cancel to exit FmX Integrated Display User Guide 115 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 116 Calibrating the AutoSense device 1 2 3 4 Select Autosense Calibration from the list on the Vehicle Controller Setup screen From the Location drop down list select the AutoSense position From the Orientation drop down list select the AutoSense orientation Tap OK to confirm selections Calibrating the steering angle sensor Perform steering sensor calibration to convert the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle measurement Note Complete this calibration before you attempt to calibrate the steering deadzone or roll correction procedures Note Perform the steering sensor calibration only if a rotary potentiometer is installed on the vehicle Ifan AutoSense device is selected as the steering angle sensor the Steering Sensor screen does not appear Lamel igh This calibration requires the vehicle to be in motion Ensure that you Perform this procedure on a hard level surface that is free of obstructions Maintain a tractor speed above 1 6 kph 1 mph Watch the Sensor Angle field for a symmetrical angle reading at the steering extremes while you manually steer the wheels to full right and full left Watch the Sensor Angle field to ensure that the angle reading is near zero while you manually steer the wheels straight ahead To run the steering sensor calibration FmX
308. nfiguration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home buiton When prompted to close the field tap Yes FmX Integrated Display User Guide 71 4 Display Setup Accessing the system configuration settings To configure the system settings do the following 1 From the Home screen tap xK 2 Tap Configure The Configuration screen appears with the currently installed plugins listed on the left of the screen Configuration 5 ystem Mew System 3 Tap System and then tap one of the following Setup Set up the system See Configuring the display page 73 Calibrate Calibrate the touchscreen so that it reads your selections accurately The FmX integrated display ships with the touchscreen already calibrated A CAUTION Do not use a sharp item such as a pencil to press the touchscreen as you may damage the surface of the screen Use your finger to press the screen Diagnostics View information about Serial Communications CAN Bus System Information Advanced Power Levels e CPU Save Config Save the current system configuration Switch Config Switch to a saved system configuration 72 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Password access Any Setup or Calibrate button marked with a padlock icon Ef is protected by two passwords Password type Description Administration password Your password Th
309. ng screen Vehicle Controller Setup Steering Steering command override Bypasses the normal steering command to the wheels With this feature you can force a certain angle of turn and make sure that the system responds as expected Steering angle Shows the required and actual steering angles The required angle is that which the system is trying to attain and the actual is where the system calculates the wheels are pointing PWM status Shows the current PWM signals being sent to the electro hydraulic valve This is an indication of whether the system is attempting to turn left or right Engage button Engages Disengages the system and shows current engage status FmX Integrated Display User Guide 497 24 Troubleshooting Vehicle Diagnostics Details screen Vehicle Controller Setup Details Mane eset eee Vehicle and configuration specific diagnostics up to 9 diagnostics can be shown e Accelerometers The raw voltage and scaled G force for each of the system s accelerometers Vehicle voltage The input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system from the vehicle s electrical system The raw voltage and scaled degrees per second of each of the system s gyroscopes 498 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24 Autopilot Faults screen The Autopilot Faults screen lists all faults on the Autopilot controller Autopilot Faults Two separate lists show e Any faults that are currently act
310. nostic information Display configuration information To view display configuration information tap A at the top right of the display The Home screen shows e Display firmware information e Autopilot controller information e GPS receiver and correction method information Vehicle make and model USB memory stick information To view information about the USB memory stick that is in the display select the System option and then tap Diagnostics on the Configuration screen The card information tab appears on the System Diagnostics screen Viewing vehicle diagnostic information From the Configuration screen select the Autopilot option and then tap Diagnostics The Vehicle Controller Setup Guidance screen appears There are five parts to the Vehicle Diagnostics menu e Guidance screen e Steering screen e Details screen e Fault log screen e View warning screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 495 24 Troubleshooting Vehicle Diagnostics Guidance screen ev A graph of offline distance over time It is useful for diagnosing problems with the vehicle coming online and staying online Cc CO a I i a nee s a i e oee a Re eetg em Engage button Engages disengages the system and shows the current engage state When this button is red tap it to see the fault that is preventing automatic mode 496 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24 Vehicle Diagnostics Steeri
311. nt 0 0 00 eee 412 Setting the front back offset 1 tt ee ee eee 413 Calibrating the front back offset 2 ee ee 413 Stuno the lead Me vee e epea este Sate Hae Bee eee eee ee oo eee 413 The Serial Data Input Plugin 1 2 ee ee ee nnna 415 Connecting serial data input 42n44R04 5 amp Goa e RSE eS Pe Gah SOAG RGR EES OH 416 Confourine senaldata INU sss aveees Pech te deieaa age shat heaes et aeeugea 416 The Productivity Monitoring Plugin 1 1 ee anannan 419 Eor En a o ae ae ee era ee ee eer ee ee ee eee 420 Configuring the Productivity Monitoring plugin 0 0 00 000000088 420 OpeMlOy 230 602668 486o a bee CoE EES oe te eee oe oo eee a 422 The Yield Monitoring Plugin 1 2 eee eee ee nnna 423 TOOUCHON LataeetaGe Geese euttetwee sass pease ees beet eed e eet aes ee 424 Dem 2b 5a4 eran ee aee heen seuss Se hee eee ee eee eee Pee ee 424 Auto WIE detec essre serrera tahaki aee eden baae beta es os 424 Operating the Yield Monitoring plugin 2 0 0 22 eee ee ee 424 Yield Monitoring Run screen p lt 555 2422ob Geo eee Ree EEE SER ee RES RES S 424 General setup information 1 0 ee ee 427 Setting up the Yield Monitoring plugin 0 0 00 eee eee ee ee 427 DCMI TDs aoa eee dee eee aesduerseeeae ooens betes Seong aes as oe 428 Opera lon AD ee ee en ee ee ee ee es ee ee ee eee 429 C100 GAD rarse er Gece es tesa eee eee teen ce eaa we eee bee bee ee 430 Mp Lerend
312. nt 9 Tap OK to return to the Granular Calibration Screen 10 Place a clean empty container under the spreader to capture the material dispensed during the calibration and then tap Calibrate A N CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 11 The Granular Calibration screen appears Granular Calibration Rate Controller 5015561943 Calibrate Enter the desired amount of material to be dispensed then press Start Amount of Material to be Dispensed 100 00 Ibs Target Rate 200 00 Ibs a Target Speed 6 00 mph uy FmX Integrated Display User Guide 327 10 The Field IQ Plugin 12 Enter the following values Amount of Material to be Dispensed This is the amount dispensed during the calibration Target Rate Target Speed 13 To begin the calibration tap Start and then follow the on screen instructions 14 Select the nfo tab to view the system s operational limits based on the RPM limits target rates and application width Granular Calibration 15 Tap OK Operating in the field 1 From the Home screen tap eft 2 From the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK 3 From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK 328 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting up the Field IQ system f
313. nt must be at least 50 meters 160 feet from the A point Tap Set B The new AB Line appears on screen To extend the line drive further along it and then tap Set B again Tap Done To create a straight A line by selecting one point and the angle l 2 ss Se Fe From the Swath Management screen select the AB Line field pattern Enter an access path if required See Adding an access path page 59 In the A Heading window enter the angle that you want the line to be on or select a previous AB Line to use its heading The default angle is the same as the previous AB Line heading Tap New Straight The Run screen appears Drive to the start of the line and then tap Set A Tap Use A The new A line appears Tap Done Creating a curved line l From the Swath Management screen select the Curve field pattern from the drop down list Enter an access path if required See Adding an access path page 59 Tap New Curve The Run screen appears Drive to the start point of the curve and then tap Set A FmX Integrated Display User Guide 53 3 Getting Started To stop recording your exact path and create a straight section of line tap the Record button See page 55 5 Drive the curve until you reach the end point and then tap Set B The new curve appears Creating a headland A Headland is a straight AB Line or an A line pattern that is confined inside a boundary This boundary is called the headland
314. ntered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the rear row Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Field IQ Setup Material Layout Section Canbral aoe Section Control Module z Location setup Set RL eee Ta Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 261 266 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 EEE dl Section Control Module Tap Setup to configure the section control module s their location on the Setup implement and the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control modules you
315. ntouched to use as a reference point Measure a master benchmark and then flag this point so you can easily find it again FmX Integrated Display User Guide 6 Water Management 9 Drive the vehicle to the start of the line where you want to install tile or clean a ditch for the most efficient method it is recommended that this is the high end of the line Open the WM Survey tab and then select Survey at the top of the list Select the Design Type and Design Size m ee eg PELE a Tap Record and then drive the line all the way to the end point for the most efficient method it is recommended that the end point is where the tile line is to be connected to a main or outlet Tap Record again to stop the recording Note The Record button turn greens when activated and turns grey when deactivated You have now successfully surveyed the line where the tile is to be installed or the ditch is to be cleaned FmX Integrated Display User Guide 249 9 Water Management Designing a section line 1 From the Run screen tap Design in the WM Drain tab select the Section Line that you want to design in the Current Section field and then tap Edit Design Design Info allows you to check the design parameters at any point along the design Enter the distance in the Distance field or select it by tapping on the screen The Design Info tab will then show the depth elevation and slope information for that point
316. o ee 263 Enoe e e aa bead eek ee teense aeeen hee bah eepaetse oe se eheae 265 PECHOI COMO 1d 2oecueeeeeeepeece Shapes eee ceeds see Gee ee eee ee 266 Rave COMMOlGO 25 42665 5 68605 22 eee eee eee pee eee se eee oso eee as 268 Row Monitoring IO 624 aceeeg eee eet gage eee bent eee eee e oe haeeeus 271 SON e eeey rke eea aE 212 Peon eee eea a ee erener a Goa ee a 273 Material Setup Complete screen nnana OHO SO ESE EG OHA OOS 219 Calibrating the implement liftswitch 0 0 0 0 0000000004 274 Calibrating the Rawson modules 5 24 ic aeeb erent uence tand eieteavaa 274 Calibrating the PWM valves 1 2 000 2 ee 278 Operaine mthe field fe paeeeohud Feet acer eeh eee eee eee eens eee sn 281 Setting up the Field IQ system for Air Seeding 0 0 0 eee eee ee ee 281 Mr o 24 nee tet eee eta estat 4d dose gete se a eee eee eee oA 282 PAVOUWd0 2 op bbee ae to5iene pete eee eee beeen ee eee ee sees ee a 284 DECON COM OI 2 eee et eee eee ee ee ae hd eRe Ee eee Ea Ee ERE SEs 285 Rae Cono tiD 25ih2 eee sees che bee eee e eae oe ae ee eee ek ee ee oe 287 ROW MONTONE GAD 5 2 ang exh oem eee a Be So a ee oe eS ee ee eS ee 290 SCUSOlS Ora anne ec tee eee eee a ae en ew eee he ee eee 291 Pera am tab 46 hasan eee eh eke aude ee ene oP eee eee oes oe 292 Material Setup Complete screen naaa aaa eee 292 Calibrating the implement lift switch os 4ag e8 eae ee hoe e Cake ee hee 293 Canpa e tie OCICS 6 444 nes pore et ees ose GRE et eeeee
317. o log to the end of the line keep the default Suffix field OD 0A 6 Enter the log interval This determines how regularly the data is written to the file The system is now configured to receive remote data from an external device FmX Integrated Display User Guide 417 16 The Serial Data Input Plugin 418 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Productivity Monitoring Plugin In this chapter The Productivity Monitoring plugin enables the FmX integrated display to interface with an Enalta CDA 1000 display for sugar cane m Configuring the Productivity harvesting Monitoring plugin E Installation This chapter explains how to combine the two m Operation systems so that the information from both displays appears on the FmX integrated display Note To use this plugin you must have an Enalta CCT system FmX Integrated Display User Guide 419 17 The Productivity Monitoring Plugin Installation 1 Install the FmX integrated display harness and GPS receiver See Installing the display page 35 2 Connect the Enalta sensors to a serial port on the FmX integrated display harness Configuring the Productivity Monitoring plugin 1 Install the Productivity Monitoring plugin See Adding or removing a plugin page 192 2 On the Configuration screen select the Productivity Monitoring plugin and then tap Setup Productivity Monitoring Setup 3 In the Port list select the port on the FmX integr
318. o p FmX Integrated Display User Guide 25 2 Display Overview 26 Virtual number pad The virtual number pad works in the same way as the virtual keyboard Select the Metric Feet_Inches or Decimal Feet button to change the units Tip When you change units the number value in the window is automatically converted to the new unit so select the correct units before you enter a number value Drop down boxes Tractor 2 WOMFV A drop down box if provided lists the options you can select from the current list To select an item 1 Tap the list once to open the drop down list 2 Tap the required item from the list The drop down list disappears and the selected item appears in the field Slider bars Slider bars appear on several of the configuration screens A slider bar shows how extreme a selection is If you use a slider bar to select the value it is apparent that you are nearing the extreme value FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 There are two ways to use a slider bar e To move up by one increment tap on the slider bar in the direction that you want to move the pointer e To slide the pointer a Touch the screen where the pointer is located and hold your finger on the screen b Move your finger along the axis in the direction that you want to move the pointer c Remove your finger when you are satisfied with the position of the pointer Lists A li
319. ocut Rows must be controlled manually Crop Overlap When more than one crop variety is detected in the head the system will stop accumulating variety statistics Use this setting to adjust the percentage of crop overlap that is allowed before the system stops accumulating variety statistics Select a value between 1 and 25 For best results the recommended setting is 10 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 429 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Crop tab Yield Monitoring i PLUSA p J R f Enter information about the crop you are monitoring Geor E T Select the crop that is currently being harvested Units Select the unit of measure for the crop type Bushels acre Lbs acre Tons acre Hundred Weight acre Note When this is selected the Bushel Weight field is automatically set to 100 Ibs e Bushels hectare e Kgs hectare e Tonnes hectare Bushel Weight The weight of a single bushel of crop Standard Moisture Set the cutoff point between a wet crop and a dry crop Set these values depending on what you want the map to look like 430 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Map Legend tab Yield Monitoring Setup Enter information about the yield and moisture values that appear in the Yield Monitoring Run screen See page 441 Description High Yield The highest expected yield for the current event Low Yield The lowest expected yield for the current event High M
320. oisture The highest expected moisture for the current event The lowest expected moisture for the current event Serial tab Yield Monitoring Setup val her licen jd FmX Integrated Display User Guide 431 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Set the sensor output values e E Peakicn Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Error messages State 1 During boot up 60 Series Ensure that the correct cable is installed e Moisture unit Ensure the display is communicating with e Head unit the CAN bus system diagnostics serial port Port A B is there another value other than zero for CAN messages 60 Series Combines Check if Crop Type e Moisture sensor will change on the Greenstar display after e CC1 unit Crop Type on the FmX has been changed e Cab unit 70 Series Combines Change the Crop Type e Corner post in the command center and make sure it YM 2000 changes on the FmX integrated display e Armrest unit 70 Series e Cannot detect YM 2000 Raise the head up or down to see if the display will show a change for header height If Step 1 and Step 2 work log field data e Serial port State 2 During boot up Never sees the armrest header unit 1 Ensure the display is communicating with moisture sensor or reports which the CAN bus system diagnostics serial one is not visible by the FmX port Port A B is there another value integrated display other than zero for CAN messages
321. ollowing Time Based the pulse interval in seconds in the Time field the pulse duration in milliseconds in the Duration field Distance Based the Lead Time See Calibrating the lead time for your implement page 412 Pulse the Distance in meters decimal feet feet and inches in the Distance field The pulse occurs at each increment of this distance Note The first pulse occurs at the A point Pulse remote output is not recommended for Headland patterns e the duration of the pulse in milliseconds ms in the Duration field e the distance in the Within Distance field The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this distance of being online If the vehicle is more than this distance offline no pulse occurs When Within the Lead Time See Calibrating the lead time for your implement page 412 Area Feature Note The pulse occurs only when Remote Output is enabled You must also enable Remote Output for each area feature individually in the Mapping plugin setup See Creating an area feature page 92 When Engaged _ nothing There are no options to set Remote output occurs when the system is engaged 5 Tap OK Remote output is now configured If you are using Distance Based Pulse or When Within Area Feature calibrate the Lead Time setting to match your implement Calibrating the lead time for your implement There is usually a gap between the time when the system generates a pulse and the time when that pulse triggers an ac
322. on Session Time The length of the current field session Short term XTE A vehicle pass to pass Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur within less than 15 minutes Speed The current vehicle speed Steering Angle The angle reported by the rotary potentiomenter or the AutoSense device Survey Area The total area of the current survey Survey Cut Fill The difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When Fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height Survey Points The number of survey points that have been created Swath Length The length of the current guidance line Note FreeForm curves are made up of line segments so the Swath Length value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves Swath Number The swath number L left R right Note FreeForm curves are made up of line segments so the Swath Number value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves Total Vol Applied N The total volume of nitrogen applied Total Boundaries Area The total area between the current boundaries Total Vol Applied NH3 The total volume of anhydrous ammonia applied Total See
323. on of the controller in the cab or enter the orientation angles directly by choosing the Direct Entry tab The image represents the position of the controller looking down from the top with the nose of the tractor pointing to the top of the An image represents the current mounting orientation of the controller The image is shown as though You are looking down on the vehicle from above The top of the screen points to the nose of the vehicle 2 Use the buttons to select the orientation of the controller Ifthe controller is set at a sloped angle the vehicle profile will set the NavController orientation Note Install the NavController as described in the vehicle install instructions If custom angles are used the on screen image of the controller does not appear 3 Tap OK to accept the new orientation or tap Cancel to exit FmX Integrated Display User Guide 113 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 114 Configuring the manual override sensitivity Manual Override sensitivity calibration is valid only for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function The software automatically detects whether or not the vehicle configuration includes this type of sensor and provides this option if required One way to disengage the Autopilot system is to turn the steering wheel This is called the Manual Override When you turn the steering wheel there is a voltage spike that then tapers off This spike and
324. on the controller Non GPS mode The FmX integrated display sends commands to the controller If communication cannot be established it may be because the controller is set to Non GPS mode A message appears and gives you the option to continue in Non GPS mode Ifthe controller is set to Non GPS mode the display still shows and records as applied rates If a prescription is loaded target rates appear for reference but these are not used by the controller In this mode you must vary rates manually on the controller Loss of communication In GPS mode if communication with a Rawson controller is lost the display does not report an error until you cross into a region of the prescription that specifies a different rate In Non GPS mode the display has no way of knowing when communication with a Rawson controller is lost Special note on using a Rawson Accu Rate controller The display can send rates and record coverage for the Rawson Accu Rate controller for only one drive at a time either Drive A or Drive B To correctly send rates to the controller and log coverage based on the drive master switch do the following e To operate both drives set the drive that is not being controlled by the display to Non GPS mode see above e Connect the FmX integrated display Variable Rate cable to the COM port that matches the drive To control Drive A connect to COM A To control Drive B connect to COM B e When you use Drive B
325. on the headland circuit where a straight line back to the start will not cut off part of the pattern 9 Tap Close HL The new headland appears 54 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Creating a pivot 1 From the Swath Management screen select the Pivot field pattern from the drop down list 2 Tap New Pivot The Run screen appears 3 Drive to a point on the outermost rut of the pivot and then tap Set A 4 Follow the pivot rut around to the end and then tap Set B The Enter Distance to Pivot Field Edge screen appears 5 Enter the distance or the number of rows from the current path to the outside of the pivot and then tap OK The pivot appears Adjusting the outer edge radius The pivot has an outer edge radius that is used to calculate coverage area Once you create a pivot you can adjust the outer edge radius 1 From the Run screen tap Swaths The Swath Management screen appears 2 Select the pivot to be adjusted from the list of available pivots Note The default is the AB curve 3 Inthe Outer Edge Radius window adjust or enter the value that represents the distance from the pivot center to the outer edge and tap OK The Swath Management screen appears 4 To update the pivot tap Load The Run screen appears with the new pivot dimensions The Record button When you create guidance based on the curve or headland pattern the Record button is available The Record button ena
326. onally installed Configuring the Vehicle tab 1 From the Home screen tap K 2 Inthe Current Configurations screen tap Configure 3 Select the Autopilot option and then tap Setup Vehicle Controller Setup nET 4 Inthe Connector list select the port on the FmX integrated display that the Autopilot system controller is connected to 5 The Current Selection displays the current vehicle vdb profile that is loaded on the display To change this setting see Selecting the vehicle page 109 6 Inthe Vehicle Color list select the preferred color for the vehicle icon that appears on the Run screen 106 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Configuring the Engage tab Vehicke Engage Stecning Advanced Gparaior Timem CO era Leg 1 Inthe Engage tab select Operator Timeout 2 Inthe Enter The EZ Steer Operator Timeout screen enter a value and then tap OK 3 Inthe Coverage Log list select either Manual or When Engaged Configuring the Steering tab Vehick Lagg Sheer Advanced Hide Increment Era of Row Wanna Drs Walkie On Speed Legacy Sensors 1 Inthe Steering tab select Nudge Increment 2 Inthe Enter The Nudge Increment Distance screen enter the distance the Run screen Nudge buttons move the line back to the correct path and then tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 107 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 3 Select End of Row Warning Dist 4 Inthe
327. or Anhydrous A N WARNING NH is an irritant and corrosive to the skin eyes respiratory tract and mucous membranes and is dangerous if not handled properly It may cause severe burns to the eyes lungs and skin Skin and respiratory related diseases could be aggravated by exposure It is recommended that protective gloves boots slicker and or pants and jacket and chemical splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times Make sure that you have set your implement to Tillage or Spraying and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs For information on thistab Se Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Material Select your Field IQ application type Anhydrous Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the material FmX Integrated Display User Guide 329 10 The Field IQ Plugin Seting pemon O Anydrous Units Select the unit of measure e Lbs actual N Pounds kg of nitrogen per acre hectare e Lbs NH3 Pounds kg of anhydrous per acre hectare Application Rate Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 1 Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies
328. ork with an Chapter 17 The monitoring Enalta display to record workflow Productivity Monitoring Plugin 190 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Overview of Plugins 8 Viewing the currently installed plugins To view the active plugins do the following 1 From the Home screen tap x gurations a Hew System a Display ia English Hipis Feat and inches Reyboand ABC DEF webs ie bee Hol Ayvanlalbbe Hew lmplenwent AS 74 swath width 6A 10 77 application width i mows Configure 2 From the Current Configurations screen tap Configure The Configuration screen appears with the currently installed plugins listed on the left of the screen mE Autopilot Vehicle Calibrate Tig GPs Receiver Diagnostics Ae Implement New Implement 1 Save Config 3 Switch Config 3 Add Remove OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 191 8 Overview of Plugins Adding or removing a plugin 1 On the Configuration screen tap Add Remove plugin Select Active Plugins 2 Ifnecessary enter the Administration password see Password access page 73 In the Select Active Plugins screen you will see the available but not yet installed plugins are in the Inactive Plugins list on the left the currently installed plugins are in the Active Plugins list on the right 3 Do one of the following To install a plugin from the nactive Plugins list tap it and then tap Add gt The plugin moves to t
329. ote This setting is used for navigation in the Run screen when you tap Skip to adjust the guidance line the guidance line moves across by this number of rows Enter the following implement measurements Swath Width Set the distance between guidance passes Application The applied width of the tool or boom This measurement sets the width of the Width coverage logging and mapping Application Measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the point on the implement where Offset coverage logging will be mapped The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type e Rear axle on front steering tractor and self propelled sprayer e Front axle on a harvester and 4x4 tractor e Center of tracks on a tracked tractor Rows Number of rows that are covered by the implement Left Right Offset Measured from the center of the vehicle to the center of the implement or header This measurement adjusts the tractor path so that an offset implement is centered on the guidance line FmX Integrated Display User Guide 185 7 Implement Configuration Geometry Imphament Type Measurements Geometry Overlap switches Hitch te Ground Contact Point 1 0 0 D Use the settings on the Geometry tab to set up the measurements required for accurate implement modeling Type Select the implement type The antenna offsets are required when a GPS antenna is mounted on the implement for TrueGuide or accurate modeling Hitch to Ground
330. ou also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional ifthe application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute t
331. ours for the fluid to reach operating level especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console 384 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 e Ifyou perform the calibration while the system is still cold repeat both the Deadzone and the Proportional gain calibration procedures once the system is at operating temperature To configure the automated steering deadzone 1 Place the vehicle in an area that is free of hazards 2 Raise the implement 3 Select the Implement Automatic Deadzone procedure from the calibration list See page 382 Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration 4 Tap Next to continue The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen appears 5 Tap Next in the two screens that appear next Note Read the onscreen instructions on each page Follow the instructions The system will automatically move the coulter wheels in both directions several times 6 Tap Start The system engages and performs the calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 385 13 The TrueTracker Plugin Automated Deadzone error messages If a calibration cycle is unable to complete successfully one of the following error messages appears Message Error Steering Close To Before the calibration cycle could be completed the measured steering angle End Stops approached the e
332. p A master benchmark and several benchmarks shown in plan view Note You can choose for coordinates to be recorded with X Y and Height offsets from the master benchmark position See Configuration page 200 Note You do not need to drive over a benchmark to be able to delete it FmX Integrated Display User Guide 203 9 Water Management 204 Creating a benchmark 1 Place the GPS antenna in a known repeatable location that will not change throughout the leveling of a field X Tip Mark this location with flags or some other marker so that you can return to the exact spot 2 Stop the vehicle 3 Tap Bench on the WM Survey tab Note If the FieldLevel II plugin is installed you can tap Bench on that instead Both Bench buttons have the same effect 4 A countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then the system creates the benchmark To stop the averaging during the countdown tap Bench again Note If you are within the circle around an existing benchmark a new mark is not created Rebenching When you are within the circle around an existing benchmark the following message appears on the Run screen If you tap either of the Rebench buttons when the receiver is within the circular radius of a benchmark the receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark Re establishing a benchmark In the FieldLevel II configuration under the Relative Heights tab there is an option to Force Re Bench If yo
333. page 357 Note The values in the table are only an example the grower consultant must develop these rates Also be aware of the rate range ability of your specific rate controller and nozzles used to achieve these results FmX Integrated Display User Guide 351 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin Example of field calibration The photo shows a grower using a GreenSeeker hand held to measure the NDVI of a crop the grower knew the approximate desired rate for Note The NDVI can also be measured using the GreenSeeker RT200 by observing NDVI values on the GreenSeeker Run screen or using the calibration function Operating the GreenSeeker Plugin 352 The GreenSeeker system requires the one of the following applications to be active on the FmX integrated display e The Field IQ system e Serial Rate Control system Calibrate the GreenSeeker system through the Run screen on the FmX integrated display Before calibration you must collect or input reference strip data to the FmX integrated display Do this with either the boom mounted sensors on the RT200 or with the GreenSeeker hand held sensor prior to application If you use the RT200 interface module for variable rate control you must set up the application equipment and rate controller to match the expected delivery rate commands Preparing the GreenSeeker plugin To configure variable rate application on the FmX integrated display do the following 1 Power up the RT200 inter
334. peration Ensure the implement is safe to operate 1 Tap OK Enter a value for each of the following Flow Meter Type select an option from the drop down list 306 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Flowmeter Calibration enter the number from the flow meter tag MinFlow enter the required minimum flow rate for the system Use this setting to keep the control valve and flow meter above the minimum operating level 2 Tap Run Calibration and then follow the on screen instructions 3 Ifused select the connector that the pressure sensor is connected to and then enable the sensor 4 Tap Run Calibration and then follow the on screen instructions 5 Tap OK to return to the Configuration screen Operating in the field 1 From the Home screen tap ee 2 From the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK 3 From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK Setting up the Field IQ system for Spreading Make sure that you have set your implement to Spreading and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs Material page 308 Layout page 309 Sensors page 317 Operation page 318 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 307 10 The
335. play User Guide Water Management 9 Configuring settings for all leveling models Rem Description Allowable Select the Allowable Cut Fill Range field and then enter the acceptable warning Cut Fill Range distance When Auto mode is engaged and the blade is outside this range for more than three seconds a warning appears VDOP Level Vertical Dilution of Precision DOP is a measure of the vertical accuracy of the GPS signal If the VDOP reaches this value a warning message appears A VDOP setting of less than 3 is recommended Blade Step Tap the Blade Step field and then enter the amount that you require the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down by the or v offset buttons Course Blade Coarse mode enables you to offset the target height in large increments with a Step single tap such as a 0 2 fill Select the Coarse Blade Step field and then enter the amount that you require the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down in Coarse mode Antenna Select the Antenna Height field and then enter the height of the antenna above the Height lower edge of the blade On grade Select the On grade Limit field and then enter the limit Limit This sets the distance the blade can move before the green blade height indicators change to thin red arrows At twice this distance the height indicators become thick red arrows See Blade position indicators page 220 Disengage When you disable Auto while scraping a fiel
336. plement s actual speed drops Speed below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds When Outside Field Switch off The system will not apply outside the boundary area Boundary Operate The system will apply outside the boundary area Material Controlled Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled By individually Disabled The Material is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Rate Snapping Enabled Shows the applied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value Material Setup Complete screen When you have completed setting up a new material the Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field IQ Setup Wizard e Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen 338 FmX Integrated Display User Guide A The Field IQ Plugin 10 Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 From the Field JQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4 Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the modules WARNING The anhydrous valve calibration requires the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement mu
337. plied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value 318 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Material Setup Complete screen When you have completed setting up a new material the Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select e Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field IQ Setup Wizard e Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 From the Field JQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4 Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the Rawson modules for spreading Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rawson control module or rate control module set up to control the rate 1 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate 2 From the Field Q Calibration screen select the module you want to calibrate Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first See above Field IQ Calibration 3 Select the first module to calibrate The Planter Calibration screen appears FmX Integrated Display User Guide 319
338. plug in to the FmX integrated display such as the Field IQ system Alternatively the application rates may also be sent via the Serial Rate Control option as a system plugin Definitions The following terms occur throughout this chapter and on the GreenSeeker plugin software Becoming familiar with the terms will make using the GreenSeeker plugin much easier Growing Degree Days A measurement of heat units since planting above a prescribed base temperature Nitrogen fertilizer NVDI Normalized Difference Vegetation Index Commonly used to measure plant health and vigor NDVI NIR_reflected Red_reflected NIR_reflected Red_reflected Nitrogen Use Efficiency A percentage of nitrogen taken up by the plant For example an NUE of 60 means that 6 Ibs of nitrogen fertilizer is expected to be used by the plant that year for every 10 lbs applied For more information go to www nue okstate edu made available to the plant by the environment mineralization etc and importantly this year s expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen Response Index Provides an indication of how the crop will respond this season to additional N GDD NUE NRS VI Vegetation Index A value that is calculated or derived from sets of remotely sensed data that is used to quantify plant health stress and vigor W Nitrogen Rich Strip This reference strip area allows for determining the amount of nitrogen being VRA V
339. points of interest or areas to avoid There are three types of field feature Configure field features that you will want to add to your fields and then assign up to four of them to buttons These buttons appear on the Mapping tab on the Run screen You can then use the buttons to add field features to your map while driving isis beeen Feature button set up to represent a river Feature button set up to represent a fence Feature button set up to represent an exclusion Area feature drawn with the Boundary feature button Note For more information on setting up the Feature buttons see Feature mapping page 89 40 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Starting a field Getting Started 3 This is the screen where you either re open an existing field or create a new field You must select a Client Farm Field and Event in that order Note The first time that you use the Field Selection screen there are no existing fields so you must create one 1 From the Home screen tap t Implement 2 From the Configuration Selection screen tap OK Selected Implement System Language English Units Feet and Inches Keyboard ABCDEF Wehiche Tractor 2WOMFWD 123 14 O swath width 14 0 application width 8 rows 14 0 Seva wich 14 0 application width a rows FmX Integrated Display User Guide 41 3 Getting Started 3 Doone of the following Create a n
340. position is directly on the AB Line This ensures there is no cross track error 9 Park the tractor and exit the cab Evaluate the tire track pattern between the first and return paths 10 Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance Also note whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results in Table 11 on page 127 Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right FmX Integrated Display User Guide 125 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 11 Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Use Table 11 on page 127 to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run ret ees fe ty Man MEn Be 5 e rE r as a os i a i Lf oo e i oo nhs am TA Rig Left offset Calculating the roll offset Flag offset method 1 Remove any implement from the vehicle The vehicle draw bar must be centered 2 Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m 1320 ft in length 3 Reset the Roll Offset value to 0 zero on the Roll Correction screen See 3 Configuring the roll offset correction page 125 4 Create an AB Line 5 Start anew pass Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable Stop the tractor midway through the pass Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Lin
341. r Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify which wire is controlling the sensor FmX Integrated Display User Guide 291 10 The Field IQ Plugin Operation tab Field IQ Setup Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting controls when to shut the system down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override This setting maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops Speed below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds When Outside Field Switch off The system will not apply outside the boundary area Boundary Operate The system will apply outside the boundary area Material Controlled Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled By individually Disabled The Material is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Rate Snapping Enabled Shows the applied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value Material Setup Complete s
342. r lowered Notes If Ports A or B are used by other cabling you can use the port replicator on the cable to connect the remote logging switch If you use a different switch the connections may be different than described in this example FmX Integrated Display User Guide Advanced Configuration 22 A relay must be used to control coverage logging when voltage is present at the switch The following schematic shows the relay between the display and the switch Battery Standard duty 17W 30A 4 pin relay Boom solenoid Battery For more information on configuring the implement see Adjusting the implement settings page 184 Enable the external switch To enable the external switch 1 From the Home screen tap A Tap Configure Select the implement and then tap Setup 2 3 4 Select the Extras tab 5 Inthe Remote Log Switch list select either Connector A or Connector B 6 In the Logging When list select either High or Low Description Logging when high The system records logging when the switch is turned on and stops recording when the switch is turned off Logging when low The system records logging when the switch is turned off and stops recording when the switch is turned on Note When remote logging is set to Connector A or Connector B the Logging button on the Run screen is disabled Use the external switch to turn logging on or off FmX Integrated Display User Guide 463 22 Advanced
343. r to keep the vehicle on the same contour To move to the next levee turn the vehicle around and change the Up Hill direction To step the blade up or down use the and and v buttons to achieve the required offset and then follow the lightbar to keep the correct grade FmX Integrated Display User Guide 233 9 Water Management Tandem Dual plugin Tandem scraper configuration The tandem scraper configuration describes the practice of towing two scrapers one behind the other This type of leveling provides increased efficiency as it allows for the blade of each scraper to be controlled independently from the other This means more dirt can be cut before you have to drive to a fill area and remove dirt from the scraper buckets Primary GPS Secondary GPS antenna antenna Tandem Scraper system Dual scraper configuration The dual scraper configuration describes a single scraper with two GPS antennas one at each end of the blade This allows for control of the roll of the blade giving a more accurate surface This configuration is ideal for complex surfaces with high variability slopes Secondary GPS antenna Primary GPS antenna Dual Scraper system Note For the FieldLevel II dual system you must use a scraper with dual hydraulic controls 234 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Configuring the Tandem Dual plugin Note Before you can configure the system it must be professionally inst
344. rading the Field IQ system firmware 2 2 0 eee eee ee eee 467 Unlocking additional devices sass oa a5 ee ee RET ESG SED HE HERERO See ea OSS we 468 Data Management 2 2 ee ee nnn 469 Transferring data to an office computer 1 2 ee ee 470 IDGFA TOMAS 44 pe bee Ea we Oe ee oe ee ae Se eo eee amp 470 enat ail e Docu g see eue sane ahoeae a oH Gee ae Ode oe oR eek ee oe 471 Generating files inthe ONCE 34 264 ere G4 d ikaka DOE SHE e ea SER a 471 Folders on the USB memory stick lt 2 2 44 ha ae0e 506944 O04 054 pee eee eee 472 The AQGPS folder 0 ee 473 Cien olde 6 sea ee eee ee a e A ake Gee Gea eee Gs Oho eee ed ees 474 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 15 Contents 24 16 FaMm lOllelagageeted et Ae enero ead tte 0b 6 nen Ree Oe eae ae ee 475 FiCIQIOINC nt orees eke Ge eek eee Ue Oe eee eh 6 ee ee eh ae 475 EVCULIOIGG 2 e682 6 4 4nns eee eee eee eR Ae Shee ae oe a eS 477 Task Dardis Wau ea cow wee ORG EES Eee Oto oes Beene eo bows 477 Files on the USB memory stick 2 2 0 00 c ee ee 478 Field boundary and AB Line files 2 2 ee ee 478 Coverage loeng dalde re ee eee 3 eae eee Reg e bade e tebe eed A eee ee 479 Track logging WES 4 dee eee hoes a oe aiea i hese eee POs oe ees 479 Poon Miles e824 54665547954 Ac epee Genet eetese sent ayeee 480 Featites Wes a panes pee een nese ee ents Coe en het ee eee Pees eae es oe 481 Programi Log message file 6 ake oe oe oe Ke PRS oy eee oe eee
345. ration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup 2 Inthe Corrections drop down list tap the appropriate corrections to use 3 IfRTK corrections are selected enter the appropriate base station network ID 4 If HP XP type corrections are selected the Autoseed technology options become available For more information see Autoseed fast restart technology page 175 172 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GPS Receiver 6 Entering 450 MHz frequencies If your FmX integrated display has a 450 MHz internal radio you can set the radio frequency and radio wireless modes 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup Sethinigs Frequencies SecureRTK Logging Radar Output Receiver internal Primary F Conrectons Met ID Vehicle No GPS Old radio fw 2 E Wireless Mode TT 460s 4600 Note Up to 19 different frequencies can be stored 3 To add anew frequency tap Add 4 Enter the required frequency for the next available channel and then tap OK The GPS Receiver Settings screen appears 5 From the Wireless Mode drop down list select the appropriate mode and then tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 173 6 The GPS Receiver Enabling SecureRTK SecureRTK is a Trimble proprietary base station security feature that enables a Trimble RTK base station service provider to generate time based access codes for their supported rovers Se
346. rcially available and for which it does not charge separately subject to the procedures for delivery to purchasers of Trimble products generally If you have purchased the Product from an authorized Trimble dealer rather than from Trimble directly Trimble may at its option forward the software Fix to the Trimble dealer for final distribution to you Minor Updates Major Upgrades new products or substantially new software releases as identified by Trimble are expressly excluded from this update process and limited warranty Receipt of software Fixes or other enhancements shall not serve to extend the limited warranty period For purposes of this warranty the following definitions shall apply 1 Fix es means an error correction or other update created to fix a previous software version that does not substantially conform to its Trimble specifications 2 Minor Update occurs when enhancements are made to current features in a software program and 3 Major Upgrade occurs when significant new features are added to software or when a new product containing new features replaces the further development of a current product line Trimble reserves the right to determine in its sole discretion what constitutes a Fix Minor Update or Major Upgrade This Trimble software contains Qt 4 5 libraries licensed under the GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL The source is available from http qt nokia com downloads A copy of th
347. rease coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that is entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the rear row Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Gate Setup Enter the following measurements e Gate Height e Gate Width e Drag chain length per turn of the drag shaft Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Material Layout Section Comba Section Control Section Control Module Location Setup Section Control Setup Seeing Benetton Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 261 310 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 en Section Control Module Setup Tap Setup to configure the section control module s their lo
348. recise and reliable steering With the additions to the software in version 5 11 you can use the FmX integrated display to perform many other functions including implement guidance or field leveling CHAPTER Using this manual The FmX integrated display uses segments of product functionality called plugins to add or remove display options This manual contains a description of all the plugins however it is unlikely that you will use all of the plugins Related information Sources of related information include the following e Release notes The release notes describe new features of the product information not included in the manuals and any changes to the manuals The release notes are available at www trimble com e Trimble training courses Consider a training course to help you use your GPS system to its fullest potential For more information go to the Trimble website at www trimble com training html Technical assistance If you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the product documentation contact your local reseller FmX Integrated Display User Guide 17 1 Introduction Technical Support To contact Trimble Technical Support 1 Goto the Trimble website www trimble com 2 Click the Support button at the top of the screen The Support A Z list of products appears 3 Scroll to the bottom of the list 4 Click the submit an inquiry link A form appears 5 Co
349. recording tap Record again FmX Integrated Display User Guide 205 9 Water Management 206 Defining the boundary Define a boundary to establish the confines of your field Drive around the boundary while you record the shape The boundary is defined on the screen by a single red line The current position is strung back to the start point of the boundary until you finish recording so the boundary is always a closed loop Defining interior points After you survey the boundary of the field select nterior from the list and then tap Record As you drive the system records interior points To complete a full survey create guidance lines and then drive over all of the interior of the field boundary while the system records interior points Defining a section After you define a boundary you can define sections to split the field into parts This enables you to create a design for just that section rather than the whole field There are two ways to define a section e Begin recording the section line outside the boundary Drive through the field to define the section line and then cross outside the boundary again The section is defined e Record a section line inside the boundary The ends of the line will extend to meet the boundary Sections can be useful after you finish working on the field for the day Define the area that you completed as a section when you return to the field you can level the remaining area to a
350. red e Overshoot exceeds 10 depending on the Tracker unit e Steering coulters noticeably shake near end stops To calibrate the proportional steering gain 1 Select the Steering Gain procedure from the calibration list Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration 2 Tap Run Slew Test A warning message appears FmX Integrated Display User Guide 387 13 The TrueTracker Plugin 3 Tap Next Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration A N CAUTION The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements 4 Tap Next in the two screens that appear next 5 Test various gain settings while you monitor the implement steering performance and the values in the Slew Time and Overshoot fields for the Turn Left phase a Adjust the New Gain field if required 388 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 b Tap Turn Left Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration Note The optimum gain setting has short slew time short millisecond reading and overshoot percentage less than 10 6 Repeat Step 5 with Turn Right Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew 7 When you locate the best gain value
351. rigger the manual override e Tap Engage The system disengages and the Engage button turns gray Ifthe button is red tap it to find out why Logging button The Logging button engages and disengages coverage logging Coverage logging is not engaged Coverage logging is engaged Plugin information tabs As with the plugin tabs the plugin information tabs that appear differ depending on which plugins are installed Mapping information tab The Mapping information tab enables you to view your coverage from a number of perspectives Overlap General coverage and overlap 48 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Height Altitude of GPS receiver GPS Quality GPS signal quality Cut Fill Cut and or fill FieldLevel Different varieties See Logging varieties page 65 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 49 3 50 Getting Started Setting Example Coverage hows Applied Rate Average Cross Track Error XTE LEE FmX Integrated Display User Guide Shows variations in application rate Variations in the speed of the vehicle as different colors on the Run screen The position of the implement Getting Started 3 Guidance window The guidance window shows your vehicle coverage field features and guidance lines and for coverage mapping sections appear on the implement Implement with sections For a description of how you can view the guidanc
352. right side of a single implement Note In the FieldLevel II plugin the Antenna Height value can be altered from the Blade Settings tab and relates to the antenna installed on either the front implement or the antenna installed on the left side of a single implement Note Measure the antenna height vertically from the ground to the base of the antenna 4 Enter the appropriate value in the Disengage Raise field This value is used to control the rear implement or the right side of a single implement when Auto is disengaged If you set it to 0 000s then the blade will not move up when you disengage Note In the FieldLevel II plugin the Disengage Raise value can be altered from the Blade Settings tab and relates to the front implements blade or the left side of the blade on a single implement FmX Integrated Display User Guide 237 9 Water Management Note For a tandem system you will want to move the blade up when Auto is disengaged on both the front and back implements as you will be swapping between the two For a dual setup with a single implement it is recommended that you have the left and right Disengage Raise values set to the same value Step 6 Calibrating the Tandem Dual valve module When working with a tandem dual configuration the valve module must be calibrated for both the FieldLevel II plugin and the Tandem Dual plugin e The Fieldlevel II plugin valve calibration relates to the front implement cylinder in a ta
353. ring delay setting to compensate for this slowness and ensure that steering corrections occur at the correct point To improve the performance of your swather adjust the Swather steering delay setting by a small amount 0 1 seconds at a time Test the result between each adjustment After using the EZ Steer system After you finish using the EZ Steer system do the following e Before you leave the vehicle turn off the EZ Steer system power switch or remove the power plug e Ifthe EZ Steer system is not being used pivot the motor away from the steering wheel FmX Integrated Display User Guide 169 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 170 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GPS Receiver m Configuring the GPS receiver m Autoseed fast restart technology m Configuring a GPS receiver with the AgRemote software Enabling NMEA message output Enabling radar output CHAPTER When you install either the Manual Guidance option the Autopilot option or the FieldLevel II plugin the system automatically adds a GPS Receiver option that controls the internal GPS receiver In addition the system may have another GPS receiver For example the TrueTracker system uses a second receiver that is configured with a separate GPS Receiver option This chapter describes how to configure the four versions of the GPS Receiver option FmX Integrated Display User Guide 171 6 The GPS Receiver Configuring the GPS receiver 1 From the Configu
354. riving in Contour mode When you drive in Contour mode the FieldLevel II tab appears as follows Hem Bese ere Up Hill Left Select whichever of these buttons is appropriate Up Hill Right e If you are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your left and the downhill slope on your right select Up Hill Left e If you are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your right and the downhill slope on your left select Up Hill Right Coarse When selected the Up and Down arrows change the blade height by the Coarse Blade Step amount This enables you to move the blade by a large amount instead of small increments Increase the design height by the Blade Step amount Decrease the design height by the Blade Step amount Bench or Rebench Create a benchmark see Benchmarks page 202 Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height Select Guide to get lightbar guidance at the current level Logging Logs the coverage so that you can see on your map where you have been dependent on your Implement Width A shape file is created with cut fill and height information The FieldLevel I height indicators show you whether to raise or lower the blade so the contour remains at the same level 1 Inthe Run screen drive the vehicle to where you want to start the first levee and then set the master benchmark at this point 2 Set which side of the vehicle is uphill Tap Guide drive the vehicle forward following the lightba
355. rol module installed L 2 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Rate and Section Control Module to calibrate Field IQ Calibration Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first See above FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Drive Calibration From the Field JQ Calibration screen select Drive Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate The Field Q Calibration screen has four tabs Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Field IQ Drive Calibration Auto Tuning A N WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system Field IQ Drive Calibration Note Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle FmX Integrated Display User Guide 305 10 The Field IQ Plugin Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Field I1Q Drive Calibration Flow calibration From the Field JQ Calibration screen select Flow Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate The Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration screen appears Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration A N CAUTION Moving parts during this o
356. rt needs to be moved at this location FmX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 Benefits of the Water Management system The Water Management system enables you to e Conserve precious water resources e Reduce erosion and conserve topsoil e Perform touch up leveling each year to avoid expensive land leveling services e Help control the water table using WM Drain drainage features e Use RTK GPS technology which has a significantly larger operating range than a laser and no vertical limit e Work with your existing Agriculture guidance products to manage your fields with one collective system For example you can connect the Autopilot system to the FmxX integrated display at the same time as the water management implement e Manually control the FieldLevel II system with the EZ Remote joystick or with custom switches controlled by a Signal Input Module SIM Requirements of the Water Management system The Water Management system requires e An FmX integrated display with or without the Autopilot system e A platform kit to suit your vehicle and valve type P N 55045 xx e Anunlock code for the FmX integrated display water management functionality e A leveling or drainage implement Installation For installation instructions refer to the FieldLevel IT System Installation Instructions that are specific to your vehicle FmX Integrated Display User Guide 199 9 Water Management Configuration Install
357. rvo systems e Auxiliary sensors can read fan speed bin level air pressure and implement switches Definitions Material A product that is controlled by a PWM valve Servo valve or Rawson drive You can use a planter seed liquid granular seed and granular fertilizer all of which have different set up parameters Section A number of rows or spray nozzles that are controlled by existing shut off valve Tru Count air clutches or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves A section can have either a single row nozzle or multiple rows nozzles depending on how the system is set up Row The individual row unit which seed comes from on the planter This can be controlled individually as a single row section or as a group with other rows in a multiple row section 254 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Units of measure Seed Metric kS ha Thousands of seeds per hectare US Imperial kS a Thousands of seeds per acre Granular seed Metric kg ha Kilograms of seed per hectare US Imperial Ibs a Pounds of seed per acre Liquid application Metric L ha Liters per hectare ee Vines cata oewers OOO Granular fertilizer Metric kg ha Kilograms of fertilizer per hectare eens usmere ero roster ace Installing the Field IQ hardware For information on installing the Field IQ crop input control system on your implement refer to e Field IQ Platform Installation Instructions Tru Count Air Clutch Installation Instructions
358. s paused e GPS positions are lost e The Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives low accuracy positions for example no corrections e To manually disengage the system do one of the following Tap the engage button on the main guidance screen or press the engage button on the optional remote control Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor Press the optional remote engage foot pedal FmX Integrated Display User Guide 167 5 Vehicle Guidance Options When the system is not in use hinge the motor away from the steering wheel and then secure it with the lock pin EZ Steer plugin screen The EZ Steer tab on the Run screen shows the current nudge increment and online aggressiveness values e Tap either the lt or gt button to increase or decrease the Nudge Increment setting by the distance set in the Steering Settings setup screen e Tap either the or button to increase or decrease the Online Aggressiveness setting by 5 The default value is set in the Steering Settings setup screen Vehicle specific performance Before you use the EZ Steer system it is recommended that you consider the following vehicle specific performance suggestions Vehicle type Performance hint 2WD tractor For an EZ Steer system installed on tractors that have SuperSteer for example New Holland TG If the tractor has a SuperSteer front axle for best
359. screen e To enter a number or a name tap in the blank field to open the virtual keypad or keyboard 260 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Note When you have completed the setup wizard once the Next button is replaced with OK You can then view each tab by tapping it on the screen To access the Field IQ setup wizard 1 Inthe Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Setup The Material Overview screen appears The Material Overview screen displays the materials that are currently set up to be applied with the Field IQ system 2 Do the following Tap Add add and set up a new material view or edit the details of an existing material delete an existing material 3 When you tap Add or Edit the Field Q Setup Wizard appears The wizard contains seven tabs The information that appears on each tab depends on the operation you are setting up Enter accurate information into each field of the wizard Linking materials The Field IQ system can link primary and secondary materials where the secondary material uses the output of the primary material For example LiquiBlock valves can be linked to use the output of Tru Count Air Clutch systems When planting seeding or strip tilling you can link the following together e Liquid Granular seed FmX Integrated Display User Guide 261 10 The Field IQ Plugin e Granular fertilizer Anhydrous cannot be
360. screen The New FreeForm button becomes available toward the lower right of the screen 3 Ifnecessary select the Record FreeForm when logging button See Recording FreeForm guidance simultaneously with coverage page 58 4 Tap New FreeForm The Run screen reappears with the Define FF Next Path and Pause buttons on the Mapping tab 56 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Creating a curved FreeForm section 1 Tap Define FF The FreeForm buttons change 2 Tap FreeForm to begin drawing a FreeForm line The line follows the path of the vehicle 3 To complete the FreeForm pattern do one of the following De select the FreeForm button Perform a U turn Note If you are driving an inward spiral leave the FreeForm button selected The segments will continue to be defined Creating a straight FreeForm section 1 Tap Define FF The FreeForm buttons change 2 Drive to the start point of the line and then tap Set A 3 Drive to the other end of the line and then tap Set B The guidance line appears Switching between FreeForm sections You can switch snap between the different FreeForm sections In the following example there are 2 FreeForm sections mem Deseiption 0 o A straight FreeForm AB Line selected A curved FreeForm section You may want guidance along either line FmX Integrated Display User Guide 57 3 58 Getting Started To snap between o
361. shel weight of the current material 308 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Layout tab Enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material Field IQ Setup Material Layt Bin Tank Setup Row Offset Setup Description Bin Tank Setup Allows the system to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for e Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied e Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field FmX Integrated Display User Guide 309 10 The Field IQ Plugin Cee Row Offset Setup Row Offset Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Inc
362. splay User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Drive Setup Valve Setup tab sud iene eee Valve Type Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow Plumbing Inline Valve is in the solution line going to the boom The valve opens to increase the application rate Bypass Valve is in the return to tank line The valve closes to increase the application rate Valve Behavior On Sections Close When all sections ar off the control valve returns to the closed position Closed Lock in Last Position When all sections are off the control valve remains in the last position This setting allows the system to return to the target rate faster Auxiliary Valve Master Valve closes when the system is turned off eS pump Vane opens o np tote ne when essen s tumed oft Pump Disarming Switch Enable Select this option if you have a pump disarming switch installed D Disable Select this option if you do not have a pump disarming switch installed FmX Integrated Display User Guide 313 10 The Field IQ Plugin Feedback Setup tab mm dL E Shaft Encoder Constant Pulses per revolution Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio
363. ssages are output through the NavController harness laptop connector Some GPS receivers can output NMEA messages to an external device To do this 1 On the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen appears 2 Tap NMEA Output NMEA Message Output Settings 3 Select the appropriate Message Rate and then the Baud Rate 4 Inthe Messages Enabled group select the appropriate NMEA message types to output Do not just enable all formats FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GPS Receiver 6 5 Tap OK to continue Note To enable NMEA output from another receiver for example the GPS receiver connected to an TrueTracker system controller select the plugin for that receiver in the plugin list Enabling radar output The FmX integrated display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar pulses are available from port C or port D of the display os om amp fo T CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController II harness will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty em Deseripon smile part number oO Basic power cable 67258 eOe FmX to NavController Il cable with port
364. st be in the ground the implement lift switch must be down Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate 1 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate 2 From the Field Q Calibration screen select the operation under the Module that you would like to calibrate The message Not calibrated appears at the end of the modules that need calibration Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first See above Field IQ Calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 339 10 The Field IQ Plugin 3 Select Drive Calibration and then tap OK The Drive Calibration screen appears The Drive Calibration screen has the following tabs Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Field IQ Drive Calibration Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Field IQ Drive Calibration Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration Enter the following values Allowable Error Gain Minimum Response 340 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Note For information about
365. st shows all the available options To select an item from a list tap the item L EEEIEE Ei Folder hierarchy The FmX integrated display stores data in a folder hierarchy according to client farm field and event Rem Description The customer for whom the work is being done A collection of fields see below Field A specific area of land where events are carried out A field can be created on the display to represent an actual field part of an actual field or a group of more than one actual fields Event A precision agriculture application or activity on a particular field see above For example e Planting of seed e Application of fertilizer or lime e Spraying with fungicide herbicide or insecticide Each client may have several farms each of the farms may consist of several fields and each field may be broken into a number of events FmX Integrated Display User Guide 27 2 Display Overview Using the FmX integrated display 28 Turning on the display Briefly hold down the power button for approximately half a second The display turns on and after a pause the Home screen appears The FmX integrated display has three main screens e Home screen e Configuration screen e Run screen To access each of these screens tap the appropriate button on the right of the display For more information see Control buttons page 24 Turning off the display Close all fields before you
366. station port number Mount Point Base station mount point 7 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears The DCM 300 modem is now configured Note SIM Card Setup tab In the USA the DCM 300 modem comes with an AT amp T SIM card if you subscribe to the Trimble AT amp T or Verizon data plans yoyou do not need to enter the details If you supply your own SIM card you must obtain details of the SIM card from the card provider and then enter them here The SIM card setup is only used for the DCM 300G modem the DCM 300C modem for Verizon does not use the SIM card setup tab 448 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 19 Ag3000 modem Introduction to the Ag3000 modem The Ag3000 modem enables the FmX integrated display to receive RTK corrections from a Trimble VRS network a third party RTK provider or a Continuously Operating Reference Station CORS Connecting the Ag3000 modem The following figure shows how to connect the FmX integrated display to the Autopilot Automated Steering System while using corrections from the Ag3000 modem CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController Il harness O will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty Item Description Trimble par
367. steps to perform the calibration Highlight the arrow and press the Confirm switch on the armrest Updating the Moisture Sensor 60 Series combines only Downloading Version 1 20C from Stellar Support l 2 3 4 5 6 7 Go to www stellarsupport com Select Support amp Downloads in the left column Select Greenstar System update from the Software Downloads column Select the green box labeled Download GSD4 Software Select Run in the file download security warning Once the download is complete choose the preferred language and press OK Follow the Greenstar Update Wizard to load the firmware to the keycard for the original Greenstar monitor FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Loading version 1 20C to the Moisture Sensor l Insert the updated keycard into the mobile processor that is hooked to the Greenstar display it does not matter which slot the keycard is inserted in on the mobile processor Power on the Greenstar monitor Press INFO saa keycard Select Program Target Select Harvest Monitor Combine gt PF34 112 Version 1 12 Moisture 1 1 2 Select Disconnect the mobile processor after the update is complete Yield Monitoring Diagnostics Select the Yield Monitoring tab and then tap Diagnostics The Yield Monitoring Diagnostics screen contains two tabs a Yield Monitor tab and an Inputs tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide 441 18 The
368. straight section select the appropriate section from the list on the left of the screen ToloadaFreeForm curve select a curve from the list on the left of the screen The system loads the closest line to you 3 Tap Load The Run screen appears with the line loaded If you try to load a line that is over 100 km 63 miles away the following message appears Your current position is too far from the field to work in it Adding an access path An access path is a space between your guidance lines They can be useful if there is road or other field feature that breaks the consistent flow of swaths through the middle of your field You can add access paths on a straight or curved pattern but not headlands or pivots Specify the location and width of the access path when you create the line FmX Integrated Display User Guide 59 3 Getting Started From the Swath Management screen tap Access Paths Enter a value in the Swaths between access paths field This value must be equal to or higher than the Swaths in first group setting The next access path will appear this number of swaths beyond the first access path and will continue to repeat after this number of swaths Note You must fill in both of these fields 3 4 Enter a value in the Path width field This is the width of the access paths Enter a value in the Swaths between access paths field The access path will appear after this number of swaths including
369. t Offset Enter the distance from the center of the gap between the two feelers to the centerline of the vehicle A left offset appears as a negative number A right offset appears as a positive number Clear Nudge When Select Yes to clear the AutoPilot nudges when the system is disengaged Disengaged Select No to keep the AutoPilot nudges when the system is disengaged Row Guidance Diagnostics screen The Row Guidance Diagnostics screen displays the following e Offline Distance Sensor status e Sensor voltage e Voltage status FmX Integrated Display User Guide 139 5 Vehicle Guidance Options You can also enable and disable sensors in this screen Row Guidance Diagnosti Operating the Row Guidance plugin Status indicators Mw Mo Sensors on but not active Sensors on and active Error with sensors Row Guidance can be operated with AB Curves and Freeform guidance patterns e AB lines operate as normal Use either A B or A heading 140 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 e Freeform can be used so that once recording and in corn the row guidance sensors drive the first pass From then on the guidance system uses the previous recorded pass but augments it with sensor input e When using Curves and operating on a sharp curve row guidance aggressiveness may need to be increased for performance To turn row guidance sensors on and off while the Autopilot system is engaged tap 4
370. t and then select el 2 Select and then adjust the following settings Status Moisture correction Display of yield with storage moisture Adjust storage moisture Display of current moisture Bulk Density setting 1 Turnthe HOTKEY dial to the scales icon Scales icon FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 2 Adjust the crop density by rotating the HOTKEY until the correct value appears on the screen Note The lbs bu value must be set before the Weight Measured function can be used Zero Yield setting 1 Select and then select EA 2 Select and then select EJ 3 Tap OK Zero Angle setting 1 Select and then select EN 2 Select and then select fi i 3 Tap OK Calibrating the Claas Cebis Quantimeter l Select and then select el and then scroll to On Harvest a full grain tank or truck load Once the tank or truck is full select and then select Select iN and then scroll to Off Weigh the grain tank or truck to get a scale ticket Select and then select FA Select and then select Crop yield weighted Scroll to increase or decrease the value until it matches the weight on the scale ticket ow op oe amp y FmX Integrated Display User Guide 435 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Calibrating the Claas Cebis Auto Pilot Activate the AutoPilot system 1 Select and then select F 2 Select 0 and then scroll to On Setting up the steering an
371. t is loose but firm Select the Automated Steering Deadzone procedure from the calibration list See page 112 Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration instructions Only proceed if the steering sensor colibrabon has been perfomed Press Next Deadzone Left Deadzone Right Tap Next FmX Integrated Display User Guide 119 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 4 Tap Next in the two screens that appear 5 Follow all instructions Tap the Test Right and Test Left buttons to perform the Deadzone calibration As ground conditions affect the results of this calibration it is recommended that you perform the calibration at least three times or until the average deadzone values change by less than about 0 5 To minimize the total amount of space needed for the complete calibration you can reposition the vehicle between the phases of the test If the available flat smooth space is extremely limited re align the vehicle after each segment of the calibration To reposition the vehicle 1 Wait until the software prompts you that the next phase is ready to begin 2 Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn 3 Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available 4 Tap the button to begin the next phase vehicle If an obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue a particular phase of the Automated Deadzone calibration stop the vehicle to abort
372. t land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the NRS can easily be found later in the season You may also want to establish the location of the NRS by noting it as an A B line or flag on the FmX integrated display The ideal NRS would run the length of the field but it should at least be 400 feet long 4 At appropriate crop growth stage take readings of the NRS and an adjacent part of the field yet to be fertilized For most supplied algorithms the following is typical Wheat Feekes growth stage 4 6 Corn V8 V12 5 Find the area where the nitrogen rich strip is most apparent in comparison to the rest of the field this indicates greatest potential for the crop 6 Take sensor readings with RT200 or Hand Held sensor for input to your selected Crop Algorithm 7 Be sure to match nozzles and or rate control system to maximize response time and performance for each field s requirements For more information see Delivery System and Liquid Control page 360 for more details and be sure to consult your application equipment and rate control systems manuals as applicable Field preparations for user defined rate The RT200 system can be used to apply other materials than Nitrogen The GreenSeeker plugin for the FmX integrated display permits a custom algorithm to be entered which is a table of product values versus the NDVI value These values are entered into the Custom Formula Application table see Defining a Custom Table
373. t number FmX integrated display 93100 01 FmX power cable 66694 FmX power cable with relay and switch power bus 67259 oO Basic power cable 67258 e FmX to NavController II cable with port replicator 75741 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 449 19 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems em Description dbo partum a pm Main NavController Il cable 54601 Ag3000 to FmX FM 1000 cable 77273 Ag3000 break out cable 70433 Ag3000 modem 80300 Activating the Ag3000 modem In the USA the Ag3000 is bundled with a Trimble installed AT amp T card which is tied to your Ag3000 unit and cannot be separated You cannot use any other SIM cards with this device Additionally the Ag3000 modem does not work in a CDMA network Outside of the USA you must contact your local VRS Now or third party cell provider for a SIM card Configuring the Ag3000 modem 1 Install the VRS plugin For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 192 2 From the Configuration screen select the VRS plugin and then tap Setup The VRS Configuration screen appears VRS Configuration Setup VAS Server Setup SIM Card Setup 450 FmX Integrated Display User Guide VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 19 3 From the Port drop down list select the FmX port that the Ag3000 modem is connected to The default setting is DCM 300 4 Select the VRS Server Setup tab 5 Enter the required settings as provided by your
374. t the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 2 Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings e Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material e Target Rate Units Choose what units your target rate will apply e Bushel Weight Enter the bushel weight of the current material Rate Alarms Tap Setup to set alarm thresholds and adjust the way seed statistics are calculated e Blockage Sensitivity Alarm When less than this amount of material is sensed for the number of seconds given FmX Integrated Display User Guide 283 10 The Field IQ Plugin Layout tab Enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material Mavberial Bin Tank Setup Laydut Section Control Rate Control Row Monitor 4 Bin Tank Setup Row Offset Setup Description Allows the system
375. t vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line Park the vehicle and exit the cab Insert a second flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results in Table 12 on page 393 Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right ll Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Use the table shown below step 12 to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 12 Average the results of the three runs Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three Use the following table to record the roll correction results Test run Offset distance Offset direction Total Total 3 Average offset value Entering the roll offset 1 Enter the average offset value in the Roll Offset field See Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction page 390 2 Select one of the offline direction options depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the left or right Calibrating the line acquisition aggressiveness 1 Select Line Acquisition from the calibration list
376. ted Antenna left right Measured from the center of the implement to the center of the GPS antenna if mounted The working height of the GPS antenna FmX Integrated Display User Guide 365 12 The TrueGuide Plugin Setting up the TrueGuide system l From the Configuration screen select the TrueGuide plugin and then tap Setup TrueGuide Setup 2 Enter the required global settings pernan T Eee T T Roll compensation e On Applies roll corrections from the tractor e Off Applies no roll corrections CurveGuide e Off The system does not anticipate curves e TrueGuide only Enables the system to anticipate curves to make corrections for TrueGuide guidance only e Always On Keeps CurveGuide on at all times TrueGuide Sets the default aggressiveness the recommended aggressiveness is 100 For Aggressiveness more information see TrueGuide system aggressiveness settings page 371 Rear axle to hitch point Enter the distance between the fixed axle for conventional tractors or the center of rotation for tracked tractors and the draw bar 3 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears 366 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueGuide Plugin 12 Calibrating the TrueGuide implement guidance system To calibrate the TrueGuide system you must have a field open in the Run screen with an AB line configured For more information on opening a field and creating an AB line see Introduction to field features page 40
377. ted Display User Guide 193 8 Overview of Plugins 2 Rename the text file delete the section of the name following the password number For example Password 4850576341 FMX 2DGPSto2GLONASS TXT becomes Password 4850576341 TXT 3 Copy the password text file from the office computer into the AgGPS Firmware folder on the memory stick When you next insert the USB memory stick in the display and turn on the display the plugin is automatically activated Option 2 Activating manually through the display 1 Turn on the display and then tap Unlock in the Home screen Advanced Functionalit i _ Variable Rate G Sechoan Contre Note The Advanced Functionality Access screen features a Tips button that when selected provides more information about the unlock features of the FmX integrated display 194 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Overview of Plugins 8 2 Tap the icon for the plugin that you want to activate and then tap Unlock 3 Inthe screen that appears enter the activation password that your local Trimble reseller provided and then tap OK Ifyou enter a correct password an Enabled message appears The plugin is now activated Ifyou enter an invalid password an error message appears Enter the password again If it still does not work contact your local Trimble reseller FmX Integrated Display User Guide 195 8 Overview of Plugins 196 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Water Manag
378. ted Display User Guide 293 10 The Field IQ Plugin 3 Select Drive Calibration and then tap OK The Drive Calibration screen appears this screen has four tabs Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Auto Tuning N WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system Note Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration 4 Select Flow Calibration and then tap OK The Flow Calibration screen appears Operating in the field 1 From the Home screen tap et 2 From the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK 3 From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK Setting up the Field IQ system for Spraying Make sure that you have set your implement to Sprayer and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs For information on this tab Se O Operation 294 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field I
379. ted Display User Guide 93 4 Display Setup Tap OK The Select Feature screen appears Tap OK The Feature Mapping screen appears Tap OK The Display Setup screen appears oe yl pi p Tap OK Recording a line feature with coverage logging With the FmX integrated display you can record a line feature simultaneously with coverage logging To activate line feature mapping 1 From the Display Setup screen select Feature Mapping and then tap Setup 2 Tap one of the four feature buttons to create or select an active line feature and then tap OK 94 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 3 From the Record Line With Coverage drop down list select the required line feature and then tap OK The Display Setup screen appears 4 Tap OK Data Dictionary The data dictionary editor enables you to predefine the entry options defined below and then select them from a pick list during field and event definition Data dictionary entry fields Client Implement Farm Application method Field Wind speed Event Wind gust speed Operator Wind direction Operator EPA Sky conditions Harvest year Soil conditions Farm location Soil type Vehicle Crop Target pests Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Material Stoppage reason 1 From the Display Setup screen select Data Dictionary and then tap Setup Data Dictionary Setup bob sath 2 From the data list select the data field to
380. tegrated Display User Guide 251 9 Water Management The virtual lightbar at the top of the FmX integrated display s screen guides you onto the design profile Specifically for the Autoslope leveling model P Boot Depth shows the depth of the tile boot or the blade for ditching applications and P Design Slope shows the current slope that the tile or ditch is being installed to See FieldLevel II status text items page 221 Installing a section line Driving in Autoslope mode The Autoslope model can be used for both tile and ditching applications For tile applications the system runs on both self propelled tile machines and pull type plows towed behind a tractor For ditching applications the Autoslope system works with any type of scraper or ditching machine supported by the WM Drain system Note When the system is not running in Auto mode the virtual lightbar or LB25 lightbar will guide to any existing A B line allowing you to use manual guidance for surveying in section lines to be tiled at a constant spacing 252 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 When driving in Autoslope mode the WM Drain tab appears as follows Go to the Survey Work pane where you can survey the section line you will design Design Go to the Design Work pane where you can select a section line and then edit the design Note A white cross is displayed on the run screen showing both horizontal and v
381. tellite geometry Mean sea level height of ground Ant_HAE Antenna height above ellipsoid meters n Ground_HAE Ground height above ellipsoid meters Note Attribute Not Populated 76 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 RG SURES Helsigsecipticn ae Direction of travel with respect to true North decimal degrees Current swath headland number Offline Offline distance from swath center line distance from swath center line meters Along_Line Along line distance from start of swath meters ee Units Units metric Note Attribute Not Populated Field_Name The name of the field Sy The target rate at the current position nn As_Applied Applied rate Note Attribute Not Populated Pitch The pitch Note Attribute Not Populated The roll Note Attribute Not Populated The yaw Note Attribute Not Populated Total volume of material as applied for the current field Only supported for the Aerial Flow Controller Autocal Flow controller and Crophawk Flow Meter Relative_Height Height Status items The Status items are segments of information that can be displayed on the Run screen The information appears in three different locations e In two locations at the top of the screen e Ona slide out tab at the left of the screen The slide out tab overlies the main screen but is transparent so that you can still see guidance underneath it To extend the slide out tab tap the end of the tab on the
382. ter than this limit it cannot be engaged Engage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance greater than this limit it cannot be engaged Disengage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can remain engaged If the vehicle drives offline greater than this limit the system disengages Coverage log Appears on the Run screen to show what areas have been applied e Select When Engaged to automatically show coverage logging when the system is engaged e Select Manual to show coverage logging only when you tap E Override sensitivity Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before the system disengages Steering tab EZ Pilot Settings Vehicle Engage Sbeering Advanced Nudge Increment 0 06 Angle Per Turn 20 0 Online Aggr Freeplay Left D Approach Aggr Freeplay Right Motor Speed Nudge Increment The distance the Nudge button on the Run screen moves the line back to the correct path Angle per Turn The angle that the wheels turn during one full rotation of the steering wheel e Ifthe setting is too low the system will turn the wheel too much and the vehicle will perform s turns e If the setting is too high the system will turn the wheel too little and the vehicle will not hold the line Freeplay Left Adjust this setting if the vehicle drives consistently to the right of the line Freeplay Right Adjust this s
383. ter the new name for the swath and then tap OK The swath is renamed Shifting a swath 1 From the Swath Management screen select the swath to shift from the list on the left 2 Tap Shift The Enter the Shift Distance screen appears 3 Select the correct units for the shift metric feet and inches or rows 4 Enter the distance to move the swath 5 Select the direction for the shift The shift occurs based on the direction of the vehicle not on the A to B orientation of the line For example if you select Left the line shifts left of the operators perspective Note If you shift a line it will shift the original version of the line and remove any skip that you have applied 6 Tap OK The Swath Management screen appears The new shifted swath appears in the swath list on the left of the screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 61 3 62 Getting Started Using the Guide to tabs The Guide to tabs allow automated steering along a swath line feature or FreeForm curve To use the Guide to tabs l 2 Tap the Swaths button The Swath Management screen appears From the Guide to tabs select one of the following Swaths for guidance along a swath Line Features for guidance along a line feature FreeForm for FreeForm curves If you selected Swaths select the appropriate swath from the list on the left and then tap Load Line Features guidance automatically occurs on the nearest
384. text editor such as Notepad Importing AB Lines or boundaries 482 The FmX integrated display can load field boundaries and AB Lines created by an AgGPS 170 Field Computer Remote Data Logger RDL or a Geographic Information System GIS To load GIS boundaries files must be in WGS 84 latitudes longitudes and heights in decimal degrees Use the following method to import an AB Line or a boundary into the FmX integrated display 1 Attach the USB memory stick to an office computer CAUTION The three files that define a line or field shp shx and dbf must have identical names Otherwise they are not recognized If you put multiple sets of files in the folder ensure that you do not have more than one set of files with each name or your files will be overwritten 2 Copy the following files to the AgGPS AB Lines folder on the USB memory stick lt field name gt shp lt field name gt shx lt field name gt dbf 3 Start the FmX integrated display and then tap Run 4 Do one ofthe following Open an existing field Start a new field 5 Tap Swaths FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 6 Tap Import Available Swath 7 Select the field or AB Line to import from the list of available swaths and then tap OK The field or AB Line is imported If the AB Line file contains more than one AB Line all AB Lines in the file are imported 8 Select the AB Line that you
385. th The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper than the maximum depth The maximum depth is shown on the profile as a blue line Min Slope The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design slope to be any less than the minimum slope Outlet to The distance it takes to change the depth of the design from the Outlet Depth to the Optimal Optimal Depth The tile plow will level out over a longer distance rather than trying to achieve the depth too quickly at the start of a run Outlet Depth The depth at which the design profile will be at the outlet The Outlet Depth can either be entered or measured To measure the Outlet Depth you can drop the tile plow into the ground so that the boot is at the same height as the main or outlet Tap Measure the outlet Depth is entered automatically When you do this another point is added onto the section line providing that you are within 20m 65 ft of the end of the surveyed section line The height of the outlet is displayed on the profile in a yellow tag Note For ditching applications the Min Depth and Optimal Depth are set close to the surface 5 Tap OK 6 Inthe Run screen you can install the tile or clean the ditch from either the outlet or the top end of the profile The section line that you install to appears as red on the screen where other section lines are white FmX In
386. that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library ifthe user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the
387. the Calibration step by transferring the Maximum Average and Minimum NDVI values into rows two three and four respectively Go to Step 7 Select the Number Of Rows field Use the on screen keypad to enter a value and then tap OK The number of available NDVI and Rate fields are dictated by the value entered in the Number Of Rows field Typically the number of rows for the custom table are two more than the number of filed calibration areas sampled This allows for starting at zero and ending at 99 NDVI Select a NDVI field to enter a custom value Tap OK Select a corresponding Rate field to enter a custom value Tap OK Select the Output tab In the Material Type list select either Granular or Liquid Tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 GreenSeeker diagnostics The GreenSeeker Diagnostics screen reports on the quantity of sensors detected on system and provides any error conditions The appearance of both the hardware and firmware version information at the top of the diagnostics screen indicates that the FmX integrated display and RT200 are communicating Erroneous data The RT200 system monitors the sensors for proper operation and if a sensor reports erroneous data the data is not included in the rate control calculation Erroneous data can come from mud on the sensor lenses sensors viewing concrete snow wet asphalt or other non soil or non plant surface Error conditions
388. the FmX integrated display Auto width detection Auto width detection aids accurate area calculations by automatically reducing the cut width when entering or exiting point rows and other previously harvested areas If you are harvesting a row crop with pre configured rows then the width reduces on an overlap by one row at a time Tap or m at the bottom of the map screen to manually reduce the cut width each time you tap the button the cut width is reduced by one sixteenth of the head width Tap on the right hand side to disable the rows from the right or tap mi on the left hand side to disable rows from the left To re enable the sections tap mi on the right hand side to enable the rows to the right or tap on the left hand side to enable the rows to the left Operating the Yield Monitoring plugin Yield Monitoring Run screen The Yield Monitoring run screen has two pages e Page 1 shows current information about an event and allows you to manipulate the materials and sections You can edit the information that appears on this page e Page 2 shows the current data of the event You can edit the information that appears on this page in the Choose Status Items tab 424 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 The following shows the Yield Monitoring run screen with the Loads and Calibration page Feature Deseripfion OOOO Current event Tap any item to make changes information
389. the PGain setting affect two steering characteristics e Slew Time The amount of time the steering coulters take to move from the far left to the far right position and vice versa e Overshoot The percentage by which the steering coulters exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value To correct slight variations caused by valve current response friction and hydraulic fluid viscosity alter these settings High PGain values Low PGain values Decrease the slew time and increase the overshoot Increase the slew time and decrease the overshoot This This provides rapid responses but can cause the improves the stability but can introduce significant steering to exhibit signs of instability for example delays in the steering response and can cause the vehicle a tendency to excessively overshoot to oscillate from side to side 386 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Notes on performing the proportional steering gain calibration e Perform the Automatic Deadzone calibration immediately before you run the PGain calibration even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past e Perform this calibration on a level surface that is free of obstructions e Run the engine at full throttle e Raise the implement Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs e Slew times no longer decrease a low value is requi
390. the WM Survey plugin for more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 192 To configure the plugin 1 From the Configuration screen select the WM Survey plugin and then tap Setup Settings Relative Heights Siarvey Height Offset Survey Point Density Cut Fil Color Range 2 Set the Survey Height Offset This value represents the difference between the height of the blade when surveying and the height of the blade when moving dirt To measure this value park the implement on a flat surface and raise the blade up to its highest limit and then measure the distance from the bottom of the blade to the surface of the ground The Survey Height Offset will be applied to all surveys to avoid the need to re bench between Survey mode and moving dirt 3 Set the survey point density from the distance this can be any value between 5 ft and 100 ft When you create a survey of a field this setting determines the distance between the collected survey mapping points 4 Set the Cut fill Color Range The Cut fill color range defines the vertical range in which the colors are spread over the cut fill map The cut fill map appears only after you have surveyed the field and defined a design plane The range is displayed from the highest cut value to the highest fill value Example If your highest cut value is 1 foot and your highest fill value is 1 foot and you set your Cut fill color range to 2 feet then the colors will be spread e
391. the appropriate values for your sprayer refer to the support note Field IQ crop Input Control System For Sprayers and Spreaders 4 5 6 Select Flow Calibration and then tap OK The Flow Calibration screen appears In the Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration screen enter the Flow Meter type the Flow Meter Calibration and the Minimum Flow Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration Tap Run Calibration and then follow the on screen instructions Operating in the field 1 2A From the Home screen tap eft From the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 341 10 The Field IQ Plugin Using the Diagnostics tab 1 Select the Field IQ plugin tab and then tap Diagnostics The following screen appears Field IQ Diagnostics 2 To enable the sections tap the numbered section tabs above each of the section icons 3 The Operations tab displays the current status of Control Mode Auto or Manual Rate Switch Mode Manual Rate 1 or Rate 2 Master Switch Off On or Jump Start This screen also enables you to manually enter values for Tank Level Enter a new value or select Refill Tank Target Rate The required rate for the rate switch Decrease or increase Speed Decrease or increase Switch
392. the feature that you selected assigned to the feature button Creating a point feature 1 Enter values for the following settings Description The name of the feature For example Tree Alarm Radius When the vehicle comes within this radius of the feature the alarm appears The alarm radius appears on the screen as a solid red block of color The alarm radius is more serious than the warning radius so set it to a shorter distance appear The warning radius appears on the screen as an orange line Average Position This is a way to improve the quality of the point feature position e If you click Yes the display calculates the average position of the feature over 30 seconds If you click No the display places the feature at the coordinates that the vehicle is at when you tap the button 2 To select the feature appearance color tap Color 90 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 3 To return to the Select Feature screen tap OK The new feature appears in the Point list 4 Select the new feature from the list and then tap OK The new feature appears on the button you selected 5 To exit tap OK Creating a line feature 1 Inthe Name field enter a name for the feature 2 To select the feature appearance color tap Color 3 To return to the Select Feature screen tap OK The new line feature appears in the Line list 4 Select the new feature in the list and then tap OK The new featur
393. the following steps l 2 3 4 5 Activate the system See page 376 Configure the implement settings See page 376 Configure the implement controller See page 379 Configure the implement See page 381 Calibrate the implement See page 382 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 375 13 The TrueTracker Plugin 376 Activating the TrueTracker system Before you can use the TrueTracker system you must activate it on the FmX integrated display For step by step instructions see Entering the password to activate a plugin page 193 Note This process requires you to enter the activation password If you do not have an activation password contact your local Trimble reseller Configuring the implement settings l Zi 3 From the Home screen tap eat Tap the implement Edit button In the Configuration Selection screen ensure that the Autopilot option and the TrueTracker plugin are both installed See Adding or removing a plugin page 192 On the Configuration screen select the TrueTracker plugin and then tap Setup Configuring the Vehicle tab od eo Stl From the Connector list select the port that the TrueTracker implement controller is connected to For the Current Selection list tap Edit to change the vehicle profile location and implement model see Configuring the implement make and model page 379 From the Vehicle Color list select the color you wish your vehicle to appear on the display screen
394. the implement see Configuring the implement for leveling drainage page 202 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 241 9 Water Management Step 2 Configuring the WM Drain settings 1 From the Configuration screen select the WM Drain plugin and then tap Setup 2 Set the following in the Implement tab Description Antenna Height The distance from the antenna to the bottom of the boot Offset Survey Height The distance from the bottom of the blade to the ground when implement is Offset raise all the way up to do a survey Survey Point Any value between 5 ft and 100 ft This setting determines the distance Spacing between the collected survey mapping points 242 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 3 Select the Steps tab and then set the following WM Drain Setup G eee Coarse allows you to change height steps in larger increments Coarse allows you to change pitch steps in larger increments On grade Limit The limit you enter here sets the distance the blade can move before the green blade height indicators change to a thin red arrow At twice this distance the height indicators become thick red arrows See Blade position indicators page 220 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 243 9 Water Management 4 Select the Relative Heights tab and then set the following Relative Heights Select Enabled to use relative heights from the master benchmark Select Disabled to use GPS heights
395. the modem Activating the DCM 300 modem The DCM 300 modem is available with either an HSDPA modem for use with GSM cellular networks globally or an EVDO modem for use with the Verizon wireless network in the United States Trimble offers services for the DCM 300 modem that can be purchased from a Trimble store Services include the VRS Now Ag correction service Sync data transfer Dispatch asset tracking and wireless data plans USA only FmX Integrated Display User Guide VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 19 Configuring the DCM 300 modem 1 Install the VRS plugin For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 192 2 To use VRS corrections the GPS Setup tab must be configured with a Correction type of Trimble VRS Manual Guidance GPS Receiver Settings Note The FmX display must be unlocked for RTK to use the Trimble VRS correction type 3 From the Configuration screen select the VRS plugin and then tap Setup The VRS Configuration screen appears 4 From the Device drop down list select the type of modem that is connected The default is DCM 300 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 447 19 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 5 Select the VRS Server Setup tab VRS Configuration 6 Enter the required settings as provided by your Trimble VRS Now or Network RTK operator as described below Server Name Address RTK VRS CORS base station broadcast name Server Port Number Base
396. the percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area FmX Integrated Display User Guide 333 10 The Field IQ Plugin Rate Control tab Adjust the rate control settings Field IQ Setup a beri l nT Rate Control On The system sets the target rate implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a screen appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup e Advanced The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages Number of Nozzles Enter the number of spray nozzles on the sprayer 334 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Drive Setup Valve Setup tab a ckakcn a Valve Type Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump FmX Integrated Display User Guide 335 10 The Field IQ Plugin Feedback Setup tab Flow Meter Type Select the type of flow meter that is connected Flowmeter Calibration Enter the number from the flow meter tag Min Flow Enter the required minimum flow rate for the system Use t
397. tion on the implement To compensate for this system delay you can set a lead time to trigger the pulse slightly early so that the action occurs at the correct location For this calibration you drive the vehicle along a line and back using the Remote Output plugin to mark points on the ground If the remote output is correctly calibrated the points that you generate when driving in both directions will be close together This section describes some implement calibration steps See also Chapter 7 Implement Configuration Do the following 1 Set the front back offset See page 413 2 Calibrate the front back offset See page 413 3 Set the lead time See page 413 412 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Remote Output Plugin 15 Setting the front back offset A N CAUTION You must configure the correct front back offset If you are using an Autopilot system set the front back offset to the distance from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the implement If you are using manual guidance set the front back offset to the distance from the antenna center point to the implement l Di Accurately measure whichever of the following options is appropriate Autopilot systems The distance between the fixed axle of the vehicle and the part of the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground Manual guidance systems The distance between the antenna center point and the part of the implement where the tri
398. tly over the working point of the implement It is recommended that these offsets are minimized whenever possible 1 Select Roll Antenna Correction from the calibration list see page 111 Autopilot Roll Antenna Compensation Aight of the line 2 Before changing these settings complete the following procedures Notes on configuring the antenna position e Before configuring the antenna compensation make sure that The Autopilot system is completely set up The Autopilot software is properly configured The correct GPS corrections are enabled You read this section carefully e If multiple GPS technologies will be used for example RTK and SBAS use the technology with the highest accuracy when you perform the Roll Correction calibration Setting the antenna height above the ground Place the tractor on a flat level surface 1 1 2 Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the GPS receiver or antenna 3 Enter this value in the Antenna Height Above Ground field FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 2 Setting the antenna distance from the fixed axle 1 Place the tractor on a flat level surface 2 Measure the distance from the fixed axle to the center of the GPS receiver or antenna 3 Enter this value into the Antenna Distance from Fixed Axle field Enter a negative value if the GPS receiver antenna is to the rear of the fixed axle The nose of the vehicle is consider
399. ttribute file Column Field description funnos Track attribute file version FF Horizontal Dilution of Precision a measure of the quality of positions based on satellite geometry DGPS signal correction age FmX Integrated Display User Guide 479 23 Data Management Ground_HAE Ground height above ellipsoid Speed GPS derived ground speed GPs derved rounds RBA Swath Num _ Correntswathheadland number Oooo Column Field description Units notes kph Field_Name The name of the field The target rate at the current position Target The target application rate when serial rate control TAC or Field IQ are used As applied The actual rate applied by the rate control system when serial rate control TAC or Field IQ are used NDVI The NDVI values recorded when using the GreenSeeker plugin Note Not currently implemented Total_Qty Total volume of material as applied for the current field Only supported for the Aerial Flow Controller Autocal Flow controller and Crophawk Flow Meter Event History file The EventHistory dbf file contains information on every event carried out in the field Patete fedwasopen OOOO Date open Date the field was opened Time the field was opened Date close Date the field was closed Time close Time the field was closed Duration Length of time that the field was open seconds 480 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Description Primary
400. tus text items to appear permanently at the top of the screen or ona slide out tab To view the following items tap the corrections status button at the top right of the screen Implement GPS Status Implement Correction Type Implement Correction Age Latitude Longitude Altitude Satellites HDOP VDOP Network ID FmX Integrated Display User Guide 395 13 The TrueTracker Plugin Implement tab When the TrueTracker plugin is installed the TrueTracker tab becomes available on the main Run screen The TrueTracker tab enables you to adjust the implement steering independently of the vehicle steering For example if you can see that the implement is consistently to one side of the guidance line but the vehicle is correctly online you can apply Trim to the implement to correct it When turned on Zero Steering commands the steering to zero degrees left right centering the steering device on the implement This option can be turned on in the field keeping the coulters pointed straight or just at the ends of the field to center the steering Note Disengaging the TrueTracker system automatically turns off Zero Steering Note If the implement is consistently offline there may be a roll calibration issue Recheck the roll calibration Configuring the Engage button You can configure the Engage button to work in two different ways Single press The Engage button engages with one tap e The first tap engages implement and v
401. u plan to use the same base receiver setup each time you use this survey data you can set the option to No However if you plan to shift the location of the base set this option to Yes FmX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 If you open a field that has an existing master benchmark and have selected Force Rebench a large green circle is shown for 100 m 300 ft around the master benchmark flag This indicates that you need to rebench over the master benchmark location to ensure that the design is aligned with the previous position You must be within this circle before you can re establish the master benchmark To ensure that the design is properly aligned 1 Return exactly to the master benchmark location that you marked on the ground for example with flags see Creating a benchmark page 204 regardless of where your current onscreen position appears to be 2 Re establish the benchmark This process accommodates RTK base station setup differences from the last time the field was open Collecting field data After you create the benchmark s collect field layout data On the WM Survey tab that appears on the Run screen see page 193 use the drop down menu to select one of the following types of field layout data Description The outside of the field Points on the inside of the boundary Can be used to divide the field into smaller sections To record the layout data tap Record To stop
402. ugin tab now includes Ref and Non Ref buttons along with a NDVI bar graph showing the real time combined average NDVI from the RT200 module Position the vehicle at the reference locations To record NDVI data from the reference strip tap Ref drive the reference strip and then tap Ref again to end recording FmX Integrated Display User Guide 353 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin 5 To record NDVI data from the non reference strip tap Non Ref drive the non reference strip and then tap Non Ref again to end recording Note As the NDVI is collected the data is stored in respective fields on the GreenSeeker calibration page Keep the vehicle moving as you collect the data stopping in one location affects the average values The Ref and Non Ref buttons change to a lighter color when selected or active 6 Tap Done GreenSeeker Calibration ininum You now see the values that were collected in Step 4 and Step 5 Notes To collect fresh data from this screen tap the Non Ref or Reference buttons You will not see the new values until you deselect the respective button To manually override or input data select the various fields and then use the screen keypad The Reference values in the Maximum Average and Minimum fields are also available for the Auto Calibration function on the Algorithm tab 354 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 7 8 The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 When you are satisfied with the data select the
403. ummary for the event To reduce the time it takes to close a field saving the summary file can be disabled To turn Save Summaries off do the following 1 Inthe Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup 2 Inthe Display Setup screen select Map Settings and then tap Setup 3 Inthe Mapping screen select On or Off from the Save Summaries list For more information see Saving a PDF version of the current field page 465 44 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 The Run screen layout The Run screen is where you receive guidance and drive the vehicle The appearance of the screen changes depending on which plugins you have installed Description Virtual lightbar fo eee OOO o fome o pm OSS These items are described in more detail below FmX Integrated Display User Guide 45 3 46 Getting Started Hashed grids Hashed grids provide an immediate measure of distance Each small square represents 10 feet and each dark green outline represents 50 feet Virtual lightbar The virtual lightbar provides vehicle guidance When the vehicle is perfectly on the guidance line the three center green LEDs are lit 9000000000000 00 0000000000000 When the vehicle moves off the guidance line to the left or the right the three LEDs that are lit drift to the side 90900000000000004790000000000000 To configure the virtual lightbar see Lightbar page 96 Plugin tabs
404. until you have all the items you require or the list is full The information appears in the left field 2 Set the right Info text items In the Jnfo Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the right Set Item button c Repeat Step a and Step b until you have all the items you require or the list is full The information appears in the right field d To save the configuration tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 87 4 Display Setup Selecting the language units of measure and keyboard layout To select the default language for the display 1 Inthe Display Setup screen select Language amp Units and then tap SETUP The Language amp Units setup screen appears Language amp Unite kinini 2 Select the language to use from the Language drop down list If you change the language a message warns that the display will turn off so that the change can take effect The default language is English 3 To select the unit of measure for the display select the preferred option from the Display Units drop down list Metric Feet and Inches Decimal Feet The default option is Feet and Inches 4 Set the keyboard layout The FmX integrated display uses a virtual keyboard on the touch screen for you to enter characters see page 25 The virtual keyboard can be laid out in two ways Description ABCDEF The letters appear in alphabetical order QWERTY The keyboard is laid out like the QWERT
405. ure Dist to Pause East The distance to the pause position The distance that the vehicle is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the vehicle is to the west of the field origin point Engaged Time The length of time that the system has been engaged Event Coverage Area The area that has been logged during the current event Event Coverage Distance The distance covered while logging during the current event Event Coverage Time The length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the current event Event Name Name of the current event FmX Integrated Display User Guide 79 4 Display Setup Description Name of the current farm esros O H Error Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the GPS position in 2 dimensions Heading The current heading of the vehicle in degrees from direct north Heading to Feature Vehicle location relative to the nearest feature feature is directly ahead 0 directly behind 180 Heading to Pause Direction vehicle is facing relative to the paused vehicle position directly ahead 0 directly behind 180 Impl Altitude The current height of the implement Impl CMR Percent The percentage of radio CMR packets received by the implement GPS receiver over the last 100 seconds Impl Correction Age The age of the corrections used by the implement receiver Impl Correction Type The correction type used
406. uto Tuning WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system Field IQ Drive Calibration Note Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Field IQ Drive Calibration Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 279 10 The Field IQ Plugin Flow Calibration From the Field JQ Calibration screen select Flow Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate The Planter Calibration screen appears Planter Calibration 1 Inthe Calibrate tab enter the following aS RO he ee i Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate Shaft Encoder Pulses per revolution Constant Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters To start out leave the value at 1 000 After the calibration test the system may adjust this number Follow the on screen insttructions to test the settings you entered 280 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 2 Select the Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set Planter Calibrat
407. venly across your cut fill map If you change the cut fill color range to 1 foot then the colors will become more focused around the neutral area providing more detail closer to the grade 200 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Water Management 9 5 Select the Relative Heights tab Survey Setup 6 Select Enabled from the Relative Heights drop down list By default coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark Setting the relative positions establishes the coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set These coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic mapping every time the field is opened You can set the relative position using these values the X axis coordinate Relative X the Y axis coordinate Relative Y the height Height Offset 7 Enter the appropriate offset in each field and then tap OK to return to the Survey Setup screen 50 Tip To view relative offset values on the Run screen set the offsets as status text items on he slide out tab 8 Select whether or not the system will force you to rebench each time that you reload the field Note If you configure the Force Rebench setting to No the RTK base station must be placed in exactly the same position for the field to be correct FmX Integrated Display User Guide 201 9 Water Management Configuring the implement for leveling drainage 1 From the Configuration screen select Implement and then tap Setup 2
408. ver S Correction Age The time since the GPS corrections were last received from the secondary FieldLEvel GPS receiver S Correction Type The correction type used by the secondary blade receiver 82 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 S Cut Fill The difference between the Secondary Blade Height and the Secondary Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height When Fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height S Design Height The height the secondary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green S Distance Traveled For use with FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode The distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled S East The distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin point S GPS Status The GPS correction type that the secondary blade GPS receiver is currently using S H Error Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the secondary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions S HDOP The
409. verage data e Variable rate control e Boom Row switching e Logging of topographic mapping data e Output of information for analysis in office based Geographic Information System GIS software e Seed Liquid Granular and Anhydrous Ammonia control e Seed monitoring FmX Integrated Display User Guide 23 2 Display Overview Control buttons On the displays Home screen and Run screen there are three touch sensitive buttons on the right side Exit the current screen Access the Configuration screen see page 30 via the Current Configurations screen Access the Run screen see page 31 via the Configuration Selection screen Touch screen elements The following interactive features appear on the touch screen e Virtual buttons e Virtual keyboard e Virtual number pad e Drop down boxes e Slider bars e Lists For more information see Slide out tabs in Status items page 79 Virtual buttons The most common way to interact with the display is to use the virtual buttons Treat a virtual button as you would a normal button To press the button tap the area of the screen where it appears i Fence 24 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Some FmX integrated display buttons have a direct action while others change to show that a feature is enabled or disabled This button is currently selected Virtual keyboard Use the virtual keyboard to enter text and numbers Tap o oo
410. vered in which product FmX Integrated Display User Guide 65 3 Getting Started e Plant or apply two or more different products side by side and record the locations in your field For example you could put corn seed in the left side hoppers on your planter and clover seed in the right side hoppers and track where each set of seeds is planted The varieties are assigned to rows on your implement Specify the number of rows on your implement when you configure it For more information see Adjusting the implement settings page 184 To configure varieties from the Field Selection screen tap Hybrid Setup Add o Add a new variety and select a name using the virtual keyboard Select a variety name in the list and then tap Remove to delete it Select a variety name in the list and then tap Edit to change the settings Change the color that will appear on the Run screen when you are applying this variety You can also select record keeping information 66 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Assign varieties to segments of coverage logging Select the row numbers on your implement that will be applying each variety Do this for each variety you have added Clear Clear all current assignments Assignments When you enable coverage logging and set the Mapping information tab drop down list to Variety this variety color appears in the guidance window See page 48 X Tip For quick access to the Hybrid Setup s
411. w 2 Attach the RAM mount to the ball on the mounting plate 3 Select a position in the cab for the display The FmX integrated display is mounted in the cab with a bar style RAM mount 4 Use the provided bolts to attach the bar mount to the rail 5 Hold the display in the selected location to ensure that it is comfortably accessible from the driver s seat 6 Attach the other end of the RAM mount to the ball on the bar mount and then tighten the screw 36 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Connecting the display Note The FmX integrated display connects to the Autopilot automated steering system The Autopilot system requires professional installation in your vehicle If the Autopilot system is not currently installed in your vehicle consult your local reseller 1 Connect one end of the Autopilot harness to the vehicle 2 Connect the Autopilot to FmX cable to port C of the FmX integrated display 3 Connect the implement switch if required Inserting a memory stick into the USB socket The USB socket is on the rear of the display A N CAUTION Do not remove the USB memory stick from the socket while the display is writing to or from the device This will corrupt the data A N CAUTION If required only use a USB hub that has an external power option connecting multiple USB devices to the display without this could damage the USB port To insert the USB memory stick 1 Rotate the
412. work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provide
413. ws Field IQ section control module s needed using Tru Count air clutches Seed Rate Control using up to 4 Rawson drives to change seed population Seed Rate control using up to 4 PWM drives to change seed population Liquid Fertilizer Control of up to 48 individual liquid nozzles Field IQ section control module s needed using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves Variety tracking Sprayer Liquid Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve Liquid Section Control of up to 48 individual spray nozzles Field IQ Section Control Module s needed using existing boom shutoff valves or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves Strip till liquid Liquid Section Control of up to 48 sections or individual sections Field IQ Section Control Module s needed using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves Liquid Rate Control using up to 2 Rawson drives connected to fixed displacement pumps such as CDS John Blue piston pumps to change liquid rate Field lIQ Rawson Control Module s needed Liquid Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and flow meter Spreading Spreading Rate Control using a Rawson Drive Field IQ Rawson Control Module s needed Spreading Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and application rate sensor Air seeder e Section Control of up to 96 rows of blockage sensors e Section Control of multiple materials simultaneously with manual rate or prescription e Control existing PWM linear actuators or se
414. y User Guide 301 10 The Field IQ Plugin Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup x i Pa Laaa a i j j ki P E a eg I HEC LH L nere aoe Oma pej WED mg Ba ml ja ai r i i A aeee a iat TE FI Typ d Bal in i z ki jy s m iml NENSI e e e aral yeaa Se i i E ia fi l 7 i When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information ti Sensor Type Select from Air pressure vacuum Liquid pressure NH3 pressure Bin level RPM Gate Height Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify which wire is controlling the sensor 302 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Operation tab Field IQ Setup Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting controls when to shut the system down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override This setting maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops Speed below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during
415. y blade receiver relative to the field origin point a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point The Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the VDOP is higher lower is better S VDOP S Vertical Error Estimate The current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver Satellites The number of satellites the system is currently receiving Secondary Pressure The current pressure as reported by the secondary pressure sensor 02 Cc O FmX Integrated Display User Guide 83 4 Display Setup Description Section Line Number The number of the current section line Seed Mults The percentage of time an more than one seed is placed for every intended drop Seed Population The amount of seed planted per acre hectare Seed Singulation The percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended drop Seed Skips The percentage of seed that has not been planted Seed Spacing The percentage of seed that has been applied in the specified spacing Session Coverage Area The area that has been logged during the current session Session Coverage Dist The distance covered while logging during the current session Session Coverage Time The length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the current sessi
416. y cause undesired operation Responsible Party Trimble Navigation 935 Stewart Drive Sunnyvale CA 94085 Telephone 1 408 481 8000 Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada This apparatus complies with Canadian RSS GEN RSS 310 RSS 210 and RSS 119 Cet appareil est conforme a la norme CNR GEN CNR 310 CNR 210 et CNR 119 du Canada Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement Attention This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Australia and New Zealand This product conforms with the regulatory requirements of the Australian Communications Authority ACA EMC framework thus satisfying the requirements for C Tick Marking and sale within i Australia and New Zealand Notice to Our European Union Customers For product recycling instructions and more information please go to www trimble com ev shtml Recycling in Europe To recycle Trimble WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment products that run on electrical power Call 31 497 53 24 30 and ask for the WEEE Associate Or mail a request for recycling instructions to Trimble Europe BV c o Menlo Worldwide Logistics Meerheide 45 5521 DZ Eersel NL Safety Warnings A gt gt FP F amp F PP Always follow t
417. you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Libr

FmX Integrated Display User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents